JP6508155B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided to the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

JP, 2009-261415, A

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, management of the gaming machine needs to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably managing gaming machines.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a state transition means for transitioning a game state to an advantageous game state advantageous to a player;
Predetermined storage execution means for storing a predetermined number of games, which is a total of the number of games executed in the advantageous gaming state, in a predetermined storage means;
Deriving means for deriving the ratio of the predetermined number of games to the total number of games which is the sum of the number of games executed in each gaming state including the advantageous gaming state and gaming states other than the advantageous gaming state ;
Restricting means for restricting the occurrence of transition to the advantageous gaming state after that, based on the fact that the rate derived by the deriving means is a rate of regulatory response ;
Equipped with
The state transition means includes transition determination means for executing transition determination processing for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous gaming state based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger,
This gaming machine is an alternative that, in the case where the predetermined trigger occurs in a situation where the transition to the advantageous game state is restricted by the restriction means, substitutes alternative benefits instead of executing the transition decision processing. It is equipped with the privilege giving means,
If the alternative benefit is granted, the transition to the advantageous gaming state is likely to occur after the situation in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state is restricted by the regulating means is released. It features.

  According to the present invention, management of a gaming machine can be suitably performed.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view which disassembles and shows the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is an explanatory view for explaining composition concerning discharge of a game ball which flowed down a game field. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for the etc. lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by main side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining composition which makes a main CPU detect a detection result of a ball entering detection sensor. It is a flowchart which shows the ball | bowl detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of various apparatuses which communicate between a payout control apparatus and the said payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by delivery side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of management IC. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of an input port of a management side I / F. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of memory for correspondence. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of memory for history. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed by management side CPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of the 1st-15th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in memory for correspondence. It is a flowchart which shows the output process for management performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed by management side CPU. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that historical information is stored in memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the process for data output performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed by management side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining composition of an input port of management side I / F in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed by management side CPU. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of a 1st-12th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in memory for correspondence. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of IC for management in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of an input port of a management side I / F. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the failure response process performed by the management side CPU in 4th Embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the opportunity specific process performed by the main side CPU in 5th Embodiment, It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed by (b) management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the opportunity specific process performed by the main side CPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed by management side CPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed by management side CPU in 8th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of memory for history in a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed by management side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of MPU of the main control unit in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball | bowl detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of the main control unit in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of an input port of a management side I / F. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of memory for history. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter management process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path which transmits the detection result of each ball | bowl detection sensor in 12th Embodiment to main side CPU and management IC. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of the main control unit in a 13th embodiment, and a sound emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure electric power control process performed by main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows production control processing performed by sound light side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure change start process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power start process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for describing a normal counter area, an opening / closing execution mode counter area, and a high-frequency support mode counter area provided in the main RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the ball | bowl detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the usual ball entering detection processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a check performed by main side CPU. (A) A front view of the special view display unit, (A) an explanatory view for explaining display contents of the special view display unit, (b) a front view of the common view display unit, (B) It is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of a figure display part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for waiting for the check performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process in display of the check result performed by main side CPU. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the display waiting period of a check and the display period of a check result progress. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. (A)-(j) It is a figure which shows separately the symbol variably displayed by symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) is a figure which shows the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus in the display period of a check waiting period or a check result. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a check performed by the main side CPU in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process in display of the check result performed by main side CPU. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the display waiting period of a check and the display period of a check result progress. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port provided in MPU of the sound emission control apparatus in 15th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the area for correspondence provided in the sound light side ROM. It is a flowchart which shows the output process for management performed by main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows production control processing performed by sound light side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the counter area for normal, the counter area for open / close execution mode, and the counter area for high-frequency support modes provided in the sound side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed by sound light side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a check performed by sound light side CPU. It is a front view of the main control unit in a 16th embodiment. It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. FIG. 76 is a front view of the slot machine in the seventeenth embodiment. It is a perspective view of a slot machine in the state where a front door was opened. It is a front view of a housing. It is an explanatory view for explaining the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is a front view of a display window part. It is an explanatory view for explaining the correspondence of the combination of the symbol which will be a prize, and the privilege given when it becomes a prize. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed by main side MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal modes. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning condition established when the normal mode lottery table is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st RT mode lottery table. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning condition established when the first RT mode lottery table is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT modes. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning condition established when the second RT mode lottery table is selected. It is a flowchart which shows the response | compatibility process at the time of the game end performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer opportunity management process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ART state process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game management process performed by main side MPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for illumination performed by main side MPU. (A), (b) It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the opening angle of a front door, and the control state of the apparatus for illuminations. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of the apparatus for illumination in case a front door is an open state and the opening angle is below a predetermined opening angle, (b) The opening angle of a front door is maximum opening It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of the apparatus for illumination in, when it is an angle. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various areas provided in the main RAM in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is for explaining the contents of various counters provided in the total accumulation buffer. It is an explanatory view, (c) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters provided in the first accumulation buffer, (d) explains the contents of various counters provided in the second accumulation buffer FIG. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the log | history of a game is managed. It is a flowchart which shows the game management process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the object switching process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by main side MPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of IC for management in 19th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the 1st history memory and the 2nd history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the object switching process performed by management side CPU.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 2, the structure in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is abbreviate | omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. Have. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plate members to four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential component, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on an island facility of the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 is pivotable forward with the left side as the pivoting base end and the right side as the pivoting tip side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be pivoted forward with the left side as a pivoting base end and the right side as a pivoting tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated backward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip end side in a front view.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function to lock the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened, and The door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 mainly includes a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is removably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24. As shown in FIG.

  The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide means Guide rails are configured as. The game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window holes 23 in the resin base 21 are guided to the top of the game area PA by the guide rails.

  Incidentally, the game ball firing mechanism 27 includes a firing rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying game balls stored in an upper tray 55a described later onto the firing rail 27a, and a firing rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that causes the game ball supplied to the control unit to shoot toward the guide rail. By rotating the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the gaming ball is fired.

  The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operation opening 33, a second operation opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a drawing unit 38, etc. ing. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and the others are provided one by one.

  Even if the ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when entering the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of winning balls, when one game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or when one game ball entering the second operation opening 34 occurs. When one prize ball is paid out and when one game ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, the payout of ten prize balls is executed, and the special electric prize device 32 is sent. When one game ball enters, a payout of 15 prize balls is executed.

  The number of winning balls is arbitrary. For example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of winning balls than the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may be a first operating port. The number of balls may be greater than 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and game balls which did not enter the various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are implanted to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are disposed.

  Here, entering the ball means that the gaming ball passes through the predetermined opening, and not only the aspect of being ejected from the gaming area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the gaming area PA after passing through the opening Also included is an aspect of continuing the flow of the game area PA without being discharged. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 24 a clearly, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 The entry of the game ball to the is also expressed as a winning.

  The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. The first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are both open upward. Further, both operation ports 33 and 34 are aligned in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 33 is on the upper side. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general-purpose utility product 34 a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the commercial power item 34a, the gaming ball can not win in the second operation port 34, and when the common electric symbol 34a is in the open state, it is possible to win the second operating port 34.

  A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation opening 34 in the flow direction of the gaming ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the gaming ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning. Thereby, it is possible for the game ball that has won the through gate 35 to win the second operation port 34.

  Based on the winning on the through gate 35, the utility power supply 34a of the second operation port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed triggered by the winning on the through gate 35, and a common drawing display of the drawing unit 38 provided in the lower right corner which is an area where the gaming ball does not pass in the gaming area PA The variation display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electronic combination open winning, the result of the stop corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the common view display unit 38a is ended, the state shifts to the general electric power transmission open state. In the general-purpose open state, the general-purpose utility item 34a is open in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, although the common view display part 38a is comprised by the segment display which a some segment light emission part is arranged in a predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display , Or a display device such as a CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed in the common view display unit 38a, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed may be considered.

  In the common drawing unit 38, a common drawing suspension display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the common drawing display unit 38a. The number of game balls winning through the through gate 35 is held at a maximum of four, and the number of the held balls is displayed by lighting of the common drawing hold display unit 38b.

  A lottery is triggered by winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly indicated through display effects in the special display unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36.

  In detail, the special drawing unit 37 is provided with a special drawing display unit 37 a. The display area of the special view display unit 37 a is narrower than the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. In the special view display unit 37a, the winning of the first operation opening 33 or the winning of the second operation opening 34 is used as a trigger and a lottery is performed, thereby performing variable display of symbols or predetermined display. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, although the special view display part 37a is comprised by the segment display in which several segment light emission parts are arranged in a predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display , Or a display device such as a CRT or dot matrix display. Moreover, as a pattern displayed on the special view display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of colors May be displayed.

  In the special drawing unit 37, a special drawing reservation display unit 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special drawing display unit 37a. The number of game balls played in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of holdings is displayed by turning on the special view holding display unit 37b.

  In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be

  In the symbol display device 41, when the special pattern display or the predetermined display is performed on the special view display unit 37a based on the winning on the first operation opening 33 or the winning on the second operation opening 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. Variable display or predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows of the upper row, middle row and lower row are set as a plurality of display areas, and the main characters with numbers "1" to "9" attached in each symbol row The symbols are scrolled in an ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, scroll display in all symbol rows is first started, and scroll display is switched from standby display to standby display in the order of upper symbol row → lower symbol row → middle symbol row, and finally predetermined in each symbol row It is ended in the state where the symbol is displayed still. Then, for example, in the game round where the game result is a big hit result, the symbols of the predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the effective line preset on the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41.

  In the symbol display device 41, not only display effects triggered by winning in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, but also display effects in the open / close execution mode to be shifted after winning are won. It will be. In addition, based on winning in any of the operation openings 33, 34, the display is started on the special view display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined result is displayed and one game cycle is completed. It corresponds to the number of times. In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  When the jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first operation opening 33 or the winning of the second operation opening 34, transition to the open / close execution mode in which winning to the special power prize device 32 is possible. The special power winning device 32 has a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24 and an open / close door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 32a is disposed in either the closed state or the open state. Specifically, the open / close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball can not be won, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can be won if the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which transition is made when a hit result is obtained. In the closed state, although it is not impossible to win, it may be in a state in which the winning is less likely to occur than in the open state.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view for explaining a configuration relating to the discharge of gaming balls having flowed down the game area PA.

  As described above, the game balls entered in any of the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34 and the out opening 24a are discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the gaming ball which is fired from the gaming ball firing mechanism 27 and flows into the gaming area PA is any of the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34 and the out opening 24a. The player is discharged from the game area PA by entering the ball. The game ball entered in any of the general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, first operation opening 33, second operation opening 34 and out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

  At the back of the game board 24, discharge passage parts 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to the general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, first operation opening 33, second operation opening 34 and out opening 24a respectively. . The game ball having flowed into the discharge passage portion 42 to 48 is led to the lower end portion of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the discharge passage portion 42 to 48 which has flowed into the discharge ball collecting portion not shown. Be collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collection unit are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

  Each of the discharge passage portions 42 to 48 is provided with various detection sensors 42 a to 48 a for detecting a game ball. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since four general winning openings 31 are provided as described above, discharge passage portions 42 to 44 are provided corresponding to the four, respectively. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 adjacent to the right thereof. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided such that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is provided in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 43. A second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided to be present. The game ball having entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a on the way through the first discharge passage portion 42, and the game is entered into the general winning opening 31 next to the right The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43 a while passing through the second discharge passage 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to merge at an intermediate position with respect to the two right side general winning a prize openings 31 is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an inlet side region corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and the outlet side regions merge to have one outlet side region. doing. A third winning opening detection sensor 44 a is provided such that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the exit side area of the third discharge passage portion 44. The game ball having entered the right two normal winning openings 31 is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44 a while passing through the third discharge passage 44.

  A fourth discharge passage portion 45 is provided corresponding to the special power winning device 32. A special power detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the fourth discharge passage 45, and the gaming ball entering the special power winning device 32 passes the fourth discharge passage 45 on the way It is detected by the special charge detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage 46 is provided corresponding to the first operation port 33. The first operation port detection sensor 46 a is provided so that the detection range exists at an intermediate position of the fifth ejection passage portion 46, and the gaming ball having entered the first operation port 33 is the fifth ejection passage portion 46. While passing through, it is detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second operation port 34. The second operation port detection sensor 47a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the sixth discharge passage section 47, and the gaming ball entering the second operation port 34 is the sixth discharge passage section 47. While passing through, it is detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. The out-port detection sensor 48a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the seventh discharge passage 48, and the gaming ball entering the out-port 24a passes the seventh discharge passage 48 halfway It is detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a.

  The game ball detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a is not detected by the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35 is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a while flowing down the game area PA.

  Although an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as each of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, any sensor may be used as long as it can individually detect the game balls. The various detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are electrically connected to a main control device 60 described later, and detection results of the various detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal in a state in which the gaming ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal in a state in which the gaming ball is detected. The relationship between HI and LOW is not limited to this, and may be reversed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 formed by attaching the gaming board 24 of the above configuration to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 that enables the player to view substantially the entire game area PA from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is formed to be colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin, and the game area PA may be made through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 If it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  The display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 to which sound effects and the like according to the game state are output are provided. Further, below the window 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56 bulging toward the front side are vertically juxtaposed. An upper plate 55a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a opening similarly upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper tray 55a has a function for temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the later described payout device and guiding the game balls to the game ball launch mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. Further, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing the game balls which become surplus in the upper tray 55a.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 60 which controls the main control of the game is mounted. The main control device 60 is configured such that the main control substrate 61 is accommodated in the substrate box 60a. The substrate box 60a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 60a can not be separably joined and the structure of the joining portion which requires destruction of a predetermined portion upon the separation thereof, or the adhesive layer remains as the adhesion target upon peeling off A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of peeling off is applied across the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between several case bodies which comprise the board | substrate box 60a can be considered.

  A back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and the delivery mechanism 73 and the control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

  The payout mechanism section 73 includes a tank 75 to which the gaming balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the gaming balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. In addition, for example, a main pack power of, for example, 24 AC, is supplied to the dispensing mechanism portion 73, and a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing an ON operation and an OFF operation of the power is mounted.

  The control device assembly unit 74 generates and outputs a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices and the like as a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and is accompanied by the operation of the discharge operation device 28 by the player. A power supply and launch control device 78 is provided to control the launch of the game balls. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / discharge control device 78 are disposed so as to be stacked back and forth so that the payout control device 77 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 60 comprises a main control board 61 which controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 67 which monitors the power supply. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 incorporates a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to the main CPU 63 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and various counter circuits as a random number generator.

  The main ROM 64 is a memory (i.e., non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply for storing and holding such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read only memory. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs to be executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

  The main RAM 65 is a memory (i.e., volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply for storing data, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 is capable of random access and has a faster read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data in response to the execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

  The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the ball entry mode of the game balls in the game area PA based on the information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although details will be described later, while the general IC card opening 31, the special electric power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34 and the out opening 24 a are grasped by the management IC 66, The frequency of entering the ball into the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 is grasped in accordance with the held ball entry history.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The power failure monitoring board 67 and the payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The power and emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67, and the operation power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67.

  Various sensors such as various ball entry detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As described above, the various ball entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a are the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the electric power detection sensor 45a, and the first operation opening detection sensor 46a, a second operation port detection sensor 47a, an out port detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a. Based on the detection results of the ball entering detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 performs the ball entering determination on each ball entering part. Further, the main CPU 63 executes various lottery based on the winning on the first operation port 33 and executes various lottery based on the winning on the second operating port 34.

  The power failure monitoring board 67, the payout control device 77, and the sound emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. A payout ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on, for example, the game ball entering the prize ball corresponding ball portion corresponding to the payout of the game ball among the above ball portions Ru. The voice light emission control device 81 outputs various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a drive unit 32b for special power to open and close the open / close door 32a of the special power winning device 32, a drive unit 34b for general power to open and operate the common electric utility 34a of the second operation port 34, The drawing unit 37 and the drawing unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special drawing unit 37 is provided with a special drawing display unit 37 a and a special drawing reservation display unit 37 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the common drawing unit 38 is provided with a common drawing display unit 38 a and a common drawing reservation display unit 38 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control substrate 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various driving units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the open / close execution mode, drive control of the drive unit 32b for the special power is performed in the main CPU 63 so that the special power prize device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the open state of the common utility player 34a is won, the drive control of the common drive unit 34b is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the common utility product 34a is opened and closed. In addition, display control of the special view display unit 37a is executed in the main CPU 63 at each game play. Further, when the lottery result as to whether or not the general electric utility product 34a is to be opened is specified, the display control of the common drawing display unit 38a is executed in the main CPU 63. In addition, when winning is generated in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, or when the variable display is started in the special view display unit 37a, display control of the special view reserve display unit 37b in the main CPU 63 Is executed, and when the winning of the through gate 35 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the common drawing display unit 38a, display control of the common drawing reservation display unit 38b is executed in the main CPU 63.

  The power failure monitoring board 67 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply and emission control device 78, and monitors the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and emission control device 78. The payout control device 77 performs the payout control of the winning balls and the rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the winning ball command received from the main control device 60.

  The power supply and launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, etc. generate necessary operation power for each, and supply the generated operation power. Incidentally, the power supply / discharge control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for powering off such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the powering unit for powering off mainly The main RAM 65 of the control device 60 and the payout control device 77 are supplied with storage power. Further, the power source and launch control device 78 is responsible for the launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

  The sound emission control device 81 controls the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60 and controls the display control device 82. It is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery in main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  During the game, the main CPU 63 uses various counter information to set a big hit occurrence lottery, setting of display of the special view display unit 37a, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the common drawing display unit 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the random number counter C1 used for lottery of occurrence of hit, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are out of variation The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach occurrence lottery when doing, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the per random number counter C1, and the display continuation time in the special view display portion 37a and the symbol display device 41 The variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, a common control utility release counter C4 used in the lottery for determining whether the common control utility 34a of the second operation port 34 is to be put into the common use release state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0". Each counter is updated at short intervals. The information corresponding to the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as an acquisition information storage means in the main side RAM 65 when a winning on the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs. It is stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

  The holding storage area 65a includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The reserve area RE includes a first reserve area RE1, a second reserve area RE2, a third reserve area RE3 and a fourth reserve area RE4, and the winning history to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 In addition, the combination of each numerical information of the per-random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, if winnings to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occur consecutively in a plurality of times in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, the first holding area RE1 → second Each numerical value information is stored in chronological order in the order of reserved area RE2, third reserved area RE3, and fourth reserved area RE4. By providing four reserve areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, the game ball's winning history of the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 is reserved and stored up to four at maximum. .

  The number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three, five or more, or may be singular.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when the variable display of the special view display unit 37a is started, and the start of one game cycle is started On the occasion of the above, on the basis of various numerical value information stored in the execution area AE, a judgment of success or failure is performed.

  The respective counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general purpose power product release counter C4 will be described. For example, the commercial power release counter C4 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The routine charge release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the common charge holding area 65c of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball reaches the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the general-purpose utility 34a is controlled to an open state by the value of the stored general-purpose utility open counter C4.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set such that the modes of support by the power control unit 34a differ from one another. In detail, in the support mode, when compared with the situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner in the game area PA, the commercial battery 34a of the second operation opening 34 is opened per unit time. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set such that the frequency of state becoming relatively high and low.

  In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the common power open status in the common power open lottery using the common power utility open counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5) In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the general-purpose product 34a becomes open when the general-purpose open state is won is set to a larger number than in the low-frequency support mode, and one open time is set longer It is done. In this case, when the general electric power release state is won in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the general power utility item 34a occurs a plurality of times, it is from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set to be shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the securing time minimumly secured in performing the next public power release lottery after the first public power release lottery is performed rather than the low frequency support mode One display continuation time in the display unit 38a is set to be short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the first operation port 33 is higher than that of the second operation port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than the first operation port 33. There is a high probability that a winning on the mouth 34 will occur. And, when the winning a prize to the 2nd operation opening 34 occurs, because the payout of the game sphere of specified number is executed, in the high frequency support mode, the game while the player does not decrease the ball very much It can be carried out.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the common power release state occurs per unit time in the high-frequency support mode rather than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described one. It is good also as composition which makes high the probability of being in a state where the general public is released. In addition, a securement time (for example, based on winning on the through gate 35) is performed in the generalization display portion 38a, which is secured when the next general public open lottery is performed after one public open public lottery is performed. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that the short securing time is easier to be selected or the average securing time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It is also good. Furthermore, the number of opening times is increased, the opening time is extended, and the securing time secured in performing the next public power release lottery after the one public power opening lottery is performed, the securing time to be related, The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among the shortening of the average time of and the increase of the winning probability.

  Next, the per-random number counter C1 will be described. The per-random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one, for example, within the range of 0 to 599, and return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the per-random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random-number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the per-random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the per random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the gaming ball has won the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a success or failure table. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery mode in the hit / fall lottery means.

  Under the gaming state where the low probability mode hit / fail table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big hit is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state where the high-probability mode hit / fail table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big hit is twenty. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29 and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 65a at a timing when the gaming ball has won the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plural jackpot results are (1) the mode of opening and closing control of the special power winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the lottery means after completion of the opening and closing execution mode, and (3) the third after opening and closing execution mode A plurality of jackpot results are set by making a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the common use utility 34 a of the 2 operation port 34.

  As an aspect of the open / close control of the special power winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings on the special power winning device 32 in the period from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in any of the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a predetermined number of round games are executed with an upper limit.

  Here, the round game is continued until either a predetermined upper limit continuation time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls wins the special power prize device 32 is satisfied. It is a game to play. Further, the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same as the fixed round number regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of one-time opening mode of the special electric winning device 32 is set by making the opening continuation time from the opening of the special electric winning device 32 to the closing different. Specifically, a long-time mode in which the opening continuation time is set to 29 sec, which is a long time, and a short-time mode in which the opening continuation time is set to 0.06 sec, which is a short time shorter than the long time, are set. It is done.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. Be done. In addition, the upper limit number of end conditions of the round game is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the open modes, the open continuation time of a time longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and one round game is set. On the other hand, in the short time mode, the opening duration time of the time shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and one round game, more specifically, the time shorter than the game ball firing cycle is set. Therefore, when one opening is performed in the long time mode, it is expected that the special power winning device 32 will receive winnings for the upper limit number in one round game, and the short time mode 1 When the opening is performed, it is expected that no prize will be generated on the special power winning device 32, or even if there is a prize, it will be about one.

  In the high frequency winning mode, the special power winning device 32 is opened once by the long time mode in each round game. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special power winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

  In addition, the number of opening and closing times of special power winning device 32 in high frequency winning mode and low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, opening continuation time for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game, the high frequency winning mode If the frequency of occurrence of winnings to the special power winning device 32 in the period from when the opening / closing execution mode is started to the end is higher than in the low frequency winning mode, it is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary It is.

  The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table. Then, as the distribution destination, the low probability jackpot result, the low winning high probability jackpot result, and the most advantageous jackpot result are set.

  The low probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pass / fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, in the high-frequency support mode, the transition to the low-frequency support mode is made when the number of games has reached the end reference frequency (specifically, 100 times) after the transition.

  In the low winning high probability big hit result, the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the success or failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. is there. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the success or failure lottery becomes the jackpot state winning, and shifts to the jackpot state by it.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pass / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the success or failure lottery becomes the jackpot state winning, and shifts to the jackpot state by it.

  Note that the normal gaming state is not the opening / closing execution mode, but the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, in relation to the above gaming states. Further, as a game result, a configuration may be made in which the low winning high probability big hit result is not set. Further, in the opening and closing execution mode in the low winning high probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be smaller than in the low probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result.

  In the sorting table, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the low probability big hit result, and "10 to 14" corresponds to the low winning high certain jackpot result “15-29” corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a type of display effect in the symbol display device 41. An expected effect includes the symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in the gaming machine that results in a predetermined jackpot, the symbol display device 41 in the gaming machine in which the final stop result is the corresponding result. Before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol in is started, it means the display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state in which the above-mentioned correspondence with correspondence result is likely to be obtained. In addition, specifically, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol in which the same number was attached | subjected on one effective line is stopped-displayed.

  In the expectation effect, two types of reach display and advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the occurrence of the response to an assignment in a stage before the reach display and the like are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. The display state which performs the fluctuation display of a symbol in a symbol row is included. Also, while displaying combinations of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effects by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, or Also, there is a method of performing reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image over substantially the entire display surface 41 a after reducing or displaying a combination of reach symbols in reduced size or non-display.

  In the advance notice display, after the variable display of the symbols is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol rows, or a part of the symbol rows are plural. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row. In addition, the background screen is a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, and the pattern on the symbol array is the predetermined mode different from the previous modes. Such advance notice may occur at any of the game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but it is higher when reach display is performed than when reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Moreover, in the game time corresponding to the big hit result in which the combination of the same symbol is not stopped and displayed, it is not performed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the game times corresponding to the out result are executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the main side ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. .

  On the other hand, the main control unit 60 does not determine whether to display the advance notice, but the sound emission control unit 81 determines. In this case, in the voice light emission control device 81, the game display corresponding to any of the big hit results is more likely to generate a notice display than the game play corresponding to the out result, and the notice display having a low appearance rate A lottery process for displaying a notice is performed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that are likely to occur. By the way, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed by the symbol display device 41.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the main CPU 63 determines the display continuation time in the special view display unit 37 a and the display continuation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of the start of the fluctuation display in the special view display unit 37a and the time of the fluctuation pattern determination at the time of the fluctuation start of the symbol by the symbol display device 41.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process performed in order to advance a game in main side CPU63 is explained. The processes of the main CPU 63 can be roughly classified into a main process activated upon power-on and a timer interrupt process activated periodically (in a cycle of 4 msec in the present embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, power on wait processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until the predetermined time for wait (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is started, without progressing to the next process. The operation start and initialization of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the execution period of the power on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main CPU 63 is set (step S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power / fire control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and whether the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" or not It determines (step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum stored at power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data ( Step S107).

  In the pachinko machine 10, when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the start of business operation of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. In addition, when the occurrence information of the power-off is not set, or when the abnormality of the data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly shifts to the process of step S108. At step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, the process in step S108 is not performed under the condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Go to In step S109, power on setting processing is performed. In the power on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. In addition, after the process of step S109 is performed, a recognition process (step S110) for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and a data output for outputting various data to the reading device connected to the MPU 62. A process is performed (step S111). The details of the recognition process and the data output process will be described later.

  Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited at the stage when the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is inhibited is canceled at the timing before the process of step S112 is completed and the process of step S112 is performed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process of step S111 ends, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S112 is started. Therefore, the main CPU 63 will not start processing for advancing the game until the situation is reached.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of step S112 to step S115. That is, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Although this remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining processes of step S112 to step S115 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining process of the step S112 to the step S115 is a non-periodic process which is executed non-periodically.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S112, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt disable setting is performed. In the following step S113, the random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S114, the variation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the present numerical value information is read out from the corresponding counter of the main side RAM 65, and the process of adding one to the read out numerical value information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S115, interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from the state where the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state where it is permitted. If the process of step S115 is performed, it will return to step S112 and will repeat the process of step S112-step S115.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, 4 msec cycle).

  First, a power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption is received from the power interruption monitoring board 67, and when the occurrence of the power interruption is identified, the processing at power failure is executed and Become. In the power failure process, “1” is set to the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, and the checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored.

  Thereafter, a lottery random number updating process is executed (step S202). In the random number updating process for drawing, the update of the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general purpose battery release counter C4 is executed. Specifically, the present numerical value information was sequentially read out from the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the general electric utility release counter C4, and the process of adding one each of the read numerical information was executed. Later, the process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value updating process is performed as in step S113, and in step S204, the variation counter updating process is performed as in step S114.

  Thereafter, the fraud detection process is performed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred (step S205). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of plural types of events is monitored, and it is confirmed that a predetermined event has occurred, thereby setting “1” to the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65. In the subsequent step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set to the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, processing in step S207 and subsequent steps is executed.

  In step S207, port output processing is performed. In the port output process, when setting of output information is performed in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing an output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32 b and 34 b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special power winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special power is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information to switch the common use utility 34 a in the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34 b for general use should be started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  Thereafter, the reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, reading of signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal is executed, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  Thereafter, the ball entering detection process is executed (step S209). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from the respective ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read results, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 , And the presence or absence of the ball entering the second operation port 34 and the through gate 35. The details of the ball entering detection process will be described later.

  Thereafter, a timer update process is performed to collectively update numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 (step S210). In this case, the timer counter is stored in which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated, but both the update of the subtraction type timer counter and the update of the addition type timer counter are collectively performed. It is good also as composition.

  Thereafter, launch control processing for executing launch control of the gaming balls is executed (step S211). In the situation where the firing operation to the firing control device 28 is continued, one gaming ball is fired in 0.6 sec which is a predetermined firing cycle. In the following step S212, as input state monitoring processing, disconnection confirmation of each ball detection sensor 42a to 49a or opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 based on the information read in the reading processing of step S208. I do.

  After that, special figure electric power control processing for executing execution control of the game run and execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed (step S213). In the special figure special power control process, in the case where the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 has a winning in the situation where the number of suspension information stored in the suspension storage area 65a is less than the upper limit number, A process of storing each numerical value information of the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the time point as hold information in time series in the hold storage area 65a is executed. Further, in the special view special power control process, on the condition that the game is not running or in the opening / closing execution mode and the holding information is stored, it is determined whether the holding information corresponds to a big hit or not. If it corresponds to processing and jackpot winning, distribution determination processing is executed to determine which jackpot result the hold information corresponds to. Further, in the special view special power control process, in addition to the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process, when the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot win, it is determined whether the hold information corresponds to the reach occurrence. While performing the reach determination process to determine, the process which selects the continuation time of a game time using the numerical information of the fluctuation | variation type | mold counter CS in that time is performed. And while transmitting the command for change including the information on the duration according to the result of each of those processing and the type command including the information on the game result to the voice light emission control device 81, Start variable display. The voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to start rendering for the game cycle corresponding to the contents of the command by receiving the variation command and the type command. Further, the voice light emission control device 81 transmits, to the display control device 82, a change pattern command corresponding to the contents of the change command and the type command. The display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to start the fluctuation display of the symbol corresponding to the content of the fluctuation pattern command by receiving the fluctuation pattern command. As a result, one game cycle is started.

  In the special figure special power control process, during execution of one game time, it is determined whether or not it is the end time of the game time by determining whether the continuation period of the game time decided at the start of the game time has elapsed. Determine When it is the end timing, in the state where the display corresponding to the game result is performed, the processing to end the game run is executed. In this case, when the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of any jackpot result, the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the special view display unit 37a, and the present time When the game time corresponds to the result of the game, the symbol corresponding to the result of the game is stopped and displayed on the special image display unit 37a. Further, a final stop command indicating that the game play should be ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. The sound emission control device 81 ends the effect for the present game cycle in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 by receiving the final stop command. Further, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a final stop command to the display control device 82. By receiving the final stop command, the display control device 82 ends the effect for the current game session in the symbol display device 41.

  In the special view special power control process, when the result of the game play is a result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, a process for starting the open / close execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the open / close execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81. Further, in the special view special power control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. When the round game is started, the special power prize device 32 is in the open state, and when the round game is ended, the special power prize device 32 is in the closed state. At the time of each processing, an open command indicating that a round game is to be started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81, and a close command indicating that the round game is to be ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Further, in the special figure special power control process, when the open / close execution mode is ended, an ending command indicating that is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81. The voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute effects for the opening and closing execution mode in a mode corresponding to various commands received during the opening and closing execution mode. Further, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the command received during the opening / closing execution mode to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to execute effects for the open / close execution mode in a mode corresponding to various commands received during the open / close execution mode. In the special view special power control process, when the open / close execution mode is ended, the lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode correspond to the type of the jackpot result that triggered the execution of the open / close execution mode. Execute processing to become the mode.

  After executing the special figure special power control process of step S213 in the timer interrupt process, the general-purpose general control process is executed (step S214). When the winning gate on the through gate 35 has been awarded, the routine control routine executes processing for acquiring the hold information on the general view side, and the hold information on the general view side is stored. Then, the release determination is performed on the hold information, and the release determination is used as a trigger to execute processing for producing effects for the common drawing. Also, based on the result of the open determination, processing is performed to open and close the general purpose utility product 34 a of the second operation port 34. In this case, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the corresponding processing is executed, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the corresponding processing is executed. Further, in the case of the open / close execution mode, even if the support mode immediately before that is the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is set.

  In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information concerning the special view display unit 37a on the special view hold display unit 37b is performed. The output information is set to reflect the increase / decrease number of the suspension information related to the common drawing display unit 38a on the common drawing reservation display unit 38b. Further, in step S215, based on the processing results of the previous step S213 and step S214, setting of output information for updating the display content of the special view display unit 37a is performed, and the display content of the common view display unit 38a is set. Set the output information for updating.

  Thereafter, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S216). Further, a payout output process for setting a winning ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Also, an external information setting process is performed to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time (step S218). Thereafter, a management output process is performed to output information corresponding to the ball entry result of the gaming ball in the gaming area PA to the management IC 66 (step S219). Details of the management output process will be described later.

  Next, based on the detection result of each ball detection sensor 42a to 49a in the main CPU 63, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34 and the through The configuration for specifying the presence or absence of the game ball entering the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory view for explaining a configuration for causing the main CPU 63 to receive detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a.

  The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. And, according to the voltage of each signal, the area where the information of “0” or “1” is stored is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, 0th bit D0-7th bit D7 are provided as the said area. Also, although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a, in order to limit the targets to be input simultaneously to eight types, the group of signals to be input to the input port 63a is determined by the driver IC Switching is performed through switching control.

  In the ball entering detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), a signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set as a signal group from each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a. In such a setting, information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is stored in the zeroth bit D0, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the electric power detection sensor 45a. The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first operation port detection sensor 46a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second operation port detection sensor 47a. The 6-bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the out-port detection sensor 48a, and the seventh bit D7 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a. It is.

  Each of the above-mentioned ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal indicating that no detection is in progress as a detection signal when the passage of the game balls is not detected, and detects the passage of the game balls In this case, an HI level signal indicating that detection is in progress is output as a detection signal. Then, the input port 63a stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when the LOW level signal is received, and "1" for the corresponding bit when the HI level signal is received. Store information. That is, in the situation where passage of the game ball is not detected in the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, the information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored for the corresponding bit, and passage of the game ball is In the detected situation, "1" information corresponding to the information indicating that the corresponding bit is being detected is stored.

  FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the ball entering detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the 0th bit D0, one first winning opening detection sensor 42a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S301: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S302), and the value of the ten prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S303). . The first output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42 a should be executed on the management IC 66. It is a flag. The ten prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the payout of ten game balls should be executed by the main CPU 63. When the value of the 10-prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10-prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). When the command is output once, the value of the 10-prize ball counter is decremented by one. The payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that ten gaming balls are paid out when the ten prize ball command is received.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the first bit D1, one second winning opening detection sensor 43a is used. It is determined that a gaming ball has been detected (step S304: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S305), and the value of the 10-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S306) . The second output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be executed on the management IC 66. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the second bit D2, one third winning opening detection sensor 44a is used. It is determined that a gaming ball has been detected (step S307: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S308), and the value of the 10-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S309) . The third output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be executed on the management IC 66. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the third bit D3, one game ball is detected by the electric power detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S310: YES). In this case, the special power winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S311), and the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S312). The value of the 15-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S313). The special power winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one gaming ball has entered the special power winning device 32 in the round game in the open / close execution mode. In the special figure special power control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the special power prize flag, thereby entering one gaming ball to the special power prize device 32. It identifies that a ball has been generated, and subtracts 1 from the remaining number of ball that can be entered into the special power winning device 32 in the round game. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of ball that can enter the ball is executed, the special electric power winning flag is cleared to “0”. The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special power detection sensor 45 a should be executed to the management IC 66 . The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the payout of the 15 game balls should be executed by the main CPU 63. When the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and the 15 prize balls are output. When the command is output once, the value of the 15-prize ball counter is decremented by one. The payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that fifteen gaming balls are paid out when the fifteen winning ball command is received.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information “1” is stored from the state in which the information “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4, one first operation port detection sensor 46a is used. It is determined that a gaming ball has been detected (step S314: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S315), and the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S316). Further, the value of the one-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S317). The first operation winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that one gaming ball has entered the first operation opening 33. In the special figure special power control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), it is stored in the reserve area RE of the reserve storage area 65a by confirming that "1" is set in the first operation prize flag. On the condition that the number of pending information being held is less than four, which is the upper limit number, processing for newly storing the pending information is executed. In the special power control process (step S213), it is confirmed that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag, and the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed to clear the first operating winning flag "0". Do. The fifth output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the management IC 66 should execute information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a. It is a flag. The one winning ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the payout of one gaming ball should be executed by the main CPU 63. When the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and the one prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the one-prize ball counter is decremented by one. The payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one gaming ball is paid out, when the one winning ball command is received.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information “1” is stored from the state in which the information “0” is stored in the fifth bit D5, one second operation port detection sensor 47a is used. It is determined that a gaming ball has been detected (step S318: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S319), and the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S320). Further, the value of the one-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S321). The second operation winning flag is a flag for specifying that the main game CPU 63 has entered one game ball into the second operation opening 34. In the special figure special power control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), it is stored in the reserve area RE of the reserve storage area 65a by confirming that "1" is set in the second operation prize flag. On the condition that the number of pending information being held is less than four, which is the upper limit number, processing for newly storing the pending information is executed. Confirm that the second operation winning flag is set to "1" in the special electric power control process (step S213), and clear the second operation winning flag to "0" when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed. Do. The sixth output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the management IC 66 should execute information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the sixth bit D6, one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. Is determined (step S322: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a should be executed to the management IC 66. is there.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It determines with having been detected (step S324: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S325). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the generalization common control processing (step S214) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8), by confirming that "1" is set in the gate winning flag, the general drawing stored in the generalization hold area 65c Processing to store the numerical information of the current general-purpose electric-composition release counter C4 as general-purpose hold information in the general-purpose hold area 65c under the condition that the number of the hold information on the side is less than 4 which is the upper limit number. Run. It is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to “1” in the routine drawing control process (step S214), and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to “0”.

  In addition, since timer interruption processing (FIG. 8) is started by 4 msec period as already demonstrated, when detection of one game ball is started in one ball entering detection sensor 42a-49a, the said ball entering In the situation where detection of one game ball is continued with detection sensors 42a-49a, it is specified that main game CPU 63 that one game ball is detected with the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a. To be done. Therefore, it is sufficient if one each of the first to seventh output flags is provided.

  Next, the contents of processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configurations of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 incorporates a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like in addition to the payout side CPU 92 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit.

  The payout side ROM 93 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage unit) which does not require an external power supply to store and hold a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used as a read only memory. The dispensing side ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the dispensing side CPU 92 and fixed value data.

  The payout side RAM 94 is a memory (i.e., volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to store and retain the SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The dispensing side RAM 94 is capable of random access and has a faster reading time than the dispensing side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like in response to the execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

  The payout CPU 92 can perform two-way communication with the main CPU 63. The payout CPU 92 receives an award ball command from the main CPU 63, and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of gaming balls corresponding to the award ball command is dispensed. Further, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the gaming balls can be properly paid out, and if it is determined that the gaming balls can not normally be paid out, the payout side RAM 94 Even in the situation where the number information of the number of unpaid winning balls is stored, the payout device 76 is stopped. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits to the main CPU 63 a payout restriction command indicating that it is not possible to properly pay out as described above. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 execute notification indicating that the gaming ball can not be properly paid out. The notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 as described above. In a state where it is not possible to pay out gaming balls normally, a full state in which the lower plate 56a is full with gaming balls, a ball non-supply state in which gaming balls are not replenished in the tank 75, and a payout device 76 Does not operate normally, there is a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. .

  A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided at an intermediate position of the gaming ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming ball is continuously detected in the full tank detection sensor as being full, and the state in which the gaming ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is canceled. In the case, it is specified that the full condition has been released.

  A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided at an intermediate position in the gaming ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that the ball is in the non-ball state when the game ball is not detected continuously by the non-ball detection sensor, and the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the non-ball detection sensor is released. Identify that the no-ball condition has been released.

  The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one gaming ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the gaming ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. Further, the payout side CPU 92 determines that the payout abnormal state is in the case where the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor despite the drive control of the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. When the state where the gaming ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is released, it is specified that the payout abnormal state is released.

  A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. When the dispensing side CPU 92 receives the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, it specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and receives the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door open command to the main CPU 63 at the timing when it is determined that the front door frame 14 is opened from the closed state, and it is specified that the front door frame 14 is closed from the open state. The front door close command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing described above. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when the front door open command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when the front door closing command is received.

  A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is open relative to the outer frame 11. If there is, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when the closing detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96, and the gaming machine when the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96. It specifies that the main body 12 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at a timing when it is determined that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the opening state from the closing state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closing state from the opening state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the opening state when the main body opening command is received, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closing state when the main body closing command is received.

  The timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly activated in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  First, a full tank process is executed (step S401). In the full tank process, as described above, it is specified based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor whether or not it is full, and in the case of the full tank process, the process for stopping the payout of gaming balls And a command indicating that the tank is full is sent to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the full tank state is canceled, the processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state is canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the ball useless process is executed (step S402). In the ball useless processing, as described above, it is specified whether or not the ball is in the non-ball state based on the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor, and the process for stopping the payout of the game ball Along with execution, a command indicating that the ball is in a non-ball state is sent to the main CPU 63. Further, when the non-ball state is released, a process for making it possible to pay out the gaming ball is executed, and a command indicating that the non-ball state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). In the payout abnormality monitoring processing, as described above, whether or not the payout abnormal state is identified based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor is executed, and in the case of the payout abnormal state, processing for stopping the payout of the gaming ball is executed. At the same time, the main CPU 63 transmits a command indicating that it is in a payout abnormal state. In addition, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, a process of enabling the payout of the gaming ball is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state is canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S404). In the front door opening monitoring process, whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state is specified based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 as already described, and in the case where the front door frame 14 is in the open state A process of stopping the payout of the game balls is executed, and a front door open command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for making it possible to pay out the game balls is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S405). In the main body opening monitoring process, whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state is specified based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 as already described, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the opening state The main CPU 63 transmits a main body opening command to the main CPU 63 while executing processing for stopping the payout of the main CPU 63. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, processing for enabling payout of gaming balls is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, command reading processing is executed (step S406). In the command reading process, the main CPU 63 executes a process of reading the award ball command transmitted. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing the prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S407), the payout of the gaming ball by the payout device 76 is performed. A payout control process is performed to control the execution of (step S408). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 has a value of 1 or more, drive control of the payout device 76 is performed, and one gaming ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. When it is determined, the value of the winning balls number information is decremented by one. Then, when the value of the winning balls number information becomes “0”, the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Thereafter, an external information setting process is performed to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time (step S409).

  Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97. The external terminal plate 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, and is a part of external terminals, and a plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and a part of external terminals A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. By electrically connecting each of the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 in this manner, as shown in FIG. 11, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 externally transmit information to the hall computer HC. It is possible to output.

  One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 96. In detail, regarding the configuration of the electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided at an intermediate position of the signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is branched from the signal path SL1 directed from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92, and a branch path SL2 is provided. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal for opening the front door in the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 97. As a result, it is possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state, to the hall computer HC without the control by the payout side CPU 92.

  More specifically, the main body opening sensor 96 is provided with a branch path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 directed from the main body opening sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92 on the signal relay board 98. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result in the main body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for main body opening in the external terminal plate 97. As a result, it is possible to externally output a signal indicating whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without the control by the payout side CPU 92.

  Next, the contents of information externally output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the contents of information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

  In the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the main CPU 63 performs the output setting of the information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 in the external terminal board 97. As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in high-frequency support mode, and one game cycle have ended Information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls are out of the game area PA through any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port Information indicating that the game ball has been ejected, information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operation opening 33, and information indicating that the game ball has entered the second operation opening 34 are included. .

  The payout side CPU 92 performs output setting of information to each external terminal allocated to the payout side CPU 92 in the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S409) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). Information that is output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that payout of ten gaming balls has been performed.

In the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of the payout of the gaming balls in the pachinko machine 10 according to the various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97. For example,
・ Dumping rate that is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 ・ Out in the normal gaming state which is not the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode Ball rate (Hereafter, let this ball rate be "B")
・ Dumped ball rate in open / close execution mode ・ Dumped ball rate in high frequency support mode ・ Number of times played before 100 game balls were discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio "S")
-B-S x "the number of prize balls for winning on the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34"
The number of game balls entered into the first operation opening 33 generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
The number of ball entry into the second operation opening 34 which occurred until 100 game balls were ejected from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2")
-B-(S1 x "number of prize balls for winning in first operation opening 33" + S2 x "number of prize balls for winning in second operation opening 34"
Etc are calculated. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the ball entering mode of the game balls in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of winning balls means the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the corresponding ball entry portion.

<Configuration for Managing the Prize Mode of the Game Ball>
Next, a configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the management IC 66. The MPU 62 further includes an I / F 101 and a reading terminal 102 in addition to the above.

  The I / F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from an external device of the MPU 62. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a through the input port of the I / F 101 and commands from the payout CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands As described above, the main CPU 63 executes various processes. Further, as a result of the main CPU 63 executing various processes, when the signal output is performed to the device such as the drive unit 32b for special power, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101, and As a result of the CPU 63 executing various processes, when command output is performed to the payout side CPU 92 and the audio light emission control device 81, the command output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101.

  The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting a reading device which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10 to the MPU 62, and is provided so that the connecting terminal portion is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. . However, as described above, the main control substrate 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is accommodated in the substrate box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall of the substrate box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main control device 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect the reading device to the reading terminal 102, the substrate box 60a needs to be opened to expose the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 from being made illegal. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and an opening for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main control device 60 is formed in the substrate box 60a, and the reading for the substrate box 60a is not required. The reader 102 may be electrically connected to the terminal 102.

  The management IC 66 includes a management I / F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117. Each of these devices is bi-directionally connected via an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66.

  The management-side I / F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via the unidirectional communication signal path group 118 incorporated in the MPU 62, and the unidirectional signal paths 119 incorporated in the MPU 62. It is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the interface. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management I / F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management I / F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a signal path group 120 for two-way communication built in the MPU 62.

  The management side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an operation unit. The management side ROM 113 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require an external power supply to store and hold a NOR type flash memory, a NAND type flash memory, etc. The management ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management side RAM 114 is a memory (i.e., volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to store and retain SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The management side RAM 114 is capable of random access and has a faster read time than the management side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data etc. in response to the execution of the control program stored in the management side ROM 113.

  The RTC 115 is a real time clock, which constantly measures date information and time information, and can output date information and time information being measured in accordance with an instruction from the management CPU 112. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, and can measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

  The correspondence relationship memory 116 is a memory (i.e., volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to store and retain the SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence relationship memory 116 stores correspondence relationship information between the buffers 122a to 122p provided at the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for Details of the contents of the correspondence relationship memory 116 will be described later.

  The history memory 117 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require an external power supply to store and hold a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information on the game ball entry received from the main CPU 63 through the management side I / F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

  Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I / F 111 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111. As shown in FIG.

  The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p is a signal to be input When the signal is LOW, information "0" is stored as the first data, and when the signal to be input is HI, information "1" is stored as the second data. The relationship between the LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

  A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a first signal of LOW level in a situation where a new gaming ball is not detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one game is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a When the ball is detected, the first signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the first signal of HI level is inputted to the first buffer 122a.

  A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is performed by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a When the ball is detected, the second signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the second signal of HI level is input to the second buffer 122 b.

  A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a third signal of LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and one game is generated by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. When a ball is detected, a third signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the third signal of HI level is input to the third buffer 122 c.

  A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal of the LOW level in a state where a new game ball is not detected by the special power detection sensor 45a, and one special game ball is detected by the special power detection sensor 45a. The fourth signal of HI level is output over a specific period of time. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fourth signal of the HI level is input to the fourth buffer 122 d.

  A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fifth signal of the LOW level in a state where a new gaming ball is not detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a, and one game is performed by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a. When the ball is detected, the fifth signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal of the HI level is input to the fifth buffer 122 e.

  A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the sixth signal of the LOW level in a state where a new game ball is not detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a, and one game is performed by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. When a ball is detected, a sixth signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the sixth signal of the HI level is input to the sixth buffer 122 f.

  A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the seventh signal of the LOW level in a state where a new gaming ball is not detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a, and one gaming ball is detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a. In this case, the seventh signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the seventh signal of the HI level is input to the seventh buffer 122 g.

  An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122 h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in a state other than the open / close execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in a state in the open / close execution mode.

  A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode period is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at the LOW level in a state other than the high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at the HI level in the state the high frequency support mode.

  A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122 j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the tenth signal of the LOW level in a state where the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues the tenth signal of the HI level in a state where the front door frame 14 is open. Output.

  An output instruction signal for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize a trigger for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is input to the sixteenth buffer 122 p. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs an output instruction signal of LOW level in a situation where it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs an output instruction signal of HI level over a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. Do. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the output instruction signal of HI level is inputted to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

  Although the eleventh buffer 122 k, the twelfth buffer 122 l, the thirteenth buffer 122 m, the fourteenth buffer 122 n, and the fifteenth buffer 122 o can receive signals from the main CPU 63, the pachinko machine 10 does not receive normal signals. It is blank. As described above, the number of buffers 122a to 122p is larger than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10 as the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111. The management IC 66 can be diverted to a model different from that of the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p to correspond to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p on a one-to-one basis. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118k to 118o may not be formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked.

  That the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management side CPU 112 does not receive an instruction from the main side CPU 63. Can specify that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, it has not been determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 what kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, and the types of these signals receive an instruction from the main CPU 63 Is identified by the management CPU 112. The identification of the types of these signals in the management CPU 112 will be described in detail later, but when the control is started in the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 with the supply of operation power to the MPU 62, the main CPU 63 sends the management CPU 112 This is performed by transmitting a type identification command. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116, and when the types of various signals are specified by the management CPU 112 in a situation where operating power is supplied. The information stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is referred to.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence relationship memory 116. In the correspondence relationship memory 116, the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o correspond to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 on a one-to-one basis. It is provided.

  In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a by the management CPU 112. In addition, information indicating the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 as well as information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is in the first correspondence relationship area 123a (10 pieces) Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b by the management CPU 112. In addition, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31 as well as information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is in the second correspondence relationship area 123b (10 pieces) Stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c by the management CPU 112. In addition, information indicating the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 as well as information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is in the third correspondence relationship area 123c (10 pieces) Stored.

  The fourth correspondence area 123 d stores information indicating that the special-purpose winning device 32 is used as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122 d by the management CPU 112. In addition, information (15 pieces) of the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the special electric winning device 32 as well as information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is in the fourth correspondence relationship area 123d. Stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating that the first operation port 33 is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the fifth buffer 122e by the management CPU 112. In addition, information indicating the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the first operation opening 33, together with information indicating that it is the first operation opening 33 in the fifth correspondence relationship area 123e (one piece ) Is also stored. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating that the second operation port 34 is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the sixth buffer 122f by the management side CPU 112. In addition, information indicating the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the second operation opening 34 together with information indicating that it is the second operation opening 34 in the sixth correspondence relationship area 123 f (1 piece ) Is also stored. In the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating that the out port 24a is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the seventh buffer 122g by the management CPU 112.

  The eighth correspondence area 123 h stores information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set as information for specifying the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122 h by the management side CPU 112. In the ninth correspondence area 123i, information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is set is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i by the management side CPU 112. The tenth correspondence area 123 j stores information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the front door frame 14 as information for specifying the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122 j by the management side CPU 112.

  The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k by the management side CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them. The twelfth correspondence area 1231 stores, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the twelfth buffer 1221 by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that it is a blank that does not correspond to any of them. The thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that the blank is not compatible with any of them. In the fourteenth correspondence area 123n, information indicating that the management side CPU 112 identifies the type of the signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is information indicating blank which does not correspond to any of them. In the fifteenth correspondence area 123o, information indicating that the management side CPU 112 specifies the type of the signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is information indicating blank which does not correspond to any of them.

  As described above, the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is specified by the management CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. The management IC 66 can be diverted to a model different from that of the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66.

  Also, each time the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o perform signal output corresponding to the storage of history information, the type of signal is recognized in advance instead of outputting information for recognizing the type of the signal. The correspondence relationship memory 116 stores information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o based on the output information and the management side CPU 112 based on the output information. Configuration. Thus, each time the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o perform the signal output corresponding to the storage of the history information, the information for making the type of the signal recognized is output, the main signal output is performed each time the signal is output. It becomes possible to reduce the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112.

  Further, the output of information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management side CPU 112 is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. As a result, in a situation where a game is started in the pachinko machine 10, the management CPU 112 can specify the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o.

  Further, information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122 p is performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, not only the pachinko machine 10 but also other types of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66 are used to specify the type of signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122 p for an output instruction signal to be used reliably. It is possible to omit the process for Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of processing for identifying the type of such signal.

  Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117. As shown in FIG.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set sequentially, and a history information storage area 125 is set in correspondence with each piece of pointer information on a one-to-one basis. The history information storage area 125 can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, and a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and as an area for storing correspondence information Data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When the correspondence information needs to be stored according to the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (in practice, the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10) First, the date information and time information measured in the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing RTC information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the current pointer information to be written. Thereafter, the correspondence relationship information corresponding to the buffer 122a to 122o that has become the information storage trigger this time is read out from the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the read correspondence information Are stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written.

  Specifically, as for the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entering detection sensors 42a to 48a as already described. Therefore, in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116, information corresponding to the types of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored. More specifically, the information corresponding to the type of the ball entry unit corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, since the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a are all for detecting the game ball entering the general winning opening 31, these first to third winning openings In each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored. The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric symbol winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operation opening 33. The sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating the second operation opening 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating the out opening 24a. When the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage at this time are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the ball entry unit corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to seventh Information read out from any one of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g and the read type information of the ball entry part is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125.

  On the other hand, a signal indicating whether the eighth buffer 122 h is in the open / close execution mode is input, a signal indicating whether the high frequency support mode is in the ninth buffer 122 i is input, and the tenth buffer 122 j is A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input. Therefore, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the high frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and a tenth correspondence area is stored. The information which shows that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in the situation not in the opening / closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in the situation in the opening / closing execution mode. The CPU 112 determines that the open / close execution mode is started when the eighth signal changes from low level to high level, and identifies that the open / close execution mode ends when the eighth signal changes from high level to low level It becomes possible. Then, in any of the cases where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and also from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 triggers storage of correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. To identify. That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is read out from the eighth correspondence area 123 h, but also the start information together, the history information storage area 125 In the area for storing the correspondence information of Further, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is read out from the eighth correspondence relationship area 123h, but also the end information, the history information storage area 125 In the area for storing the correspondence information of

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at the LOW level in the non-high frequency support mode and continuously outputs the ninth signal at the HI level in the high frequency support mode. The management CPU 112 determines that the high frequency support mode is started when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and the high frequency support mode ends when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It can be identified as Then, in any of the cases where the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and also from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 triggers storage of correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. To identify. That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is read out from the ninth correspondence area 123i, but also the start information is also stored in the history information storage area. The correspondence relationship information of 125 is stored in the area for storing. In addition, when the ninth signal changes from HI level to LOW level, not only the information indicating that it is the high-frequency support mode read out from the ninth correspondence area 123i, but also the end information together, the history information storage area The correspondence relationship information of 125 is stored in the area for storing.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the tenth signal of the LOW level in the state where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the main CPU 63 In order to continuously output, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the management side CPU 112 determines that the front door frame 14 is opened, and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. Can identify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Then, in any of the cases where the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and also from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 triggers storage of correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. To identify. That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the front door frame 14 read out from the tenth correspondence area 123 j, but also the opening start information is stored together with the history information The correspondence relationship information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing. When the tenth signal changes from HI level to LOW level, not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the front door frame 14 read out from the tenth correspondence area 123 j, but also the release end information is stored together with the history information. The correspondence relationship information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing.

  The history information storage area 125 can store all the history information generated during that period even if the business day on which firing of the gaming ball in the pachinko machine 10 is continued continues for 10 days from opening to closing. It is provided for a few minutes. For example, when history information is generated 60000 times a day, 600000 or more history information storage areas 125 are provided. Thus, all history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 separately from the history area 124. In the pointer area 126, information for specifying, by the management CPU 112, pointer information which is a current write target in the history memory 117 is stored. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating the pointer information of “0” as the write target is set in the pointer area 126. Then, each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the last order pointer information is to be written and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the last order pointer information, the pointer is set so that the pointer information of “0” becomes the writing target The information in the area 126 is updated. As a result, when the history information storage trigger occurs exceeding the number of storable history information, new history information is sequentially overwritten from the history information storage area 125 where the old history information is stored. Become.

  Also, when reading of history information from the history memory 117 by the reading device occurs, the history information storage area 125 is all cleared to "0", and pointer information of "0" is to be written. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that has once been read from becoming read again.

  Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing, in the correspondence relationship memory 116, information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 and the types of signals will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the recognition process performed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 7).

  First, "15" is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S501). The output counter for recognition uses the remaining number of times of information output necessary for the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal each buffer 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management I / F 111 corresponds to. It is a counter for specifying in the main CPU 63. As described above, fifteen of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are to be recognized as signal types, so "15" is set in the recognition output counter.

  Thereafter, output processing of the identification start command is executed (step S502). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. The first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used for the command output. That is, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a are utilized by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store the history information. A command output is performed to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal the. Thereby, the number of signal paths is reduced as compared with the configuration in which the signal paths for performing the command output are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification start command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. Further, the period for outputting the identification start command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal to HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output states of the identification start command and the ninth signal. It is done. By receiving the identification start command, the management CPU 112 should start processing for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

  Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read out from the main ROM 64 (step S503). In this case, the first buffer 122a is first set as a signal type setting target, and thereafter, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are set so that an n + 1th buffer is set as a signal type setting target next to the nth buffer. The recognition setting of the signal type to be Therefore, if the recognition output counter is "15" to "13", the type identification command indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 and the number of winning balls is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "12" The type identification command indicating the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read, and if the recognition output counter is "11", the type identification command indicating the first operation port 33 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is "10", the second operation port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of balls are read out, and if the recognition output counter is "9", the out port 24a is displayed. If the output counter for recognition is “8”, the type identification command for indicating the open / close execution mode is read out, and the output counter for recognition is read out. If "7", the type identification command indicating high frequency support mode is read out, if the recognition output counter is "6", the type identification command indicating front door frame 14 is read out, and the output for recognition If the counter is “5” to “1”, the type identification command indicating blank is read out.

  Thereafter, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S504). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity as in the identification start command, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. Also, the output period of the identification type command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output states of the identification type command and the ninth signal. It is done. By receiving the identification type command, the management CPU 112 responds to the identification type command in correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffer which is the target of the present setting among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. Information to be stored.

  Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by one (step S505), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S506). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S506: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after one subtraction is executed (step S503 and Step S504).

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S506: YES), the output process of the identification end command is executed (step S507). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. Further, the period for outputting the identification end command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal to HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output states of the identification end command and the ninth signal. It is done. By receiving the identification end command, the management CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of the signals in the correspondence memory 116 is completed. Do.

  Next, the management process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main CPU 63, and the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) is started after one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) is started in the main CPU 63. The combination of the processes after step S606 in the management process is performed 16 times or more before the start of the process.

  If the identification start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter for specifying the types of the buffers 122 a to 122 o which are the target of setting of the signal type by the management CPU 112. The first buffer 122a is first set as a signal type setting target, and thereafter, the nth buffer is next to an n + 1th buffer target.

  Thereafter, under the condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence setting process, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116, the type identification received this time in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 Stores information on the signal type set in the command. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S605).

  If a negative determination is made in step S603, or if the process of step S605 is performed, it is determined whether an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606). When the identification end command is not received (step S606: NO), the process returns to step S603, and on condition that a type identification command is newly received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), step S604 and step S605 are performed. Execute the process again.

  If the identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processing of step S607 and step S608 is repeatedly executed. Although details will be described later in step S 607, history setting processing for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. In step S608, although the details will be described later, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is executed.

  FIG. 19 is a time chart showing how the correspondence relationship memory 116 stores correspondence information between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122o. FIG. 19A shows a period during which a command is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). b) shows a period during which the output state of the ninth signal is HI level; FIG. 19 (c) shows the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o. The execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed is shown, and (d) of FIG. 19 shows the timing when the correspondence setting process (step S604) is executed in the management side CPU 112.

  When the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. Ru. Further, at the timing of the time t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 19 (b). Thereafter, at the timing of t2, which is a situation where the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped by confirming the information of (1). In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S601 of the management processing (FIG. 18). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 19A, the output of the identification start command is stopped at the timing of t3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 19A, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t4. Further, at the timing of the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 19B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. After that, at the timing of t5 where the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 19 (b). The management CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are provided. The content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped by confirming the information. In this case, since the first type identification command is received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 19D at the timing of t5. In the correspondence setting process, information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 and information of the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 19A, the output of the type identification command is stopped at the timing of t6.

  Then, at timing t7 to timing t9, timing t10 to timing t12, timing t13 to timing t15, and timing t16 to timing t18, respectively, as in timing t4 to timing t6, The correspondence setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the fifteenth type identification command is completed at timing t16 to timing t18.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 19A, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t19. Further, at the timing of the t19, as shown in FIG. 19B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. After that, at the timing of t20 where the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 19 (b). The management CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are provided. The content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped by confirming the information. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management CPU 112 ends at timing t20 as shown in FIG. 19C. After that, as shown in FIG. 19A, the output of the identification end command is stopped at the timing of t21.

  As described above, the management CPU 112 is configured to recognize whether the command is output using the ninth signal, thereby instructing the management CPU 112 to store the history information. Even when the command output is performed using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) to be used, the management CPU 112 clearly indicates that the command is output. It becomes possible to make it recognize.

  Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

  First, "10" is set in the management object counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S701). The management target counter specifies with the main CPU 63 whether or not there is a management target that is not the target of specifying whether the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in the management output processing this time. At the same time, the main CPU 63 is a counter for specifying which management target the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed. The target to be identified by the main CPU 63 as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in one management output process is seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, It is a total of ten pieces of the presence or absence of execution of the opening / closing execution mode, the presence or absence of execution of the high frequency support mode, and the presence or absence of opening / closing of the front door frame 14. Therefore, first, "10" is set to the management target counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the value of the current management target counter is HI level (step S702). If it is not the HI level (step S702: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter is 4 or more, and the management target corresponding to the value of the management target counter is seven ball entry detection sensors 42a It is specified whether it is any one of a 48a (step S703).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether "1" is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S704). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether the first output flag is "1" or not. If the value of the management target counter is "9" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether the second output flag is "1" or not, and the value of the management target counter If the value is "8" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether the third output flag is "1" or not, and the value of the management target counter is "7" If there is a special power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether the fourth output flag is "1" or not, and the value of the management target counter is "6", and the first operation port detection sensor 46a The fifth output flag is “1” when it corresponds to If the value of the control target counter is "5" and corresponds to the second operation port detection sensor 47a, then whether "1" is set in the sixth output flag It is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter is "4" and corresponds to the out port 24a, it is determined whether "1" is set in the seventh output flag. As described above, “1” is set to the first to seventh output flags in the ball entering detection process (FIG. 10).

  If “1” is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is HI level (Step S705). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter is cleared to "0" (step S706).

  If a negative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether a trigger to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the HI level has occurred (step S707). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the transition to the open / close execution mode has occurred when the value of the management target counter is “3”, and is high when the value of the management target counter is “2”. It is determined whether or not transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and if the value of the management target counter is “1”, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 has been opened. If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the HI level (step S708).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined whether a trigger to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S709). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is 4 or more and the current management target is any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is used. It is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the corresponding signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. The HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S 607) of the management process (FIG. 18) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level It is a period during which the management CPU 112 can reliably specify the state. If the value of the management target counter is "3" and the current management target is the open / close execution mode, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode has ended, and the value of the management target counter is "2" If the current management target is the high frequency support mode, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode has ended, and the value of the management target counter is "1" and the current management target is the front door frame 14. In this case, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. When the trigger to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S710).

  When a negative determination is made at step S704, when the processing at step S706 is performed, when a negative determination is made at step S707, when the processing at step S708 is performed, when a negative determination is made at step S709, or When the process of S710 is executed, the value of the management target counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether the value of the management target counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S712). If the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S 712: NO), the processing of step S 702 and subsequent steps is executed for the management target corresponding to the new value of the management target counter.

  Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 18).

  First, the number of buffers to be checked in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S801). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas storing information other than the information indicating blank is specified, and the specification The set number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, since information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j as described above, “10” is set in the check target counter in step S801. Do.

  After that, it is confirmed whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S802). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are the check targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is the check target of numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the target of confirmation of numerical information. .

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S802, date information and RTC information which is time information are read out from the RTC 115 (step S803). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S804). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 which is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information which is the writing target is identified. The RTC information read in step S 803 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence relationship information is read out from the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current check target counter, and the correspondence relationship information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the write target. If the correspondence information is any one of information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode, information indicating that it is in the high frequency support mode, and information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, Not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the check target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence areas 123 a to 123 o are the read targets of the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth correspondence area 123 j is the read target of the correspondence information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123 e is the correspondence relation It becomes an object of reading information.

  In the case where the value of the check target counter is any of the out-port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 by executing the writing process as described above In the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 The combination of (1) and (2) correspondence relationship information indicating one of the above is stored as history information. Further, when the value of the check target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. A combination of the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the correspondence information indicating one of the front door frame 14 and the start information is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, the target pointer is updated (step S805). In the updating process, numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the 1 addition has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after 1 addition is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S802, or if the process of step S805 is executed, the signal output is switched to the LOW level in correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current check target counter. It is determined whether correspondence relationship information to be checked is stored (step S806). Specifically, when the value of the current check target counter is “8” to “10”, information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in the corresponding correspondence areas 123 h to 123 j, in the high frequency support mode Since one of the information indicating the presence and the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S806.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S806, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "1" to "0". It is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S807). If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, RTC information is read (step S808) as in step S803, and a process of writing in the history memory 117 is executed (step S809). In the write process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, the correspondence relationship information is read out from the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current check target counter, and the correspondence relationship information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the write target. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the check target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 by performing the writing process in this way, it corresponds to the pointer information to be written. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information and correspondence information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, or the front door frame 14 is any one of the end information is stored as history information. It will be in the Thereafter, as in step S805, the target pointer update process is executed (step S810).

  If a negative determination is made in step S806, a negative determination is made in step S807, or if the process of step S810 is performed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S812). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (NO in step S812), the processing in step S802 and subsequent steps is executed on the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 22 (a) shows a period in which a signal of HI level is inputted to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and FIG. 22 (b) shows a signal of HI level inputted to an eighth buffer 122h. 22C shows a period during which a signal of HI level is inputted to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 22D shows a period of inputting a signal of HI level to the tenth buffer 122j. A period is shown, and FIG. 22 (e) shows the write timing of the history information to the history memory 117.

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 22A, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, the history information is written to the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at time t2, as shown in FIG. 22A, the signal switched to HI level at time t1 is switched to LOW level. However, since the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and switching of the LOW level is not a storage target of history information, the timing of FIG. As shown in e), writing of history information is not performed.

  After that, at timing t3, timing t5, timing t6, timing t9, timing t10, timing t13, and timing t14, as shown in FIG. 22A, the first to seventh buffers 122a are formed. The output state of the signal input to any one of to 122 g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 22B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes HI level from timing t4 to timing t7. The eighth buffer 122 h corresponds to the presence or absence of the open / close execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the timing of t4, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each of the timings of t7. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t4 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t7 includes the end information. Thus, the execution period of the open / close execution mode can be grasped by confirming the history information of the history memory 117.

  In addition, history information is written to the history memory 117 in the order of elapsed time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that ball entry to any of out port 24a, general winning a prize port 31, special power prize winning device 32, first operation port 33 and second operation port 34 has occurred is in the open / close execution mode It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes the RTC information, any of the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 can be obtained by comparing the RTC information. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not history information indicating that a ball has entered a ball is in the open / close execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 22C, the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes HI level from the timing t8 to the timing t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to the occurrence of the high frequency support mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22E, the timing of t8, which is the timing when the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level The history information is written at each of the timings of t11 which is In this case, the history information written at the timing of t8 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t11 includes the end information. Thus, the execution period of the high frequency support mode can be grasped by confirming the history information of the history memory 117.

  In addition, history information is written to the history memory 117 in the order of elapsed time. Therefore, even in the high-frequency support mode, the history information indicating that the ball has entered into any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 It is possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes the RTC information, any of the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 can be obtained by comparing the RTC information. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not history information indicating that a ball has entered a ball is in the high frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 22D, the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j becomes HI level from the timing t12 to the timing t15. The tenth buffer 122 j corresponds to the presence or absence of the opening of the front door frame 14. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22E, the timing of t12, which is the timing when the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level The history information is written at each of the timings of t15. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t12 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t15 includes the end information. As a result, by checking the history information of the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the period in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

  In addition, history information is written to the history memory 117 in the order of elapsed time. Therefore, while the front door frame 14 is open, history information indicating that entry of the ball into any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 has occurred. It is possible to distinguish whether it is or not. Further, since the history information includes the RTC information, any of the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 can be obtained by comparing the RTC information. It becomes possible to distinguish whether the history information indicating that the ball has entered the ball is the opening of the front door frame 14 or not.

  Next, a processing configuration for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the data output process executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 7).

  In the data output process, it is first determined whether a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is received from the reading terminal 102 (step S901). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when being electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and an affirmative determination is made in step S901 when the connection signal is received through the reading terminal 102. do.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, the present data output processing is ended. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62. Thus, in order to externally output the history information, it is necessary to start supply of operating power to the MPU 62 in a state where the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. . Since the power supply operation unit for performing the stop operation and the start operation of the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 is provided on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, the outer frame 11 is required to perform the stop operation and the start operation. It is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 to expose the back of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to externally output the history information, it is necessary to start supply of operating power to the MPU 62 while the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With the above configuration, even if an operation other than the game hall manager attempts to read the history information, it can be difficult to do so.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is the main ROM 64 by determining whether or not the signal for control information confirmation is received from the reading terminal 102. It is determined whether it corresponds to the confirmation of the control information (program and data) of (step S902). The reading device is configured to be able to check both the control information and the history information, and when confirmation of the control information is selected by a manual operation on the reading device, the reading device is used to confirm the control information. A signal is transmitted, and when the confirmation of the history information is selected by a manual operation on the reader, the signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reader. The present invention is not limited to this, and the reading device for control information confirmation and the reading device for history confirmation may be different. In this case, when a reading device for control information confirmation is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for control information confirmation is transmitted from the reading device, and a reading for history confirmation is sent to the reading terminal 102. When the device is electrically connected, the reader transmits a signal for history confirmation.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, an output process for control information confirmation is executed (step S903). In the output process, the program and data are read from the main ROM 64 as control information, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the control information can be read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and it is confirmed whether the control information is normal or normal. It is possible to do

  If a negative determination is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the output instruction signal of HI level is inputted to the sixteenth buffer 122p. By switching the output state of the output instruction signal to the HI level, the management CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information. The process will be described in detail later.

  When the process of step S 903 is performed or when the process of step S 904 is performed, it is determined whether the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S 905). When continuing (step S 905: YES), it waits in step S 905 as it is. This makes it possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S 905: NO), the data output process is ended.

  Next, the external output processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

  When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1001: YES), a process for outputting history information in step S1002 and subsequent steps is executed. Specifically, first, the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the out port 24a is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is counted to obtain the out port 24a. The number of hits is calculated (step S1002). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, entering the general winning opening 31 The number is calculated (step S1003). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the player enters the special electric winning device 32. The number is calculated (step S1004). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the first operation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the first operation port 33 can be obtained. The number of hits is calculated (step S1005). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the second operation opening 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the second operation opening 34 can be obtained. The number of hits is calculated (step S1006).

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, and correspondence that indicates that it is the front door frame 14. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out door that occurs in the state where the front door frame 14 is in the open state The number of balls entered into each of the general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, first operation opening 33 and second operation opening 34 is calculated (step S1007). History information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, correspondence information that indicates the front door frame 14, and The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Moreover, in the whole pointer information which becomes a serial number, the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the history information storage area 125 where the start information is stored and the correspondence that indicates that it is the front door frame 14 In the case where there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the number of ball entries for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and start information, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 If the correspondence information and start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored is not stored in the history information storage area 125 in which is stored, the correspondence information and start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored All pieces of history information of the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to the time later than the history information storage area 125 being stored is stored are treated as the front door frame 14 in the open state.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1002 to step S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated during opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1007 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in each of steps S1002 to S1006. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls in out-port 24a calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls calculated in step S1002 is the number K1 of balls, and it is calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls calculated in step S1003. The difference in the number of ball entry of the special winning opening 31 is the number of ball K2, and the difference in the number of balls of the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1007 to the number of balls calculated in step S1004 is the number K3 of balls. The difference between the number of balls in first operation port 33 calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls calculated in step S1005 is the number K4 of balls and is calculated in step S1007 for the number of balls calculated in step S1006. The difference in the number of balls in the second operation opening 34 is referred to as the number of balls K5.
First parameter: total payout number of play balls (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning in general winning opening 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning on special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "first operation opening The ratio of the total number of game balls (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) discharged from the skill area PA (hereinafter, this ratio) "D1")
-Second parameter: Total number of game balls entering general winning opening 31 / Ratio of total number (K1 + K 2 + K 3 + K 4 + K 5) of gaming balls discharged from gaming area PA-Third parameter: gaming ball to special power prize device 32 Total entry number K3 / Percentage of total number (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) of gaming balls discharged from the game area PA · Fourth parameter: Total entry number of game balls to the first operation opening 33 K 4 / Discharge from the game area PA The percentage of the total number of game balls played (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter referred to as "D2")
The fifth parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the second operation opening 34 K5 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D3”)
Sixth parameter: D1− (D2 × “number of prize balls for winning in first operation port 33” + D3 × “number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34”)
· Seventh parameter: (K3 × "number of prize balls for winning in special power winning device 32" + K5 × "number of prize balls for winning in second operation opening 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "general" Number of winning balls for winning in the winning opening 31 + K3 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K 4 × “number of winning balls for winning in the first operation opening 33” + K 5 × “second operation opening 34 Ratio of winning balls to winnings)) 8th parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning on special electric winning device 32” / total payout number of gaming balls (K 2 × for winning in general winning opening 31 Number of prize balls "+ K3 x" Number of prize balls for winning on special electric winning device 32 "+ K4 x" Number of prize balls for winning on first operation port 33 "+ K5 x" Number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34 ') Percentage then the notes for history Using the newest RTC information oldest RTC information in the history for the area 124 of the 117, the history information being the object of this operation is to calculate the total time it took to be extracted every (step S1009). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1010). In the first output process, all pieces of history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. The various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is output to the reading terminal 102. Thus, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each piece of information to be output in the first output process is read.

  Thereafter, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is the open / close execution mode and start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode, By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the out opening 24 a which occurs in the open / close execution mode, the general winning opening 31 The number of balls to be entered into each of the special power prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 is calculated (step S1011). History information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and start information are stored, correspondence information indicating the opening / closing execution mode, and end information The period between the history information storage area 125 in which is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information which is a sequential number, history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode and start information is stored, correspondence information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode, In the case where there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the number of ball entry for each section is calculated. Although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is the open / close execution mode and start information is stored, RTC information corresponding to a later time than the history information storage area 125 is When the correspondence information indicating that the mode is the open / close execution mode and the start information are not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating that the mode is the open / close execution mode and the start information are stored. All pieces of history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to the time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored are treated as those in the open / close execution mode.

  Thereafter, out of the periods in the open / close execution mode specified in step S1011, the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and The number of balls in each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1012). The method of calculating the number of balls entered is the same as that of step S1007 except that the period of the open / close execution mode specified in step S1011 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1011 and step S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated during opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1012 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1012 and the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1011 is the number of balls K11, and the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1011. The difference between the number of balls in the general winning opening 31 calculated at step S1012 and the number of balls is the number of balls K12, and the special electric winning device calculated at step S1012 for the number of special electric winning devices 32 calculated at step S1011. The difference in the number of balls in the first operation port 33 calculated in step S1012 to the number of balls in the first operation port 33 calculated in step S1011 is the difference in number of balls in the number of balls K13. In step S1012, the number of balls in the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1011 is calculated using the number K14. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K15 was.
-11th parameter: Total payout number of game balls (K12 x "Number of prize balls for winning in general winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning on special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "1st operation opening 33 The number of winning balls for winning in the game + K15 × the number of winning balls for winning in the second operation opening 34) / The ratio of the total number of gaming balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) discharged from the gaming area PA (hereinafter referred to as “this ratio” D11 ”)
Twelfth parameter: Total entry number of gaming balls to general winning opening 31 / proportion of total number (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) of gaming balls discharged from gaming area PA. Thirteenth parameter: gaming ball to special power prize device 32 The total number of ball entry K13 / The ratio of the total number (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA · The fourteenth parameter: The total number of gaming balls to the first operation opening 33 K14 / discharging from the gaming area PA The ratio of the total number of game balls played (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D12")
Fifteenth parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the second operation port 34 (K15) / the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) discharged from the game area PA (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”)
Sixteenth parameter: D11− (D12 × “number of prize balls for winning in first operation port 33” + D13 × “number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34”)
・ The 17th parameter: (K13 × “number of prize balls for winning in special power winning device 32” + K 15 × “number of prize balls for winning in second operation opening 34”) / total number of game balls paid out (K12 × “general Number of winning balls for winning in the winning opening 31 + K 13 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K 14 × “number of winning balls for winning in the first operation opening 33” + K 15 × “second operation opening 34 Ratio of winning balls to winnings)) 18th parameter: K 13 × “number of winning balls for winning on special electric winning device 32” / total payout number of gaming balls (K 12 × for winning in general winning opening 31 Number of prize balls "+ K13 x" Number of prize balls for winning in special electric winning device 32 "+ K 14 x" Number of prize balls for winning in first operation port 33 "+ K 15 x" Number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34 ") Thereafter, the second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each piece of information to be output in the second output process is read.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is in the high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and correspondence that indicates that it is in the high frequency support mode. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out port 24 a occurred in the high frequency support mode, general The number of balls in each of the winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 is calculated (step S1015). History information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and start information are stored; correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode; The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Moreover, in the whole of the sequential pointer information, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is in the high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and correspondence that indicates that it is in the high frequency support mode. In the case where there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the number of ball entries for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is in the high frequency support mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 If the correspondence information indicating that the high frequency support mode is stored and the start information are not stored in the history information storage area 125 in which is stored, the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored All pieces of history information of the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 being stored is stored are treated as those in the high frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, out of the period in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state, out of the period in the high frequency support mode specified in step S1015, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 And the number of balls entering each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1016). The method of calculating the number of balls is the same as that of step S1007 except that the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1015 is assumed.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1015 and step S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated during opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1016 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1015. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference in the number of balls in the out-port 24a calculated in step S1016 to the number of balls in the out-port 24a calculated in step S1015 is the number K21 of balls, and the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1015. The difference in the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1016 to the number of balls is referred to as the number K22 of balls entered, and the special power prize device calculated in step S1016 relative to the number of balls of special power prize device 32 calculated in step S1015. The difference in the number of balls in the first operation port 33 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls in the first operation port 33 calculated in step S1015 is defined as the difference in number of balls K23. It is set as the number K24, and is calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of ball entry of the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1015. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K25 was.
21st parameter: Total payout number of game balls (K 22 × “number of prize balls for winning in general winning opening 31” + K 23 × “number of balls for winning in special electric winning device 32” + K 24 × “first operation opening 33 The number of winning balls for winning in the game + K 25 × the number of winning balls for winning in the second operation opening 34) / the ratio of the total number (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (hereinafter, this ratio D11 ”)
22nd parameter: Total entry number of gaming balls to general winning opening 31 / total number of gaming balls discharged from gaming area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ratio 23rd parameter: gaming ball to special power prize device 32 Of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ratio · The 24th parameter: The total number of game balls entering the first operation opening 33 K24 / discharge from the game area PA The ratio of the total number (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) of game balls played (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D22")
Twenty-fifth parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the second operation opening 34 K25 / the total number of game balls (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) discharged from the game area PA (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D23")
Twenty-sixth parameter: D21− (D22 × “number of prize balls for winning in first operation port 33” + D23 × “number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34”)
Thereafter, the third output process is executed (step S1018). In the third output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1017 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. Thus, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each piece of information to be output in the third output process is read. Thereafter, the clear process is executed (step S1019). In the clear processing, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is all cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The game ball is paid out when the game ball enters any of the general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34, so the player can choose one of these ball entering sections. The game is played while expecting the game ball to enter the game. In the configuration, the ball enters the game ball to any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter, also referred to as history target ball entry section) In the event of occurrence of a problem, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can store and hold information for managing the number of balls or the frequency of ball entry of game balls into each history target ball entry unit, and this managed information is used It becomes possible to manage appropriately the ball entering mode of the game ball to each history object ball entry part by this. In addition, since the history information is stored and held by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information.

  All ball entry units that discharge game balls from the game area PA are targets for execution of storage processing of history information and targets for management using history information. As a result, it is possible to manage the pitching frequency for any history target ball entry unit using history information. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls to be entered into each history object ball entry unit to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using history information.

  The history information includes RTC information which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the history target ball entry unit that has triggered the storage of the history information. Thereby, by using the history information, it becomes possible to grasp the ball entering history of the gaming ball to the history target ball entering unit in detail.

  In the history memory 117, not only history information corresponding to the game ball entering the history target ball entry portion, but also history information indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, the high frequency support mode is in progress. The history information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open or not is stored. Thereby, it becomes possible to distinguish whether or not each of these situations, and manage the ball entering aspect of the gaming ball to the history target ball entry part.

  The history information stored in the history memory 117 can be output to a reading device which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, it becomes possible to read history information by the reading device and analyze the ball entering aspect of the gaming ball to the history target ball entry unit using the read history information.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 102, and a program can be read from the main ROM 64 by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to check whether the program is normal. In the configuration, history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for outputting the program to the outside. This makes it possible to externally output the history information while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  It is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is either program or history information, and the information on the side corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the configuration in which the history information is output to the outside using the reading terminal 102 for outputting the program to the outside, the pachinko machine 10 determines which of the program and the history information is the information to be subjected to the external output. The information specified on the side is output to the outside. Therefore, even in the configuration in which the reading terminal 102 is shared, only necessary information can be read.

  Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified which of the program and the history information the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the selection of information to be externally output from becoming complicated.

  An MPU 62 having a main ROM 64 for pre-storing a program has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 102. As a result, the signal path to the reading terminal 102 can be integrated in the MPU 62. Therefore, while making unauthorized access to the signal path to the reading terminal 102 difficult, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  Main side CPU 63 that executes processing for making the game balls paid out based on the entry of the game balls into any of the general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, first operation opening 33 and second operation opening 34 A management side CPU 112 is separately provided, and the management side CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in the history memory 117. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the ball entering aspect of the game ball to each history target ball entry part while preventing the processing load of the main side CPU 63 from extremely increasing.

  The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided as the MPU 62 in the same chip. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

  The main CPU 63 uses the signal paths corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, and the buffers of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal paths corresponding to the ball entry sensors 42a to 48a. Send to 122a-122g. As a result, the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 correspond to the respective buffers 122a to 122g (that is, respective signal paths), and the configuration for discriminating the types of each information in the management CPU 112 is simplified. It is possible to

  Information corresponding to whether or not the main CPU 63 is in the open / close execution mode, information corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress, and information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open Are transmitted to the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using signal paths corresponding to the respective situations. As a result, the types of information corresponding to the respective situations correspond to the respective buffers 122h to 122j (that is, the respective signal paths), and the configuration for discriminating the types of the respective information in the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

  The main CPU 63 transmits, to the management CPU 112, correspondence information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122j (ie, each signal path 118a to 118j) corresponds to. As a result, there is no need to store the correspondence information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be enhanced.

  When the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Thus, in a situation where game ball entry to the history target entry section may occur, the management IC 66 can specify the correspondence between information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history entry section It will be possible to

  The correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating the presence or absence of the game ball to the history target ball entry unit. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration relating to communication as compared with the configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting correspondence relationship information is provided.

  A correspondence relationship memory 116 is provided in the management IC 66, and the correspondence relationship information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. Thus, the information that enables the management IC 66 to specify the history target ball entry unit corresponding to the information to be transmitted can be transmitted each time the main CPU 63 transmits information on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. There is no need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the information of the detection result of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

  When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102 is performed. In this case, the management CPU 112 can identify that the signal path corresponding to the sixteenth buffer 122 p corresponds to the output instruction signal without receiving the correspondence information from the main CPU 63. . This makes it possible to prevent the configuration for transmitting the correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

  The management IC 66 is provided with buffers having a number larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 as buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63. It is done. As a result, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration regarding the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be enhanced.

  When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, correspondence information indicating the type of history target ball entry unit corresponding to the history information is included in each history information. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the ball entering aspect of the game ball to each history object ball entry part using the read history information.

  By using the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the management IC 66, various parameters (Nos. 1-8, 11-18, 21 to 26 parameters are calculated. As a result, it is possible to externally output various parameters that are the result of calculation using history information.

  Various parameters are calculated in a state in which the history information corresponding to the situation in which the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Also, various parameters corresponding to the situation in the open / close execution mode and the situation in the high frequency support mode are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to grasp the entering manner of the game ball according to each situation.

  When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clearing process of the history memory 117. As a result, history information to the extent that the storage capacity of the history memory 117 is exceeded is to be stored in the history memory 117, and the history information that should normally be stored may be erased by overwriting. It is possible to make it hard to occur.

  When various parameters are output to the reading terminal 102, history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102. In this way, when various parameters are read out and the ball entering aspect of the gaming ball in the gaming area PA is analyzed, it becomes possible to refer not only to the various parameters but also to history information used as the basis of calculation of various parameters.

  The management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of computing various parameters.

  When the main CPU 63 identifies that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and the information of the output instruction is transmitted from the main CPU 63, various parameters are calculated by the management IC 66. The various parameters of the calculation result are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, various parameters can be output to a reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on an instruction from the main CPU 63.

  It is specified whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 in the process at the time of the start of supply of the operation power executed by the main CPU 63, and the reading device is electrically connected. Is specified, the information on the output instruction is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Thus, in the situation where processing at the time of supply start of operating power is executed in the main CPU 63 or the like, that is, in the situation before the normal processing for causing the main CPU 63 to proceed with the game is started. Calculation of parameters and external output of various parameters of the calculation result are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation result from being performed in a situation where the game ball may enter the history target ball storage part, and the processing load of the management IC 66 It is possible to reduce.

  The history information is stored in the history memory 117 in a configuration in which when the game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, the corresponding external output is performed through the external terminal board 97. . Thereby, by using information externally output through the external terminal board 97, the number of ball entry into the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 and the frequency of ball entry can be simply grasped, By using the history information stored in the memory 117, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of ball entry and the frequency of ball entry of the game ball into the history target ball entry part.

Second Embodiment
In the present embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I / F 111, the type of the signal to be input is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66. It differs from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 to make the management CPU 112 identify the type of the input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The same types of signals as the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. The second signal is input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth buffer 122d is the fourth corresponding to the detection result of the electric power detection sensor 45a. A signal is input, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a sixth buffer 122f corresponds to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction is output to the sixteenth buffer 122p. No. is input.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as an eighth signal, and a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as a ninth signal, Although the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122 j as the tenth signal, in the present embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m as a signal during the open / close execution mode, and a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as a signal during the high frequency support mode. The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122 o as a door open signal.

  A signal is inputted to the thirteenth buffer 122m during the opening / closing execution mode, a signal during the frequent support mode is inputted to the fourteenth buffer 122n, a signal during the door opening is inputted to the fifteenth buffer 122o, and That the output instruction signal is input to the 16 buffer 122p is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management CPU 112 receives the instructions from the main CPU 63, and the 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p. It is possible to specify that the above-mentioned respective signals corresponding to each are input. On the other hand, it has not been decided at the design stage of the management IC 66 which kind of signal is input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l, and the types of these signals receive an instruction from the main CPU 63 Is identified by the management CPU 112. The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the recognition process of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed at step S110 in the main process (FIG. 7) as in the first embodiment.

  First, "12", which is the number of first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l to be recognized as signal types, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1101). Thereafter, output processing of the identification start signal is executed (step S1102). In the output process, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. Is set to the HI level to start the output of the identification start signal. The period in which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Thereafter, information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the output counter for recognition of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the information on the number of outputs read is set in the output number counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S1103). The output number counter is a counter for specifying the number of outputs of the type identification signal by the main CPU 63.

  In the present embodiment, when the management side CPU 112 recognizes the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 1221, the number of winning balls set for the ball entry unit corresponding to the type of the signal And output the type identification signal the same number of times. The management side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l in the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. . That is, the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 1221 is grasped as the number of winning balls set for the ball entry unit corresponding to the type of the signal.

  In step S 1103, when the value of the recognition output counter is one of “12”, “11” and “10”, “10” corresponding to the number of winning balls in the general winning opening 31 is set in the output number counter . When the value of the recognition output counter is “9”, “15” corresponding to the number of winning balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “8”, “1” corresponding to the number of winning balls in the first operation opening 33 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “7”, “1” corresponding to the number of winning balls in the second operation port 34 is set in the output number counter. In addition, when the value of the recognition output counter is "6", although the game ball corresponds to the out port 24a but the game ball does not enter even if the game ball enters the out port 24a, the output frequency counter is not executed. Set “0” to Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is any one of “5” to “1”, “0” is set to the output number counter because the corresponding ball entry unit does not exist and is blank.

  Thereafter, output processing of the start trigger signal is executed (step S1104). In the output process, the output state of the start signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period in which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

  Thereafter, on condition that the value of the output number counter of the main side RAM 65 is not “0” (step S1105: YES), that is, on condition that one or more values are set in the output number counter at step S1103. The process advances to step S1106. In step S1106, output processing of the type identification signal is performed. In the output process, the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122 b is set to the HI level to start the output of the type identification signal. The period in which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

  Thereafter, the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by one (step S1107), and it is determined whether the value of the output number counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S1108). When the value of the output number counter is 1 or more (step S1108: NO), the process returns to step S1106.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1105, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1108, output processing of an end trigger signal is executed (step S1109). In the output process, the output state of the termination trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122 c to the HI level. The period in which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

  Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by one (step S1110), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction of one is "0" (step S1111). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S1111: NO), the process returns to step S1103 to execute processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after one subtraction. Do.

  On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S1111: YES), the process of outputting the identification end signal is executed (step S1112). In the output process, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. Is set to HI level to start the output of the identification end signal. The period in which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Next, the management processing in the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The management process is started when the supply of the operation power to the management CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

  When the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1201: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S1202). Thereafter, on the condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63 or not. When the type identification signal is received (step S1204: YES), the value of the reception number counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1205). The reception number counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63 by the management CPU 112. Note that the value of the reception number counter is cleared to “0” when an affirmative determination is made in step S1203.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204, or if the process of step S1205 is performed, it is determined whether an end trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206). If the end trigger signal is not received (step S1206: NO), the process returns to step S1204. If the end trigger signal is received (step S1206: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S1207). In the correspondence setting process, among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116, the reception count counter is set to the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114. Store the value being stored. In this case, "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls in the general winning opening 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c, and the fourth correspondence area 123d is set. “15” corresponding to the number of winning balls of the special electric power winning device 32 is set, “1” corresponding to the number of winning balls of the first operation port 33 is set in the fifth correspondence relationship area 123 e. In the area 123f, "1" corresponding to the number of winning balls in the second operation opening 34 is set. In addition, “0” is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123 g to 123 l. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1208).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203 or if the process of step S1208 is performed, it is determined whether the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S1209). If the reception of the identification end signal is not completed (step S1209: NO), the process returns to step S1203, and on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES) Run. If the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S1209: YES), the history setting process of step S1210 and the external output process of step S1211 are repeatedly executed.

  FIG. 28 is a time chart showing how the correspondence relationship memory 116 stores correspondence information between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122l. FIG. 28 (a) shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is HI level, and FIG. 28 (b) shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is HI level. Shows a period in which the output state of the third signal is HI level, FIG. 28 (d) shows a period in which the output state of the signal is HI level during the open / close execution mode, and FIG. FIG. 28 (f) shows the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l during the high frequency support mode, in which the output state of the signal is at the HI level. 28 (g) shows the timing when the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by one, and FIG. 28 (h) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed. Management CPU 112 Correspondence relationship setting Te processing (step S1207) shows a timing of the execution of.

  As the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as shown in FIGS. 28 (a), 28 (d) and 28 (e), at the timing of t1, the first signal is generated. The output states of the open / close execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereby, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the output states of the first signal, the signal in the switching execution mode and the signal in the frequent support mode are changed from the HI level to the LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. By making an affirmative determination in step S1201 of the management process (FIG. 27) at the timing of the t2, the management CPU 112 is in the identification state as shown in FIG. 28 (f).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28A, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level over the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 28B, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level over the timing t5 to the timing t7. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management CPU 112 once. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28G, the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by one at the timing of t6.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 28C, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level over the timing of t8 to the timing of t10. As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 28H, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process. Since the value of the reception number counter is “1” at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, the correspondence relation areas 123 a to 123 l of the current setting target in the correspondence relation memory 116 “1 Stores the information of

  After that, as shown in FIG. 28A, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level over the timing of t11 to the timing of t12. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 28B, the timing t13 to the timing t15, the timing t16 to the timing t18, the timing t19 to the timing t21, and the timing t22 to the timing t24 are shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management side CPU 112 once. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28G, the value of the reception number counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by one at each of the timing t14, the timing t17, the timing t20, and the timing t23.

  After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28C from timing t25 to timing t27. As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t26, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management CPU 112 as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception number counter is “10” at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, “10” is set as the correspondence information in correspondence relation areas 123 a to 123 l of the current setting target in the correspondence memory 116. Stores the information of

  Thereafter, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 28C, 28D, and 28E, the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are LOW. Change from level to HI level. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the signal in the switching execution mode and the signal in the frequent support mode are changed from the HI level to the LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1209 of the management processing (FIG. 27), whereby the identification state is canceled as shown in FIG. 28 (f).

  In the present embodiment, since the information on the number of winning balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 corresponds to the winning ball corresponding to the ball entry portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number is included as correspondence information. In the said structure, when two or more types of ball entry parts with which the number of prize balls is the same exist, those ball parts can not be distinguished in historical information. Specifically, since the number of winning balls is one in each of the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 may be distinguished in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of winning balls in the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 may be made different. As a result, even if history information is stored as in the second embodiment, it is possible to distinguish between the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 in the history information.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “15” is set in the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 in step S801 of the history setting process. As a result, all of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are checked.

  According to the embodiment described above, not only the output instruction signal but also information corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, information corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress, and the front door Information corresponding to whether or not the frame 14 is open can also be identified by the management CPU 112 without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63 that it is a signal path corresponding to the information. It has become. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection result of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a needs to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence between each information and each signal path 118a to 118g. Become. Then, when making the management side CPU 112 recognize the correspondence information, the pulse signals of the same number as the number of balls corresponding to the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a make use of the second signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU112. Output to This makes it possible to simplify the configuration regarding transmission of correspondence information.

Third Embodiment
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the calculation of various parameters using history information is executed. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 29 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a management I / F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117. These functions are the same as in the first embodiment.

  In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131. In the present embodiment, when an operation trigger occurs as described in detail later, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. Then, the calculated various parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 131. The various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

  The operation trigger of various parameters occurs before the timing when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. As a result, it is possible to differentiate between the time of calculating various parameters and the time of outputting to the reader externally, and it becomes possible to disperse the processing load.

  In addition, since the memory 131 for calculation results for storing calculation results of various parameters is provided, not only various parameters for one calculation trigger but also various parameters for plural calculation triggers are put together. It becomes possible to memorize. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time required to calculate various parameters in each operation trigger.

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The same types of signals as the first embodiment are input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p. In detail, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second buffer 122b is corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second signal is input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth buffer 122d is the fourth corresponding to the detection result of the electric power detection sensor 45a. A signal is input, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a sixth buffer 122f corresponds to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h. The signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i, the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. An output instruction signal is input.

  In the present embodiment, the calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122 o as well as the various signals. The operation instruction signal is a signal output from the main CPU 63 to provide the management CPU 112 with an operation trigger of various parameters. The fact that the operation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, similarly to the case where the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p, and an instruction from the main CPU 63 Without being received, the management CPU 112 can specify that the signals corresponding to the fifteenth to sixteenth buffers 122o to 122p are input. On the other hand, it has not been determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, and the types of these signals receive an instruction from the main CPU 63 Is identified by the management CPU 112. The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  Next, a processing configuration for causing the management side CPU 112 to execute calculation of various parameters in response to the occurrence of the calculation trigger will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU 63. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

  In the power failure information storage process, when the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption is received from the power failure monitoring board 67 (step S1301: YES), the process of outputting the operation instruction signal is executed (step S1302). In the output process, the output state of the operation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o at the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the operation instruction signal is HI level. Thereafter, after power failure processing is executed in step S1303, an infinite loop is established, and standby is performed until the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power failure process, “1” is set to the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, and the checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the power failure handling process executed by the management side CPU 112. The power failure handling process is configured to be executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 18), and after the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 in the management process (step S606: YES), step S607. The history setting process of step S608, the process for external output in step S608, and the power failure handling process are repeatedly executed in this order.

  In the power failure handling process, when the output state of the operation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S1401: YES), the external output in the first embodiment is performed in step S1402 to step S1406. In the same manner as steps S1002 to S1006 of the processing (FIG. 24), the number of balls entered to each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 is calculated. . Further, in step S1407, the number of ball entry is calculated while the front door frame 14 is open, as in step S1007 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. In step S1408, various parameters are calculated as in step S1008 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and in step S1409, for external output in the first embodiment. The total time is calculated as in step S1009 of the process (FIG. 24). Then, the information of the calculation result of step S1408 and the information of the calculation result of step S1409 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1410). In this case, when information of another operation result is already stored in the operation result memory 131, writing of the information of the operation result is performed so as not to overwrite the information of the operation result already stored. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result of the current writing. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the operation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  After that, in step S1411, the number of various balls in the open / close execution mode is calculated in the same manner as step S1011 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Similar to step S1012 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the second embodiment, the number of entering balls is calculated in the open / close execution mode and the front door frame 14 is open. In step S1413, various parameters are calculated as in step S1013 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the calculation result of step S1414 is written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S1414). In this case, the information of the calculation result is written so as not to overwrite the information of the other calculation results already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result of the current writing. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the operation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  After that, in step S1415, the number of balls entered in the high-frequency support mode is calculated in the same manner as step S1015 in the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Similar to step S1016 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of various balls in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open during the high frequency support mode is calculated. In step S1417, various parameters are calculated as in step S1017 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the calculation result of step S1417 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1418). In this case, the information of the calculation result is written so as not to overwrite the information of the other calculation results already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result of the current writing. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the operation result written this time corresponds to the timing. After that, it becomes an infinite loop, and waits until the supply of operation power to the management side CPU 112 is completely stopped.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an external output process performed by the management CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

  If the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 63 has become HI level (step S1501: YES), output processing of the operation result is executed (step S1502). In the output process, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, the various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read. In this case, when only various operation results corresponding to the occurrence of one operation trigger are stored in the operation result memory 131, only the various operation results corresponding to the occurrence of the one operation operation are stored in the reading device. In the case where various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of a plurality of calculation triggers are stored in the memory 131 for calculation results, the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the plurality of calculation triggers are read by the reading device .

  Thereafter, output processing of history information is executed (step S1503). In the output process, all pieces of history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, various types of history information stored in the history area 124 can be read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. By outputting not only various calculation results but also history information in this way, it becomes possible for a worker using a reader to perform detailed analysis on various calculation results.

  Thereafter, the clear process is executed (step S1504). In the clear processing, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is all cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. Further, in the clear processing, all the areas of the calculation result memory 131 are cleared to "0". As a result, the calculation result memory 131 is initialized.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. As a result, various parameters can be managed on a business day basis.

  When it is specified in the main CPU 63 that the supply of the operating power is stopped, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to the HI level, and the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. As a result, various parameters can be calculated by the management CPU 112 based on an instruction from the main CPU 63.

  Various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 are sequentially written to the calculation result memory 131. As a result, various parameters can be accumulated by the management IC 66, and when reading various parameters by the reading device, various parameters of a plurality of business days can be collectively read.

  When various parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131, information for specifying the timing at which the various parameters are calculated is written in the calculation result memory 131 along with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping the time when various parameters are calculated.

  Note that when the operation trigger occurs and the operation results of various parameters corresponding thereto are written in the operation result memory 131, the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0". As a result, in the situation where the recordable upper limit number of pieces of history information is already stored in the history memory 117, an event that new history information becomes a write target to the history memory 117 is less likely to occur.

  Further, the target information externally output to the reading device may be only information of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be output outside . This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information output to the outside.

Fourth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the power failure handling process executed by the management side CPU 112 is different from that of the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a power failure handling process executed by the management CPU 112 in the present embodiment.

  If the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S1601: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1602). In the various calculation processes, the processes of step S1402 to step S1409, step S1411 to step S1413, and step S1415 to step S1417 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter among the various parameters calculated in step S1602 is within the reference range (step S1603). In particular,
· Seventh parameter: (K3 × "number of prize balls for winning in special power winning device 32" + K5 × "number of prize balls for winning in second operation opening 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "general" Number of winning balls for winning in the winning opening 31 + K3 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K 4 × “number of winning balls for winning in the first operation opening 33” + K 5 × “second operation opening 34 Ratio of winning balls to winnings)) 8th parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning on special electric winning device 32” / total payout number of gaming balls (K 2 × for winning in general winning opening 31 Number of prize balls "+ K3 x" Number of prize balls for winning on special electric winning device 32 "+ K4 x" Number of prize balls for winning on first operation port 33 "+ K5 x" Number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34 Two parameters of the proportion of It is set as a parameter to be determined whether or not it is a reference range. Then, if the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, an affirmative determination is made in step S1603 because the predetermined parameter is the reference range.

The predetermined parameter is not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter. Instead of or in addition to these, another parameter may be set as the predetermined parameter. For example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) of game balls discharged from the total game number K2 / game area PA to the general winning opening 31 / the game area PA may be set as a predetermined parameter . In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, the predetermined parameter may be determined to be in the reference range. Alternatively, only predetermined parameters to be determined in step S1603 may be calculated in the various calculation processes of step S1602.

  If the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range (step S1603: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S1602 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1604). In this case, when information of another operation result is already stored in the operation result memory 131, writing of the information of the operation result is performed so as not to overwrite the information of the operation result already stored. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result of the current writing. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the operation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined parameter is in the reference range (step S1603: YES), the process of step S1604 is not executed. As a result, only various parameters in the case where the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range are written to the calculation result memory 131. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, the memory capacity necessary for the calculation result memory 131 can be suppressed while leaving the history in the calculation result memory 131.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1603 or if the process of step S1604 is performed, the process of clearing the history memory 117 is performed (step S1605). In the clear processing, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is all cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. After execution of the processing of step S1605, an infinite loop is established, and the process waits until the supply of operation power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

  According to the present embodiment described above, it is determined whether or not the contents of the calculated various parameters are included in the reference range, and only the various parameters determined not to be included in the reference range are stored in the operation result memory 131. Is written to As a result, the amounts of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 131 can be reduced, and the required storage capacity of the calculation result memory 131 can be reduced.

Fifth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the content of the operation trigger for causing the management side CPU 112 to execute the operation of various parameters is different from that of the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 35 (a) is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger specifying process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S 712 in the management output process (FIG. 20).

  It is determined whether or not entering of the gaming ball into any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 has occurred (step S1701). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, an addition process of the entering counter provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S1702). In the addition process, the number of game balls in which entry to any one of the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 is the current processing In the management output process (FIG. 20), the process is specified based on the number of times step S705 has been executed. Then, the number of the identified game balls is added to the entry counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the entry counter is equal to or greater than "500" which is the trigger reference number (step S1703). If it is "500" or more (step S1703: YES), subtraction processing of the entering counter of the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S1704). In the subtraction process, the value of the entering counter is subtracted by "500". Thereafter, output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1705). In the output process, the output state of the operation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o at the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the operation instruction signal is HI level.

  FIG. 35 (b) is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management CPU 112. The calculation process is a process that is executed instead of the power failure handling process in the third embodiment. Therefore, the arithmetic processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (FIG. 18), and after the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 in the management processing (step S606: YES), The history setting process, the process for external output in step S608, and the arithmetic process are repeatedly performed in this order.

  When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S1801: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1802). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described above, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the trigger reference number. In this case, various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where the main CPU 63 is supplied with operating power, so that the game balls enter the game area PA within the range of one business day It becomes possible to manage the aspect in detail.

  In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA has become equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the various parameters are conditioned on the condition that a game is being executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

Sixth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the content of the operation trigger for causing the management side CPU 112 to execute the operation of various parameters is different from that of the fifth embodiment. The configuration different from the fifth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger specifying process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S 712 in the management output process (FIG. 20).

  It is determined whether or not entering of the game ball into any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 has occurred (step S1901). If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S1902). The continuation counter is a main CPU 63 during a period in which the gaming ball does not enter the game in any of the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34. It is a counter for specifying in.

  If the value of the continuation counter after the addition of 1 is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S1903: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S1904). If the game ball does not enter the game in any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 continues for 5 seconds, an affirmative determination is made in step S1903. The stop reference value is set to Further, the time measurement flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not to measure the time for specifying the timing of switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level, and the time measurement flag When the value of is “0”, the measurement of the time is not performed, and when the value of the time measurement flag is “1”, the measurement of the time is performed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, "1" is set in the time measurement flag (step S1905).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1903, or if the process of step S1904 is performed, or if the process of step S1905 is performed, the time measurement flag of the main RAM 65 is set to “1” (condition Step S1906: YES), the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S1907). The measurement counter is a counter used to measure the time for specifying the timing of switching the output state of the operation instruction signal to the HI level.

  It is determined whether the value of the measurement counter after 1 addition is greater than or equal to the designated reference value (step S1908). The instruction | indication reference value is set so that affirmation determination may be carried out in step S1908, when the time measured in the measurement counter becomes 10 hours. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1908, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S1909), and output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1910). In the output process, the output state of the operation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o at the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the operation instruction signal is HI level.

  According to the present embodiment described above, since various parameters are calculated each time a predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of various parameters simply by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped in a situation where the game is not executed, and the measurement of the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop when the game play is started. This makes it possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation targets of the various parameters, and it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters in the situation in which the game is being executed.

  Note that, instead of the configuration in which whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed is measured using the measurement counter, it may be configured to be measured using the RTC 115.

Seventh Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the content of the operation trigger for causing the management side CPU 112 to execute the operation of various parameters is different from that of the first embodiment, and the main CPU 63 specifies the presence or absence of the occurrence of the operation trigger Instead, it is performed independently by the management CPU 112. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing executed by the management CPU 112. The calculation process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S812 in the history setting process (FIG. 21).

  Corresponds to the entry of the game ball to any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history setting process of this processing cycle It is determined whether the history information to be stored is stored in the history memory 117 (step S2001). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, an addition process of the entering counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S2002). In the addition process, the number of game balls in which entry to any one of the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 is the current processing It specifies based on the number of times of storing history information corresponding to generation | occurrence | production of the ball entering of a game ball in history setting processing of. Then, the number of the identified game balls is added to the entry counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the entry counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number "500" (step S2003). When it is "500" or more (step S2003: YES), subtraction processing of the entering counter of the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S2004). In the subtraction process, the value of the entering counter is subtracted by "500". Thereafter, various calculation processes are executed (step S2005). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described above, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the trigger reference number. In this case, various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where the main CPU 63 is supplied with operating power, so that the game balls enter the game area PA within the range of one business day It becomes possible to manage the aspect in detail.

  In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA has become equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the various parameters are conditioned on the condition that a game is being executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

  Further, the total number of gaming balls discharged from the game area PA is measured by the management CPU 112, and it is determined by the management CPU 112 whether the total number has reached the trigger reference number or more. That is, the operation side of the various parameters is uniquely determined by the management CPU 112. As a result, since it is not necessary for the main CPU 63 to execute processing for determining the operation trigger of various parameters, the processing load of the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

Eighth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the present embodiment, a memory for operation results 131 is provided in the management IC 66 as in the third embodiment (see FIG. 29). When an operation trigger occurs, the management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 and writes various parameters of the calculation result in the calculation result memory 131. In the present embodiment, a signal indicating that the open / close execution mode has been started, a signal indicating that the open / close execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high frequency support mode has been started, and a high frequency support mode The signal indicating the end, the signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has been started, and the signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has ended are individually sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Sent to

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a history setting process according to the present embodiment which is executed by the management side CPU 112.

  First, the number of buffers to be checked in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2101). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas storing information other than the information indicating blank is specified, and the specification The set number of information is set in the check target counter. In the present embodiment, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g store information indicating that the ball corresponds to one of the ball entry parts, and the eighth correspondence area 123h is used to start the open / close execution mode. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the end of the open / close execution mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and information corresponding to the start of the high frequency support mode is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j The information corresponding to the end of the high-frequency support mode is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k, and the information corresponding to the opening start of the front door frame 14 is stored in the twelfth correspondence area 123l. The information corresponding to the open end of the front door frame 14 is stored in a thirteenth correspondence area 123 m. Therefore, in step S 2101, “13” is set in the confirmation target counter.

  After that, it is confirmed whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2102). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are the check targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is the check target of numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the target of confirmation of numerical information. .

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, date information and RTC information which is time information are read out from the RTC 115 (step S2103). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2104). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 which is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information which is the writing target is identified. The RTC information read in step S2103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence relationship information is read out from the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current check target counter, and the correspondence relationship information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the write target. When the value of the check target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence areas 123 a to 123 o are the read targets of the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth correspondence area 123 j is the read target of the correspondence information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123 e is the correspondence relation It becomes an object of reading information.

  Thereafter, the value of the target pointer is incremented by 1 (step S2105). Specifically, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read, and the numerical value information is incremented by one. Then, it is determined whether the pointer information after the one addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S2106).

  If the maximum value is exceeded (step S2106: YES), various arithmetic processing is executed (step S2107). In the various arithmetic processing, the same processing as step S1002 to step S1009, step S1011 to step S1013 and step S1015 to step S1017 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, various parameters of the calculation result and information of the total time are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2108). In this case, when information of another operation result is already stored in the operation result memory 131, writing of the information of the operation result is performed so as not to overwrite the information of the operation result already stored. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result of the current writing. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the operation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  Thereafter, handover processing of status information is executed (step S2109). In the handover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, it is determined whether the current state is in the open / close execution mode, whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress, and the front door frame 14 is open. It is determined whether the Then, their state information is written to the management side RAM 114.

  Thereafter, clear processing of the history memory 117 is executed (step S2110). In the clear processing, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is all cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. In addition, after executing the clearing process, the state information written in the management RAM 114 in step S2109 is read. When the state information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in effect is stored, the history information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in effect is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the target of writing. While writing, the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. Also, when status information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is stored, history information storage area corresponding to pointer information for which history information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is to be written While writing to 125, the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. Further, when the state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened is stored, the history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened corresponds to the pointer information to be written. While writing in the history information storage area 125, the pointer information to be written is incremented by one.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2102, if a negative determination is made in step S2106, or if the process of step S2110 is performed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S2112). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2112: NO), the processing of step S2102 and subsequent steps is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  According to the present embodiment described above, various parameters are calculated when the history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where history information becomes a storage target exceeding the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117 and the calculation of various parameters can not be accurately performed.

  Further, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that has already been subjected to calculation of various parameters from becoming another calculation target of various parameters.

  In addition, even when the history memory 117 is initialized, the handover process of the state information is executed. Thus, management of state information can be appropriately performed.

The ninth embodiment
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 are different from those of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. First to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o are provided in the areas 141 to 144, respectively. Information of the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122 b has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the second counters 141 b to 144 b of the areas 141 to 144. Information of the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third counters 141c to 144c of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122 d has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourth counters 141 d to 144 d of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122 e has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fifth counters 141 e to 144 e of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122 f has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the sixth counters 141 f to 144 f of the areas 141 to 144. The seventh counters 141 g to 144 g of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122 g has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122 h has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eighth counters 141 h to 144 h of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the ninth counters 141i to 144i of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information of the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122 j has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the tenth counters 141 j to 144 j of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122 k has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eleventh counters 141 k to 144 k of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 1221 has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the twelfth counters 1411 to 1441 of each area 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122 m has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the thirteenth counters 141 m to 144 m of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122 n has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourteenth counters 141 n to 144 n of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fifteenth counters 141o to 144o of the areas 141 to 144, respectively.

  However, the measurement object using the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, 144a to 144o are the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation They are the 1st-7th buffers 122a-122g into which the signal corresponding to the ball entering result in either of the mouth 33 and the 2nd operation mouth 34 is inputted. Therefore, signals corresponding to status information, such as whether or not in the opening / closing execution mode, whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress, or whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened, are input The ten buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the measurement targets. The distinction as to whether or not they are to be measured is made on the basis of the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a history setting process according to the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

  First, the number of buffers to be checked in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas storing information other than the information indicating blank is specified, and the specification The set number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, since information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j as described above, "10" is set in the check target counter in step S2201. Do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current check target counter are buffers to which a signal of state information is input (step S2202). Specifically, in the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current check target counter, information indicating that it is the open / close execution mode, information indicating that it is the high frequency support mode, and the correspondence information. It is determined whether any of the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, setting processing of state information is executed (step S2203). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the management of the information of the first state indicating that the open / close execution mode is being performed It is stored in the RAM 114, and when the output state of the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the first state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect switches from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the second state indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is managed by the management side RAM 114 In the case where the output state of the ninth signal is switched from HI level to LOW level, the information of the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information of a third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open. Are stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from HI level to LOW level, the information of the third state is erased from the management side RAM 114.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2202, the buffer corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is stored in the buffer to which a signal of information different from the state information is input Whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level by confirming whether the numerical information being changed is changed from "0" to "1" or not It is determined whether or not it is (step S2204). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, an adding process of the corresponding total counter is executed (step S2205). In the addition processing, among the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o for totaling in the total area 141 of the history memory 117, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth total counter 141e is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first total counter 141a is the addition target. .

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is judged whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode (step S2206). If it is in the first state (step S2206: YES), the process of adding the corresponding first state counter is executed (step S2207). In the addition process, among the first to fifteenth counters 142a to 142o for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state is It becomes an addition object.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is judged whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). If it is in the second state (step S2208: YES), an adding process of the corresponding second state counter is executed (step S2209). In the addition processing, among the first to fifteenth counters 143a to 143o for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117, the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state is It becomes an addition object.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened (step S2210). If it is in the third state (step S2210: YES), the process of adding the corresponding third state counter is executed (step S2211). In the addition processing, among the first to fifteenth counters 144a to 144o for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117, the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 144 e for the third state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first counter 144 a for the third state is It becomes an addition object.

  If the process of step S2203 is executed, if the determination in step S2204 is negative, if the determination in step S2210 is negative, or if the process of step S2211 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is set to 1. The subtraction is performed (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S2213). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the processing of step S2202 and subsequent steps is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history of the gaming ball to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 Instead of being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times the game ball is detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the history memory 117 as compared to a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  As described above, the configuration is such that the game ball is detected as the number of times information detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the process for external output (FIG. 24) in the present embodiment (FIG. 24) A process of calculating the number of game balls entered into the game machine, a process of calculating the number of game balls placed in the special electric power winning device 32 such as step S1004 and a number of game balls entered into the first operation opening 33 such as step S1005. The process of calculating and the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34, such as step S1006, become unnecessary. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for computing various parameters.

  In the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 as in step S1003, all of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, 144a to 144c are general winning openings. Since it corresponds to 31, it is necessary to execute processing of summing the values of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c. In addition, the number of ball entry occurring in the situation in which the front door frame 14 is in the opening / closing execution mode can not be distinguished from the number of ball entry occurring in any other situation. Therefore, the process of step S1012 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 24) in the present embodiment. Similarly, it is not possible to distinguish the number of balls generated in the high frequency support mode and the front door frame 14 being opened from the number of balls generated in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1016 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 24) in the present embodiment.

Tenth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, storage means in which history information is stored is different from the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 41 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in the present embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management I / F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, and a management RAM 114, as in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 as in the third embodiment. Since the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the history memory 117, history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the history of entering the ball into the out port 24 a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. That is, the main RAM 65, which temporarily stores information necessary for executing a program in the main CPU 63, is also used as a memory for storing the ball entry history. The management IC 66 can access the main RAM 65 through the management I / F 111, and when an operation trigger for various parameters occurs, the main RAM 65 is accessed to read the ball entry history and read the ball entry history. Various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history. The various parameters thus calculated are stored in the calculation result memory 131. When the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various parameters are provided from the operation result memory 131 to the reading device, but the ball entry history stored in the main RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device .

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the ball-entering detection process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The ball entry detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

  When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored for the 0th bit D0 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, 1 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. It is determined that an individual gaming ball has been detected (step S2301: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2302). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the general winning opening 31 as a ball entry history. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to “0” when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and reading of various parameters from the calculation result memory 131 is performed by the reading device. Incidentally, the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even if the operation power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the general winning counter is It is kept in memory. Thereafter, the value of the 10-prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2303).

  When it is confirmed that the status has been switched from the status where the information of "0" is stored for the first bit D1 to the status where the information of "1" is stored, 1 is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. It is determined that individual gaming balls have been detected (step S2304: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2305). Thereafter, the value of the 10-prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2306).

  When it is confirmed that the situation has been changed from the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the second bit D2 to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, 1 is selected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. It is determined that individual gaming balls have been detected (step S2307: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2308). Thereafter, the value of the 10-prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2309).

  If it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored for the third bit D3, one game is detected by the special power detection sensor 45a. It is determined that a ball has been detected (step S3210: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the special power winning flag in the main RAM 65 (step S2311). Further, the value of the special electric pay counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2312). The special power prize winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered to the special power prize winning device 32 as an entering history. When the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and the reading device reads various parameters from the calculation result memory 131, the value of the special power pay counter is cleared to “0”. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even if the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the special electric pay counter is It is kept in memory. Thereafter, the value of the 15-prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2313).

  When it is confirmed that the status has been switched to the status in which the information of "1" is stored from the status in which the information of "0" is stored for the fourth bit D4, 1 is detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a. It is determined that individual gaming balls have been detected (step S2314: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the first operation winning flag in the main RAM 65 (step S2315). Further, the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S2316). The first operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the first operation port 33 as the ball entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to “0” when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and reading of various parameters from the calculation result memory 131 is performed by the reading device. . By the way, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even if the supply of operation power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the first operation counter is obtained even if the pachinko machine 10 enters the power-off state. Are kept in memory. Thereafter, the value of the one winning ball counter of the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2317).

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored for the fifth bit D5, 1 is detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. It is determined that each gaming ball has been detected (step S2318: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the second operation winning flag in the main RAM 65 (step S2319). Further, the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2320). The second operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the second operation port 34 as the ball entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to “0” when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and reading of various parameters from the calculation result memory 131 is performed by the reading device. . By the way, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even if the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the second operation counter is obtained even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Are kept in memory. Thereafter, the value of the one-prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S2321).

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information “1” is stored from the state in which the information “0” is stored for the sixth bit D6, one out-port detection sensor 48a is used. It is determined that a gaming ball has been detected (step S2322: YES). In this case, the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2323). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of ball entering the out port 24a as the ball entering history. The value of the out counter is cleared to “0” when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and reading of various parameters from the calculation result memory 131 is performed by the reading device. Incidentally, the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even if the operation power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, so the value of the out counter is stored even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off It is held.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored for the seventh bit D7, one game is performed by the gate detection sensor 49a It is determined that a ball has been detected (step S2324: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2325).

  As mentioned above, when the ball entering detection process is executed, the ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 It is stored in the main side RAM 65 as the number of ball entry. As a result, the main CPU 63 sends a signal to the management CPU 112 every time the ball enters any of the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening There is no need to output. Thus, the configuration for outputting a signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, when an operation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 reads the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 from the general winning counter of the main RAM 65, and the special electric winning counter of the main RAM 65 to the special electric winning device 32. Read the number of balls entered, read the number of balls entered into the first operation port 33 from the first operation counter of the main RAM 65, read the number of balls entered into the second operation port 34 from the second operation counter of the main RAM 65, The number of balls entering the out port 24a is read out from the out counter of the main RAM 65. Then, the first parameter to the eighth parameter described in the first embodiment are calculated by using the read numbers of the respective balls. However, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, measurement of the number of each ball in a state in which the number of each ball is separated when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state is not performed Therefore, the first to eighth parameters are calculated in a state in which the number of balls generated when the front door frame 14 is being opened is also included. In addition, since the number of balls entered in the open / close execution mode and the number of balls entered in the high frequency support mode are not separately measured, the first to eighteenth parameters and the twenty first parameter described in the first embodiment The 26th parameter is not calculated. The calculated first to eighth parameters are written to the calculation result memory 131. Then, when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all the parameters currently written in the calculation result memory 131 are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0".

  Note that instead of the management IC 66 uniquely accessing the main RAM 65, the information on the number of ball entry stored in the main RAM 65 as the ball entry history is transmitted to the management IC 66 by transfer control by the main CPU 63. The configuration may be In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent an event in which the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 simultaneously access the main RAM 65.

Eleventh Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 61, the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112, and the method of storing the ball entering history to each ball entering unit are different from the first embodiment. ing. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 43 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in the present embodiment. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115 unlike the first embodiment. Also. The main control substrate 61 is provided with a notification light emitting unit 151 in addition to the MPU 62. The light emitting unit 151 for notification is directly controlled to emit light by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and calculates various parameters using the information of the history of ball entry into each ball entry unit read from the history memory 117. And the light emission state of the light emission part 151 for alerting | reporting is controlled according to the content of the calculated various parameters. Although the informing light emitting unit 151 is accommodated in the accommodation space of the substrate box 60a of the main control device 60, the substrate box 60a is formed transparent, and the light emitting state of the informing light emitting unit 151 is outside the substrate box 60a. The notification light emitting unit 151 is provided so that visual confirmation can be performed from the above. As a result, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11 so that the main control device 60 can be visually checked, whereby the notification light emitting portion 151 is not required to open the substrate box 60a. It is possible to visually check the light emission state of

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The same types of signals as the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. In detail, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second buffer 122b is the second corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. A signal is input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. Is input, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. It is inputted.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as an eighth signal, and a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as a ninth signal, Although the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122 j as the tenth signal, in the present embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and the front A signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is not input to the input port 121. That is, no signal regarding the ball entry history is input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

  It has not been decided at the design stage of the management IC 66 what kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, and the types of these signals are received by the instruction from the main CPU 63. It is specified by the management CPU 112. The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management CPU 112 outputs it to the sixteenth buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that an instruction signal is input.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o. The first buffer counter 152a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second buffer counter 152 b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122 b has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third buffer counter 152c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth buffer counter 152d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth buffer counter 152 e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122 e has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The information for the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122 f has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the sixth buffer counter 152 f. The information for the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122 g has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh buffer counter 152 g. The eighth buffer counter 152 h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122 h has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth buffer counter 152i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth buffer counter 152j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh buffer counter 152k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 1521 stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The thirteenth buffer counter 152m stores information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourteenth buffer counter 152 n stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122 n has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifteenth buffer counter 152o stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

  However, any of the measurement targets using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o may be any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34. These are the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the ball entry results are inputted. Therefore, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the measurement targets. The distinction as to whether or not they are to be measured is made on the basis of the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 18).

  First, the number of buffers to be checked in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2401). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas storing information other than the information indicating blank is specified, and the specification The set number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, since information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh response areas 123a to 123j as already described, “7” is set in the check target counter in step S2401 Do.

  After that, it is confirmed whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2402). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are the check targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the check target of the numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first buffer 122a is the target of the numerical information check. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, an addition process of the corresponding buffer counters 152a to 152o is executed (step S2403). In the addition processing, among the counters of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117, the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer counter 152 e is to be added, and if the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first buffer counter 152 a is to be added.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2402 or if the process of step S2403 is performed, the value of the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2404). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S2405). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2405: NO), the processing of step S2402 and subsequent steps is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history of the gaming ball to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 Instead of being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times the game ball is detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the history memory 117 as compared to a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the external output processing in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

  When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S 2501: YES), the output target counter provided in the management RAM 114 receives the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152 a The number of counters to be output targets of the number information in the management side CPU 112 among 152o is set (step S2502). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas storing information other than the information indicating blank is specified, and the specification The set number of information is set in the check target counter. In this embodiment, since information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g as already described, “7” is set in the output target counter in step S2502. .

  Thereafter, the correspondence relationship information stored in the area corresponding to the value of the current output target counter among the first to fifteenth correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is read (step S2503), The number information stored in the counter corresponding to the value of the current output target counter among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the memory 117 is read (step S2504). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is “n”, the nth correspondence areas 123a to 123o become the reading targets of the correspondence information, and the nth buffer counters 152a to 152o read the number information. It becomes an object. For example, if the value of the output target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e becomes the read target of the correspondence information, and the fifth buffer counter 152e becomes the read target of the number information, and the value of the output target counter is If it is "1", the first correspondence area 123a becomes the read target of the correspondence information and the first buffer counter 152a becomes the read target of the number information.

  Thereafter, information output processing is executed (step S2505). In the information output process, a combination of the correspondence information read out in step S2503 and the number information read out in step S2504 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, the number-of-times information on the correspondence information that is the current output target is read.

  Thereafter, the value of the output target counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2506). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the output target counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S2507). If the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S2507: NO), the processing of step S2503 and subsequent steps is executed for the output target corresponding to the new value of the output target counter. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2507, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are cleared to "0".

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing parameter management processing executed by the main CPU 63. The parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

  First, it is determined whether an operation trigger for various parameters has occurred (step S2601). The calculation timing is the same as in the fifth embodiment, when the parameter management process is executed first after the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, and the special prize winning as in the fifth embodiment. It occurs every time the total number of balls entered into the device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 reaches 500 or more which is the trigger reference number. Calculation of various parameters is performed by temporarily turning off the pachinko machine 10 and then turning it on again because the parameter management process is first executed after the supply of operating power is started is set as the operation trigger. It becomes possible to generate an opportunity easily. Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, since notification corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters is executed as described later, it is only in the game area PA up to that point just by performing the power ON / OFF operation. It becomes possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball. In addition, it is possible to finely manage the ball entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA by setting the calculation trigger to occur whenever the total number of ball entering the game ball becomes 500 or more which is the trigger reference number. It becomes.

  When the operation trigger occurs (step S2601: YES), the ball entry history is read out from the counters for storing the ball entry history among the counters 152a to 152o of the first to fifteenth buffers of the history memory 117. Specifically, numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 152a to 152g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 can recognize the buffer counters 152 a to 152 o which are targets for reading the ball entry history by the program and data stored in the main ROM 64.

  Thereafter, various arithmetic processing is executed (step S2603). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history read out in step S2602 and the information on the number of winning balls corresponding to the ball entry history. Based on the program and data stored in the main ROM 64, the main CPU 63 sets the ball entry history read in step S2602 to the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation opening 33, and It is possible to specify which of the two operation ports 34 corresponds to, and it is also possible to specify information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry history read in step S2602 .

Specifically, regarding the various parameters calculated in step S2603,
· Seventh parameter: (K3 × "number of prize balls for winning in special power winning device 32" + K5 × "number of prize balls for winning in second operation opening 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "general" Number of winning balls for winning in the winning opening 31 + K3 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K 4 × “number of winning balls for winning in the first operation opening 33” + K 5 × “second operation opening 34 Ratio of winning balls to winnings)) 8th parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning on special electric winning device 32” / total payout number of gaming balls (K 2 × for winning in general winning opening 31 Number of prize balls "+ K3 x" Number of prize balls for winning on special electric winning device 32 "+ K4 x" Number of prize balls for winning on first operation port 33 "+ K5 x" Number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34 The ratio of ") is calculated.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated various parameters are in the first range (step S2604). If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated various parameters are considered to be in the first range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2604. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, a setting process of the first notification state is executed (step S2605). In the setting process, the light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is performed so as to be in the first notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 emits blue light.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined whether the calculated various parameters are in the second range (step S2606). When only one of the condition that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the calculated various parameters Affirmative determination is made in step S2606 as being of two ranges. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, a setting process of the second notification state is executed (step S2607). In the setting process, the light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is performed so as to be in the second notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a yellow light emitting state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2606, this means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, the setting process of the third notification state is executed (step S2608). In the setting process, the light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is performed so as to be in the third notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a red light emission state.

  The light emission state set in step S2605, step S2607 or step S2608 is such that the setting of a new notification state to the notification light emitting unit 151 is performed or the supply of operating power to the notification light emitting unit 151 is stopped. Continue until Further, since the notification state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is stored and held in the main RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the notification light emitting unit Even if 151 is once turned off, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, the light emission state corresponding to the type of information of the notification state stored in the main RAM 65 is obtained. The light emission control of the informing light emitting unit 151 is executed.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The ball entry history of the gaming ball to the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. Instead, it is stored as information on the number of times the game ball is detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the history memory 117 as compared to a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  A notification light emitting unit 151 is provided for notifying of contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112. As a result, since the contents corresponding to various parameters are notified by the pachinko machine 10 itself, the administrator of the game hall, etc. does not read the information stored in the memory 117 for the history of the game ball in the game area PA. It becomes possible to grasp the ball entering mode.

  The notification light emitting portion 151 is provided together with the MPU 62 on the main control substrate 61 housed in the substrate box 60 a. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light emitting unit 151.

  Calculation of various parameters and light emission control of the informing light emitting unit 151 are executed not by the management CPU 112 but by the main CPU 63. Thereby, it is possible to improve the reliability of the notification content in the notification light emitting unit 151.

  When the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the first range, the first notification state is set, and when the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the second range, the second notification state is set, and the calculation results of various parameters are When neither the first range nor the second range is supported, the third notification state is set. That is, the various parameters are not notified as they are, but the content corresponding to the range including the various parameters is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification light emitting unit 151 from being too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting unit 151.

  Even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped by continuing the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 151. The light emission state of the light source may be maintained. In this case, even when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it is possible to grasp the entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA by checking the notification light emitting unit 151. .

  Further, instead of the configuration, the notification light emitting unit 151 is turned off when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, but the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Alternatively, the notification light emitting unit 151 may be controlled to emit light according to the result of various parameters calculated before the supply of the operation power is stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the light emitting unit 151 for notification in the gaming hall before the start of business, it is possible to grasp the ball entering aspect of the gaming ball on the last business day.

  The notification means for notifying calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the configuration in which the light emitting unit 151 for notification is used, and the display unit having a display surface such as the symbol display device 41 may be used. It may be In addition, a signal corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters may be externally output to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal board 97.

  The special view display unit 37 a of the special view unit 37 or the general view display unit 38 a of the common view unit 38 may be configured to share the function as the notification light emitting unit 151. For example, when supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, various parameters are calculated, and the calculation result is determined depending on whether it is included in the first range, the second range, or the other as in the above embodiment. The notification corresponding to the calculation result may be executed by the special view display unit 37a or the common view display unit 38a immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the condition for starting the variation display of the pattern in the special view display unit 37a or the start condition for the variation display of the pattern in the common view display unit 38a is satisfied. It may be configured to be temporarily interrupted when the variable display start condition is satisfied, and resumed when the variable display of the pattern is finished. According to this configuration, it is possible to use the special view display unit 37a or the common view display unit 38a as notification means for notifying the ball entry mode of the gaming ball of the game area PA.

  The notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position where it can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 in a state in which the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position behind the window panel 52 behind the pachinko machine 10 and visible through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the notification content corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters can be confirmed without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14.

Twelfth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, a configuration for providing information on each ball entry result to the management IC 66 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of signal paths for causing the detection results of the ball entering detection sensors 42a to 48a to be input to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

  The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. The detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. The detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. The detection result of the special power detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Further, the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

  A first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a second branch path SL22 is formed so as to be branched from an intermediate position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from the midway position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

  With the above configuration, the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervention of the processing by the main CPU 63. Thus, the main CPU 63 executes processing for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize the ball entry results of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34. It is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63 because it is not necessary to do so.

  The branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist in the MPU 62. As a result, it becomes possible to make external access to the branch point and the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the outside difficult, and it becomes possible to prevent a fraudulent action to make the management IC 66 input an abnormal ball entry result. .

The thirteenth embodiment
Although the management IC 66 is provided in the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 in the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided in the present embodiment. Instead, the main CPU 63 executes processing for managing the ball entry history to each of the ball entry units 24 a and 31 to 34. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 50 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of the main control unit 60 and the sound emission control unit 81 in the present embodiment.

  The MPU 62 is provided on the main control board 61 of the main controller 60 as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the I / F 101 as in the first embodiment, but the management IC 66 is not provided. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a through the input port of the I / F 101 and commands from the payout CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands As described above, the main CPU 63 executes various processes. In addition, when various processes are executed by the main CPU 63, when the signal output is performed to the apparatus such as the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a, the signal output is performed through When the main CPU 63 executes various processing, the command output to the payout CPU 92 and the audio light emission control device 81 is performed through the output port of the I / F 101.

  The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the hall computer HC via the external terminal plate 97 as in the first embodiment. Here, in the first embodiment, the main CPU 63 outputs a signal to the hall computer HC while the hall computer HC does not output the signal to the main CPU 63, but in the present embodiment the main CPU 63 The signal is output to the hall computer HC from the outside, and the signal is output to the main CPU 63 from the hall computer HC. The types of signals externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC, that is, the contents of information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC are the same as in the first embodiment. The hall computer HC instructs the main CPU 63 to execute calculation of various parameters using the ball entry history to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 and report the calculation result, which will be described later in detail. An instruction signal to start the check is output.

  The execution mode of the display control of the symbol display device 41 corresponds to the execution mode of the calculation using the ball entry history and the execution of the notification of the calculation result. The execution instruction of the display control is executed by the sound emission control device 81 based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 63. About the sound emission control device 81, the sound emission control device 81 is provided with a sound emission control board 161 on which the MPU 162 is mounted. In the MPU 162 of the sound emission control board 161, in addition to the sound side CPU 163 which is a processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit, a sound side ROM 164, a sound side RAM 165, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, data input / output Circuits etc. are built in.

  The sound side ROM 164 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require an external power supply to store and hold a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used as a read only memory. The sound light side ROM 164 stores various control programs executed by the sound light side CPU 163 and fixed value data.

  The sound side RAM 165 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to store and retain SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The sound light side RAM 165 is capable of random access and has a faster read time than the sound light side ROM 164 when compared with the same data capacity. The sound light side RAM 165 temporarily stores various data and the like in response to the execution of the control program stored in the sound light side ROM 164.

  The sound-side CPU 163 receives a command from the main CPU 63 but does not transmit the command to the main CPU 63. The sound-side CPU 163 receives the variation command, the type command and the opening command from the main CPU 63 as in the first embodiment. When the sound-side CPU 163 receives these commands, the sound-side CPU 163 executes an effect determination process corresponding to the received command, and executes the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the determined content. . Also, a command corresponding to the determined content is transmitted to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the content of the received command.

  The sound side CPU 163 receives a demo start command and a check start command from the main CPU 63 in addition to the above-mentioned commands. The demonstration start command is a command instructing to start the demonstration effect. The demonstration effect starts when the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 start when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the previous game run. It says about waiting production. In the start waiting effect, an effect different from the effect for the game run and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. The check start command, which will be described in detail later, corresponds to the execution mode of display control of the symbol display device 41 during execution of calculation using the management result of the ball entry history and execution of notification of the calculation result. It is a command that instructs to set the mode as

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63.

  In steps S2701 to S2705, the same processes as steps S201 to S205 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereafter, a check process is executed (step S2706). Although the details will be described later in the check process, calculations of various parameters are executed using the ball entry histories to the ball entering units 24a and 31 to 34, and a process for notifying the calculation result is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped or the display period of the check result (step S2707). Similar to the first embodiment, when it is confirmed that a predetermined event (for example, detection of an unauthorized radio wave or detection of an unauthorized vibration) has occurred in the fraud detection process (step S2705). When "1" is set to the game stop flag, it is determined in step S2707 that the game is being stopped. When it is confirmed that the occurrence of the predetermined event has been canceled, the game stop flag is cleared to "0", so that it is not determined in step S2707 that the game is being stopped. The display period of the check result is a period during which the calculation result of various parameters executed using the ball entry history to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 is notified, and the notification in step S2706 Is set to the display period of the check result, and the display period of the check result is canceled when the notification is ended in step S2706.

  When negative determination is carried out in step S2707, in order to advance a game, processing of step S2708-step S2719 is performed. Specifically, in step S2708, the port output process is performed as in step S207 in the first embodiment, and in step S2709, the reading process is performed as in step S208 in the first embodiment, and step S2710 In step S2711, the timer update process is performed in the same manner as step S210 in the first embodiment. In step S2712, the firing control process is performed in the same manner as step S211 in the first embodiment. In step S2713, the input state monitoring process is performed as in step S212 in the first embodiment. In step S2714, the special figure electric power control process is performed. In step S2715, step S214 in the first embodiment. Common control and control In step S2716, the display control process is performed as in step S215 in the first embodiment. In step S2717, the payout state reception process is performed as in step S216 in the first embodiment. In step S2718, the payout output process is performed as in step S217 in the first embodiment, and in step S2719, the external information setting process is performed as in step S218 in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2707, the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 are not executed. Thus, if the setting for stopping the game is performed in the fraud detecting process in step S2705, or if the setting of the display period of the check result is performed in the process for checking in step S2706, the game is advanced Some of the required processing will not be executed.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the special figure special power control process executed in step S2714.

  First, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the demonstration display (step S2801). If a demonstration display is not being performed and a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the previous game cycle, it is determined that the demonstration display start timing has come. If it is the start timing of the demonstration display (step S2801: YES), a demonstration start command is transmitted to the sound side CPU 163 (step S2802).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing effect control processing executed by the sound light side CPU 163. The effect control process is repeatedly performed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). When the sound light side CPU 163 receives the demonstration start command from the main side CPU 63 (step S2902: YES), it executes the effect determination process for demonstration (step S2903). In the demonstration effect determination process, the data table for demonstration effect is read out from the sound side ROM 164 to the sound side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. Thereby, the demonstration effect is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Thereafter, a demonstration start command is transmitted to the display control device 82 (step S2904). By receiving the demonstration start command, the display control device 82 performs display control of the symbol display device 41 so that display effect for demonstration effect is executed.

  Returning to the description of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52), when the determination in step S2801 is negative or when the process of step S2802 is executed, the process of acquiring the hold information is executed (step S2803). In the process of acquiring the hold information, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34, and when the winning is occurring, the number of holdings in the holding storage area 65a is an upper limit It is determined whether it is less than a value ("4" in the present embodiment). If the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, the number of reservations is incremented by 1 and each numerical information of the per-random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S2702 is for suspension It stores in the first reserve area among the reserve areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE. In the case where winnings to the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are occurring at the same time, the processing for acquiring the above-mentioned suspension information within the range of executing the acquisition process of the suspension information once is performed. Run multiple times.

  In addition, when new acquisition of the hold information is performed, an acquisition command corresponding to that is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 163. When the sound-side CPU 163 receives the acquisition command, the sound-light CPU 163 transmits a command corresponding to the acquisition command to the display control device 82 in the other processing (step S2914) in the effect control process (FIG. 53). The display control device 82 having received the command changes the display mode in the hold display area Ga (FIG. 66 (b)) in the symbol display device 41 to a display mode corresponding to the increase of the hold information. Details of the hold display area Ga will be described later.

  Thereafter, the information of the special figure special charge counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is read out (step S2804), and the special figure special charge address table provided in the main side ROM 64 is read out (step S2805). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the special view special charge counter is acquired from the special view special charge address table (step S2806), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address among the processes of steps S2808 to S2814 (step S2807). ). The special figure special charge counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the various processes of step S2808 to step S2814 should be executed, and the special figure special charge address table is of the special figure special charge counter. A start address of a program for executing the processing of steps S2808 to S2814 is set in association with the numerical information.

  In step S2808, special figure fluctuation start processing is executed. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the special figure change start process.

  In the special view fluctuation start process, the data setting process is executed (step S3002) on condition that the number of the hold information stored in the hold area RE is one or more (step S3001: YES). In the data setting process, the number of reservations is first decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting data stored in the respective reserve areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserve area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserve area RE1 to the fourth reserve area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data of the first reserve area RE1, and The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as reserve area RE2 → first reserve area RE1, third reserve area RE3 → second reserve area RE2, fourth reserve area RE4 → third reserve area RE3 and so on. At this time, a shift command for making it possible to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 163. When the sound-side CPU 163 receives a shift command, it transmits a command corresponding to the shift command to the display control device 82 in the other processing (step S2914) in the effect control process (FIG. 53). The display control device 82 having received the command changes the display mode in the hold display area Ga (FIG. 66 (b)) in the symbol display device 41 to a display mode corresponding to a decrease in the hold information. Details of the hold display area Ga will be described later.

  Returning to the description of the special view change start process (FIG. 54), after the data setting process is performed, a yes / no determination process is performed (step S3003). In the success or failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, it refers to the high / low probability table for the high probability mode provided in the main ROM 64, and among the information stored in the execution area AE, information for yes / no determination, namely It is determined whether the numerical information matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Also, in the case of the low probability mode, with reference to the success / failure table for the low probability mode provided in the main ROM 64, the numerical information on the per random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is for It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot numerical information.

  If the result of the propriety determination processing is a big hit winning result (step S3004: YES), the distribution determination processing is executed (step S3005). In the distribution determination process, information for distribution determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information on the jackpot type counter C2 is read. Then, with reference to the distribution table provided in the main ROM 64, it is specified to which jackpot result the numerical information related to the read out jackpot type counter C2 corresponds. Specifically, the low probability jackpot result, which of the low winning high probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result corresponds to which jackpot result is specified.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S3006). Specifically, from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main side ROM 64, information of the aspect of the pattern to be finally displayed on the special view display unit 37a finally in the game round related to the start of fluctuation this time Identify and write the identified information to the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information of the pattern aspect to be stopped and displayed on the special view display unit 37a is set to be different for each type of the jackpot result.

  Thereafter, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S3007). Specifically, the main RAM 65 is provided with a flag corresponding to the type of each jackpot result, and in step S3007, of the flags corresponding to the type of each jackpot result, the distribution determination process of step S3005 is performed. Set "1" to the flag corresponding to the result.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3004 that the result is not the big hit winning result, the stop result setting process for the out result is executed (step S3008). Specifically, information on the pattern aspect to be finally displayed on the special view display unit 37a in the game round relating to the start of the change from the stop result table for deviation result stored in advance in the main side ROM 64 Identify and write the identified information to the main RAM 65. The information of the pattern aspect selected in this case is different from the information of the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After one of the processes of step S3007 and step S3008 is executed, the process of grasping the continuation period of the game times is executed (step S3009). In this process, numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether reach display is generated by the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined that the reach display is generated when the game time relating to the start of the change is the low probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result. If neither the jackpot result nor the numerical information on the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

  If it is determined that the reach display occurs, the duration period of the game corresponding to the numerical information of the variation type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to the reach generation continuation period table stored in the main ROM 64 . On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display is not generated, the reach non-occurrence continuation time period table stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to, and the game time corresponding to the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is continued. Get a period. Incidentally, the duration of the game times that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of the game times that can be acquired with reference to the reach occurrence duration table.

  In addition, the continuation period of the game times at the time of reach non-occurrence | occurrence | production is set so that the continuation period of game times becomes short, so that there are many numbers of pending | holding information stored in area RE for suspension. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the duration of the short game times is selected as compared with the situation where the number of holding information is the same as the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A reach non-occurrence duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the duration of the game times may not change depending on the number of holding information and the support mode, or may be opposite to the above relationship. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the duration of the game play at the time of reach occurrence. Further, in the case of various jackpot results, a duration table may be individually set for each of the case of outreach and the case of outreach in which no reach occurs. In this case, distribution of the continuation period of the game times according to each game result will be performed.

  Thereafter, the information on the continuation period of the game times acquired in step S3009 is set in the special view special power timer counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S3010). The updating of the numerical information set in the special drawing special power timer counter is executed in the timer updating process (step S2711). By the way, although the variation display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a and the variation display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 are performed as the effect for the game use, when the respective variation displays are ended, the game run In the state where the stop result of is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, the combination of predetermined symbols is on standby on the effective line), the final stop is displayed over the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec). In this case, the continuation period of the game times acquired in step S3009 is the total time of one game cycle.

  Thereafter, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound side CPU 163 (step S3011). The variable command includes information on the duration of the game play. Here, the duration of the game times obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table as described above is different from the duration of the game times obtained with reference to the reach occurrence duration table. Even if the command for variation does not include information on the presence or absence of reach, the sound light side CPU 163 can specify the presence or absence of the reach from the information on the duration of the game. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating the presence or absence of the reach occurrence. Note that the change command may include information directly indicating the presence or absence of reach. Further, the type command includes information on the game result.

  When the sound-side CPU 163 receives the variation command and the type command from the main CPU 63, the sound-side CPU 163 executes the effect determination processing for the game circulant by making an affirmative determination in step S2905 of the effect control processing (FIG. 53) (step S2906). In the effect determination process for the game, the effect lottery process corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time is executed. Further, a data table corresponding to the combination of the content of the variation command and type command received this time and the result of the effect lottery process is read out from the sound side ROM 164 to the sound side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 execute the effects for the game run over the duration of the game run determined this time by the main CPU 63. After that, the variation pattern command corresponding to the type of the data table read in step S2906 is transmitted to the display control device 82 (step S2907). The display control device 82 starts the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 by receiving the variation pattern command, thereby starting the effect of the game circulation in the symbol display device 41, and the variation pattern command received this time The display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so that the effect for the game occasion corresponding to is executed.

  Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 54), after executing the process of step S3011, the variable figure display on the special figure display unit 37a is started (step S3012). Then, the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S3013). In this case, since the numeric information of the special figure special power counter is "0" when the special figure variation start process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is "1" when the process of step S3013 is executed. It becomes ".

  Returning to the description of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52), in step S2809, the special figure changing process is executed. In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether it is the continuation time of the game times and the timing before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern in the special view display unit 37a Execute the process to make a change. When it is time to display the final stop, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is added by 1, and the numerical information of the counter is processed from the special figure during fluctuation processing to the special figure determination fixed processing Update to things. In the present embodiment, the final stop command is not transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light CPU 163.

  In step S2810, processing is executed during special image determination. In the special figure determination process, the display mode of the pattern in the special view display unit 37a is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. Further, in the processing during special-figure determination, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not transition to the open / close execution mode occurs. If transition to the open / close execution mode does not occur, the numeric information of the special figure special power counter is cleared to “0”. When transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, the numerical information of the special electric power special counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is processed while the special electric power is determined. Update.

  In step S2811, a special power start process is executed. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the special power start process.

  In the special power start process, when the process for starting the opening period in the current opening / closing execution mode has not been executed (step S3101: NO), the setting process of the opening period is executed (step S3102). In the setting process, information on the opening period (for example, 5 seconds) is set in the special-image special-charge timer counter of the main RAM 65. In addition, the opening command is transmitted to the sound side CPU 163 (step S3103).

  When the sound-side CPU 163 receives an opening command from the main-side CPU 63, it makes an affirmative determination in step S2908 of the effect control process (FIG. 53) to execute the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode (step S2909). In the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the data table for the open / close execution mode is read from the sound light side ROM 164 to the sound light side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. Thereby, effects for the open / close execution mode are executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Thereafter, an opening command is transmitted to the display control device 82 (step S2910). When the display control device 82 receives the opening command, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so that the display effect for the open / close execution mode is executed.

  In addition, in the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the effect of the opening period which occurs when the opening and closing execution mode is started, the effect of the opening and closing period where the opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 is repeated, and the opening and closing execution mode end And an effect of an ending period that occurs when the For example, in the symbol display device 41, an image showing that the open / close execution mode has been started is displayed in the effect of the opening period, and an image showing that the special power winning device 32 is opened / closed is displayed in the effect of the open / close period, In the effect of the ending period, an image indicating that the open / close execution mode is ended is displayed. The opening command also includes information indicating the type of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the opening / closing execution mode this time, and the sound light side CPU 163 and the display control device 82 refer to the information to obtain the jackpot result. The effect for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type is executed.

  Returning to the description of the special power start process (FIG. 55), when the opening period has elapsed (step S3104: YES), a start process for starting the first round game is executed (step S3105). In the start process, the special power winning device 32 is opened, and the ending condition of the round game is set. When setting the ending condition, the upper limit continuation time in the case of continuing the special power winning device 32 in the open state in the first round game of this time is set in the special figure special power timer counter of the main RAM 65, and The upper limit number of gaming balls that can be won by the special power winning device 32 in the game is set in the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 65. The upper limit continuation time set in the special figure special power timer counter is updated by the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), and the upper limit number set in the winning number counter is a prize Each time a occurs, it is decremented by one. Thereafter, the numerical information of the special drawing special power counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special power start process to the one corresponding to the special electric power open process (step S3106).

  Returning to the description of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52), in step S2812, the special power release process is executed. In the processing during the special power release, it is determined whether the ending condition of the round game is satisfied. If the termination condition is satisfied, the special power winning device 32 is closed. And if the round game which ended this time is the round game of the last execution time, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is added 1 by the numerical electric information of the counter concerned from the thing corresponding to the special electric power open processing If the round game ended this time is the round game of the last execution time, the numerical information of the special power special counter is added by 2 and the numerical information of the counter is processed during the special electric power release process. Update from the one corresponding to the special power termination process.

  In step S2813, processing during special power close is executed. In the special power closed process, it is determined whether or not an interval period between round games has elapsed. The interval period is set in the special figure special power timer counter of the main RAM 65 when the previous round game is over, and the set value is updated in the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) Ru. When the interval period has elapsed, the special power winning device 32 is set in the open state and the ending condition of the round game is set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special drawing special power counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric power closing process to the one corresponding to the special electric power open process.

  In step S2814, a special power termination process is executed. In the special power termination process, when the process for starting the ending period in the current opening / closing execution mode is not yet executed, information on the ending period (for example, 5 sec) is set in the special figure special power timer counter of the main RAM 65, An ending command is transmitted to the sound side CPU 163. When the sound side CPU 163 receives the ending command from the main side CPU 63, the data table for the ending period is transferred from the sound side ROM 164 to the sound side RAM 165 in the other processing (step S2914) of the effect control process (FIG. 53). read out. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. Thereby, the effect of the ending period is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Thereafter, an ending command is transmitted to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the ending command, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so that the display effect of the ending period is performed.

  Next, the ball entry detection process executed in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) in the main CPU 63 will be described.

  First, the normal counter area 171, the open / close execution mode counter area 172, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 173 provided in the main RAM 65 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In each of these areas 171 to 173, general winning counters 171a, 172a, 173a, special electric winning counters 171b, 172b, 173b, first operation counters 171c, 172c, 173c, second operation counters 171d, 172d, 173d, and Out counters 171e, 172e and 173e are provided. The general winning counters 171a, 172a and 173a are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The special power winning counters 171b, 172b and 173b are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the special power winning device 32 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The first operation counters 171c, 172c, and 173c are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The second operation counters 171 d, 172 d, and 173 d are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The out counters 171e, 172e and 173e are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the out port 24a from the predetermined measurement start timing.

  Each of the counters 171a to 171e of the normal counter area 171 is the ball entering portion 24a, which is a target in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is neither the open / close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode. It is utilized in order to measure the number of game balls which entered 31-34. The counters 172a to 172e of the opening / closing execution mode counter area 172 enter the ball entry portions 24a and 31 to be targeted in the opening / closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. It is used to measure the number of balls that have been played. The counters 173a to 173e of the high frequency support mode counter area 173 are the ball entry portions 24a and 31 to be targeted in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and in the high frequency support mode. It is used to measure the number of game balls that have entered a ball. It should be noted that the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state is not to be measured because the game ball enters the ball by cleaning the ball entry portions 24a and 31 to 34 with the front door frame 14 open. It is for excluding the number of ball entering in the case of being carried out from measurement object.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the ball entering detection process executed in step S 2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) in the main CPU 63.

  In the ball entering detection process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S3201: YES), the normal ball entering detection process (step S3204), the ball entering detection process in the open / close execution mode (step S3205) None of the ball-entering detection processing (step S3206) in the high frequency support mode is executed. Since the game area PA is formed by the space divided back and forth by the back of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front of the game board 24, the front door frame 14 is opened. Even if the game area PA is opened forward and the game ball is fired toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball can not flow down the game area PA normally. In addition, when game ball entry to ball entry section 24a, 31-34 occurs when front door frame 14 is in the open state, the manager of the game hall because of the elimination of maintenance and trouble This is a case where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and the game ball enters due to maintenance or the like. Since entering of such a game ball is not entry of the game ball in the regular game execution situation, it is not necessary to manage entry of such a game ball. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processes in steps S3204 to S3206 are executed in the ball entering detection process.

  When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is neither the open / close execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode (step S3201 to step S3203: NO), the normal ball entry detection process is executed (step S3204). When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and in the open / close execution mode (step S3201: NO, step S3202: YES), the ball entry detection process in the open / close execution mode is executed (step S3205). When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and in the high frequency support mode (step S3201: NO, step S3203: YES), the ball entry detection process in the high frequency support mode is executed (step S3206).

  FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the normal ball entry detection process in step S3204.

  When it is determined that one gaming ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a (step S3301: YES), when it is determined that one gaming ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a ( Step S3304: YES), or when it is determined that one gaming ball is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a (step S3307: YES), the value of the general winning counter 171a for normal is incremented by 1 (step S3302, step S3305, step S3308). Further, the value of the 10-prize ball counter of the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3303, step S3306, step S3309). It should be noted that if the ball entering detection process is in the open / close execution mode, the value corresponding to the general winning counter 172a for the open / close execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3302, step S3305 and step S3308. In the case of the ball detection process, the value of the general winning counter 173a for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one as the process corresponding to the step S3302, the step S3305 and the step S3308.

  If it is determined that the special game detection sensor 45a detects one game ball (step S3310: YES), after setting the special game winning flag of the main side RAM 65 to "1" (step S3311), the special game winning game for normal use The value of the counter 171b is incremented by 1 (step S3312). Further, the value of the 15-prize ball counter of the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3313). If the ball entering detection process is in the opening / closing execution mode, the value corresponding to the special power winning counter 172b for the opening / closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3312, and if the ball entry detection processing in the high frequency support mode As a process corresponding to step S3312, the value of the special power pay counter 173b for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one.

  When it is determined that one gaming ball is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a (step S3314: YES), after setting "1" to the first operation winning flag of the main side RAM 65 (step S3315), The value of the normal first operation counter 171c is incremented by 1 (step S3316). Further, the value of the one winning ball counter of the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3317). If the ball entering detection process is in the opening / closing execution mode, the value corresponding to step S3316 is added to the value of the first operation counter 172c for the opening / closing execution mode, and the entry detection process in the high frequency support mode For example, as a process corresponding to step S3316, the value of the first operation counter 173c for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one.

  If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a (step S3318: YES), after setting "1" to the second operation prize flag of the main side RAM 65 (step S3319), The value of the normal second operation counter 171d is incremented by one (step S3320). Further, the value of the one winning ball counter of the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3321). If the ball entering detection process is in the opening / closing execution mode, the value corresponding to step S3320 is added to the value of the second operation counter 172d for the opening / closing execution mode, and the ball entering detection processing in the high frequency support mode is performed. For example, as a process corresponding to step S3320, the value of the second operation counter 173d for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one.

  If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a (step S3322: YES), the value of the normal out counter 171e is incremented by 1 (step S3323). If the ball entry detection process is in the open / close execution mode, the value corresponding to the step S3323 is added to the value of the out counter 172e for the open / close execution mode, and if it is the ball entry detection process in the high frequency support mode As a process corresponding to S3323, the value of the out counter 173e for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one.

  If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S3324: YES), "1" is set in the gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3325).

  As described above, when the ball entering detection process is executed, the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 is measured using the general winning counters 171a, 172a and 173a, and the game to the special power winning device 32 is performed. The number of ball entry is measured using the special-charge winning counter 171b, 172b, 173b, and the number of game balls entered into the first operation port 33 is measured using the first operation counter 171c, 172c, 173c. The number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 is measured using the second operation counters 171 d, 172 d and 173 d, and the number of game balls entering the out port 24 a is the out counters 171 e, 172 e and 173 e It is measured using. Thereby, it becomes possible for main side CPU63 to grasp ball entering history to each ball entering part 24a and 31-34. Also, the normal counter area 171, the open / close execution mode counter area 172, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 173 are separately provided, so that neither the open / close execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode is available. It is possible to distinguish the situation in the opening / closing execution mode and the situation in the high frequency support mode, and to grasp the ball entering history to the ball entering sections 24a, 31 to 34 by the main CPU 63.

  Next, the check process executed in step S2706 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If neither the display period of the check result nor the check waiting period is received (steps S3401 and S3402: NO), it is determined whether an instruction signal to start the check has been received from the hall computer HC via the external terminal plate 97 ( Step S3403). As described above, the instruction signal for starting check is a hole for instructing calculation of various parameters by using the ball entry history to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 and notifying the operation result. It is output from the computer HC. In addition, the opportunity which the hall | hole computer HC outputs the instruction | indication signal of a check start is arbitrary, for example, the administrator of a game hall checks all the pachinko machines 10 of a game hall by performing predetermined | prescribed operation with respect to the hall | hole computer HC. The start instruction signal may be output, or the hall computer HC may output a check start instruction signal to all the pachinko machines 10 at a predetermined time, and the game hall business may be operated. Among the above, the hall computer HC may output a check start instruction signal to all the pachinko machines 10 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the check start instruction signal was transmitted last time.

  If the instruction signal to start check has been received (step S3403: YES), the game ball launch prohibition process is executed (step S3404). Thus, even if the operation to fire the gaming ball is performed on the firing operation device 28 in a situation where the gaming ball is normally stored in the upper plate 55a, the firing of the gaming ball from the gaming ball firing mechanism 27 is It will be in a state of being The state in which the launch of the game ball is prohibited is canceled when the notification of the calculation result of various parameters using the ball entry history to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 is ended.

  Thereafter, interruption processing of game times is executed (step S3405). In the interruption process of the game times, if the game times are not being executed, the start of a new game time and the new start of a demonstration display are prohibited. Thus, even if the hold information is newly acquired in a situation where the game play is not executed, the start of the game play triggered by the hold information is awaited, and the new start of the demonstration display is also awaited. Note that the execution of step S2802 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52) is blocked, whereby the new start of the demonstration display is prohibited.

  In addition, in the interruption process of the game time, if the game time is being executed, the measurement of the continuation period of the game time measured by the main CPU 63 is stopped. Specifically, during the execution of the game, the duration of the game is set in the special figure special power timer counter of the main RAM 65, and the value of the special figure special power timer counter is the timer of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) Although the update processing (step S2711) will be periodically updated, the update of the special figure special power timer counter by this timer update processing is stopped. In addition, when the interruption process of game times is executed, the process for starting the game times and the process for advancing the game times are not executed in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52). However, even if interruption processing of game times is executed, acquisition processing of hold information (step S2803) in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 52) is executed.

  Thereafter, the interruption processing of the open / close execution mode is executed (step S3406). In the interruption processing of the open / close execution mode, the start of the new open / close execution mode is prohibited if the open / close execution mode is not being executed. In the interruption process of the opening and closing execution mode, if the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, the measurement of the opening period measured by the main CPU 63, the upper limit continuation time of the round game, the interval period or the ending period is stopped. . Specifically, during the opening period, the opening period is set to the special figure special power timer counter of the main side RAM 65, and the upper limit duration time of the special special prize winning device 32 is special generation special time timer of the main side RAM 65 during the round game. The interval period is set to the special figure special power timer counter of the main RAM 65 during a plurality of round games, and the ending period is set to the special figure special power timer counter of the main RAM 65 during the ending period. Although the value of the special figure special power timer counter is periodically updated in the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), the special figure special power timer counter is updated by the timer update process. Stop. Further, in the interruption processing of the open / close execution mode, if the special power winning device 32 is in the open state, the special power winning device 32 is put in the closed state. When the process for interrupting the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the process for starting the opening / closing execution mode and the process for advancing the opening / closing execution mode are not executed in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52). . However, even if the interruption process of the open / close execution mode is executed, the acquisition process of the hold information (step S2803) in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52) is executed.

  Thereafter, interrupting processing of the common map general control is executed (step S3407). In the interruption processing of the common drawing common control, if the fluctuation display of the common drawing display unit 38a is not being performed and the common electric utility product 34a is not in the common pressure open state, the new fluctuation display cycle of the common drawing display unit 38a is Prohibit start. Thereby, even if the value of the general-purpose-committee release counter C4 is newly acquired in the situation where control of the general-purpose diagram is not executed, the new fluctuation display cycle of the common-diagram display unit 38a triggered by that value The start of is awaited. Further, in the interruption processing of the common drawing common control, when the variable display of the common drawing display unit 38a is being performed, the update of the timer of the main side RAM 65 measuring the fluctuation display period is stopped. Further, in the interruption processing of the common control common control, if the common control utility 34a is in the open state, the common control common utility 34a is put in the closed state and the update of the open time of the common control common utility 34a is stopped. In addition, even if the interruption process of the common view general control is executed, storing of the value of the common control combination release counter C4 in the common holding area 65c with respect to the generation of the game ball entering the second operation port 34 Processing is performed.

  Thereafter, storage processing of display contents of the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a is executed (step S3408). In the storage processing, data indicating the current display content in the special view display unit 37a is stored in the main RAM 65, and data indicating the current display content in the spread map display unit 38a is stored in the main RAM 65. Thereafter, processing for starting check waiting display on the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a is executed (step S3409). In the start process of the check waiting display, the display contents of the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a are displayed contents for notifying that the current state is the check waiting period. In the check waiting period, after receiving an instruction signal for starting check from the hall computer HC, calculation of various parameters using the ball entry history to each ball entering unit 24a, 31 to 34 in response to the reception of the instruction signal It is a waiting period until the notification of the result is started.

  Here, the display contents of the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a will be described.

  First, the special view display unit 37a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60 (a). FIG. 60 (a) is a front view of the special view display portion 37a. The special view display unit 37a is provided with seven display segments 181-187. Each of the display segments 181 to 187 has an individual light source formed of an LED, and it is possible to turn on only any one display segment 181 to 187 by on / off control of the individual light sources. While being able to do, the display segments 181-187 of arbitrary combinations can be lighted. The individual light sources all emit the light of the same color, so the display colors 181 to 187 all display the same color, but the invention is not limited thereto. Different colors may be displayed in each of the display segments 181 to 187, or may be configured to be able to display a plurality of colors in each of the display segments 181 to 187. The first to seventh display segments 181 to 187 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments 181 to 187 are arranged to be a so-called 7-segment display. Thereby, in the special view display unit 37a, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of display such as numbers "1" to "9" and alphabets "H" and "L".

  FIG. 60 (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the special view display unit 37a. When the variable display of the pattern is performed on the special view display unit 37a during the game run, only the second display segment 182 and the fifth display segment 185 are lit in the special view display unit 37a. A series of lighting states are repeated in which only the 1 display segment 181 is lit → the third display segment 183 and the sixth display segment 186 are lit → the seventh display segment 187 is lit. Further, in the special view display unit 37a, only the fourth display segment 184 is turned on as the stop result in the game round of the out result, and "2" or "4" is displayed as the stop result in the game round of the low probability jackpot result Will be lit, and "6" or "9" will be displayed as a stop result in the game round of the low winning high probability jackpot result, "L" or "L" or "L" as a stop result in the game round of the most advantageous jackpot result It will be in the lighting state where H "is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the check waiting period, all the first to seventh display segments 181 to 187 are lit. The display content corresponding to this check waiting period does not match any display content of the situation where the variable display of the pattern is performed on the special view display portion 37a during the execution of the game run, and further the stop result of the game play It does not match any display content that can be displayed as. Thereby, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to clearly grasp whether the current state is the check waiting period or not by visually observing the special view display portion 37a.

  After the end of the check waiting period, notification of the calculation result of various parameters using the ball entry history to the ball entering units 24a and 31 to 34 is executed using the special view display unit 37a. At the time of this notification, the special view display unit 37 a is in a lighting state in which “3”, “5” or “7” is displayed. The display content corresponding to the display period of these check results does not match any display content of the situation where the variable display of the pattern is performed in the special view display portion 37a while the game is being executed, and It does not match any display content that can be displayed as a stop result. Further, the display content corresponding to the display period of the check result does not match the display content corresponding to the check waiting period. Thus, the administrator of the gaming hall can not only clearly determine whether the current state is the check waiting period by visually observing the special view display portion 37a, but also the current state is the display period of the check result It becomes possible to grasp clearly whether it is or not.

  Next, the common view display unit 38a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60 (b). FIG. 60 (b) is a front view of the common view display portion 38a. Seven display segments 191 to 197 are provided in the common view display portion 38a. Each of the display segments 191 to 197 has an individual light source formed of an LED, and it is possible to turn on only any one display segment 191 to 197 by on / off control of the individual light sources. While being able to do, the display segments 191-197 of arbitrary combinations can be lighted. The individual light sources all emit the light of the same color, and therefore, in each of the display segments 191 to 197, the same color is displayed, but the present invention is not limited thereto. A configuration in which different colors are displayed in each of the display segments 191 to 197 may be adopted, or a configuration in which a plurality of colors can be displayed on each of the display segments 191 to 197 may be adopted. The first to seventh display segments 191 to 197 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments 191 to 197 are arranged so as to be a so-called 7-segment display. Thereby, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of display such as numbers “1” to “9” and alphabets “H” and “L” in the common view display unit 38 a.

  FIG. 60 (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the common view display unit 38a. When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the common view display unit 38a, only the second display segment 192 and the fifth display segment 195 are lit in the common view display unit 38a → only the first display segment 191 A series of lighting states are repeated such that only the third display segment 193 and the sixth display segment 196 are on, and only the seventh display segment 197 is on. Further, in the common drawing display unit 38a, only the fourth display segment 194 is turned on as a result of stopping the variable display times which are out results in the common power open lottery, and the variable display in which the win result is obtained in the common electric open lottery "H" is displayed as a result of stopping for each cycle.

  On the other hand, in the check waiting period, all the first to seventh display segments 191 to 197 are lit. The display content corresponding to this check waiting period does not match any display content of the situation where the variable display of the pattern is performed in the common view display portion 38a, and all that can be displayed as a stop result of the variable display cycle It does not match the display content of. Thereby, the administrator of the gaming hall can clearly grasp whether the current state is the check waiting period or not by visually observing the common drawing display portion 38a.

  Further, the display content corresponding to the check waiting period in the common drawing display unit 38a matches the display content corresponding to the check waiting period in the special view display unit 37a. That is, in the check waiting period, the same display contents corresponding thereto are displayed on both the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a. As a result, it becomes easy for the manager of the gaming hall to grasp whether the current state is the check waiting period.

  After the end of the check waiting period, notification of the calculation result of various parameters using the ball entry history to each ball entering section 24a, 31 to 34 is executed using not only the special view display unit 37a but also the common view display unit 38a It will be done. In this case, “2”, “3” or “4” is displayed in the common view display unit 38 a in the notification state. The display content corresponding to the display period of these check results does not match any display content of the situation where the variable display of the pattern is performed in the common view display unit 38a, and further, as the stop result after the variable display of the pattern. It does not match any display content that can be displayed. Further, the display content corresponding to the display period of the check result does not match the display content corresponding to the check waiting period. Thus, the administrator of the gaming hall can not only clearly determine whether the current state is the check waiting period by visually observing the common drawing display portion 38a, but also the current display period of the check result It becomes possible to grasp clearly whether it is or not.

  Returning to the description of the check process (FIG. 59), after the process of step S3409 is executed, the process of setting the check waiting counter is executed (step S3410). In the set process, information corresponding to the check waiting period is set in a check waiting counter provided in the main RAM 65. The check waiting period is specifically set to 5 seconds. In this time, after the game ball is fired from the game ball launch mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 28, the shot game ball is launched to one of the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 of the game area PA. The main CPU 63 is sufficiently longer than the longest time required to be detected by the main CPU 63 that the balls are detected by the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a corresponding to the balls 24a and 31 to 34 that have entered the ball. The time is set. Then, as described above, when an instruction signal to start check has been received from the hall computer HC, the firing of the game ball is prohibited in step S3404. As a result, all the game balls flowing down the game area PA do not exist by the time the check waiting period elapses, and the history of entering the balls 24a and 31 to 34 before the check waiting period elapses Are all acquired.

  Thereafter, the check waiting flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3411). The check waiting flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is a check waiting period. In step S3412, a check start command is transmitted to the sound CPU 163.

  When the sound light side CPU 163 receives the check start command, it makes an affirmative determination in step S2911 of the effect control process (FIG. 53) to set “1” to the end standby flag provided in the sound light side RAM 165 ( Step S2912). The end standby flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side CPU 163 that the end standby state is set, and when the end standby flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step S2901. It becomes. The control contents in the end standby state will be described in detail later. In step S2913, a check display command is transmitted to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the check display command, an image corresponding to being in the end standby state is displayed on the symbol display device 41. The display contents will be described later.

  Returning to the description of the check process (FIG. 59), the check waiting flag in the main RAM 65 is set to “1” in step S3411 to enter a check waiting period. Therefore, an affirmative determination is made in step S3402 to execute check waiting processing (step S3413). FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a process for waiting for check.

  First, the value of the check waiting counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3501). If the value of the check waiting counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S3502: YES), the check waiting flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3503). Thus, the check waiting period ends.

Thereafter, the tabulation process is executed (step S3504). In the tabulation process, the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter are calculated using the various counters 171a to 171e of the normal counter area 171, and the seventh parameter is calculated using the various counters 172a to 172e of the opening / closing execution mode counter area 172. The eighth parameter is calculated, and the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter are calculated using the various counters 173a to 173e of the high-frequency support mode counter area 173. In detail, regarding the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, the values of the out counters 171e, 172e and 173e are K1, the values of the general winning counters 171a, 172a and 173a are K2, and the values of the special pay counter 171b, 172b and 173b. Where K3 is the value of the first operation counters 171c, 172c and 173c is K4, and the values of the second operation counters 171d, 172d and 173d are K5.
· Seventh parameter: (K3 × "number of prize balls for winning in special power winning device 32" + K5 × "number of prize balls for winning in second operation opening 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "general" Number of winning balls for winning in the winning opening 31 + K3 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K 4 × “number of winning balls for winning in the first operation opening 33” + K 5 × “second operation opening 34 Ratio of winning balls to winnings)) 8th parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning on special electric winning device 32” / total payout number of gaming balls (K 2 × for winning in general winning opening 31 Number of prize balls "+ K3 x" Number of prize balls for winning on special electric winning device 32 "+ K4 x" Number of prize balls for winning on first operation port 33 "+ K5 x" Number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34 Is the proportion of

  The seventh parameter and the eighth parameter calculated using the various counters 171a to 171e of the normal counter area 171 are in a state in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and either the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode It becomes the 7th parameter and the 8th parameter in the situation that is not even (hereinafter, also referred to as various parameters at the time of normal). Further, the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter calculated using the various counters 172a to 172e of the opening / closing execution mode counter area 172 are in a state in which the front door frame 14 is in a closed state, and are in an opening / closing execution mode And the eighth parameter (hereinafter, also referred to as various parameters in the open / close execution mode). Further, the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter calculated using the various counters 173a to 173e of the high frequency support mode counter area 173 are in a state in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and are in the high frequency support mode. The seventh parameter and the eighth parameter in a certain situation (hereinafter, also referred to as various parameters in the high frequency support mode).

  In addition, in the tabulation process, the same process as the parameter management process (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is performed using various parameters in the normal state, various parameters in the open / close execution mode, and various parameters in the high frequency support mode. Run against That is, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is assumed that the calculated various parameters are in the first range, and the value of the seventh parameter is 0. If only one of the condition of exceeding 7 and the condition of the value of the eighth parameter exceeding 0.6 is satisfied, it is assumed that the calculated various parameters are in the second range, and the seventh When the parameter value exceeds 0.7 and the eighth parameter value exceeds 0.6, it is determined that the calculated various parameters fall within the third range, the various parameters in the normal state, It executes for each of various parameters in the open / close execution mode and various parameters in the high frequency support mode. Then, the information of the determination result is written to the main RAM 65.

  After the tabulation process of step S3504 is executed, the display start process of the check result is executed (step S3505). In the display start process of the check result, after the display of the display contents of the check waiting period in the special view display unit 37a and the generic view display unit 38a is ended, the display corresponding to the result of the tabulation process in step S3504 is the special view display unit It is made to start at 37a and the common drawing display unit 38a. In this case, the same display is not continued in the display period of the check result in the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a, but the display corresponding to the above determination result for various parameters during normal operation, open / close execution mode The display corresponding to the determination result of the various parameters at the time of the above and the display corresponding to the determination result of the various parameters in the high frequency support mode are sequentially displayed in this order, and the sequential display in this order is repeated. Thus, the display control of the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a is performed.

  Specifically, in the common view display unit 38a, a display corresponding to the above determination result for various parameters in the normal state, a display corresponding to the above determination result for various parameters in the open / close execution mode, and a high frequency support mode Among the displays corresponding to the determination results of the various parameters, a display indicating which is the display target is performed. As described above, the lighting state in which "2", "3" and "4" are displayed is set as the display content corresponding to the display period of the check result in the common view display unit 38a. Among these, when the display corresponding to the above determination result for various parameters at the normal time is to be displayed, "2" is displayed on the spread map display unit 38a, and the above determination results for various parameters in the open / close execution mode "3" is displayed on the general-diagram display unit 38a when the display corresponding to the display target is to be displayed, and the display corresponding to the determination result of various parameters in the high frequency support mode is to be displayed. "4" is displayed on the common view display unit 38a.

  Further, in the special view display unit 37a, display corresponding to the above determination results for each of various parameters in the normal state, various parameters in the open / close execution mode, and various parameters in the high frequency support mode is performed. As described above, the lighting state in which "3", "5" and "7" are displayed is set as the display content corresponding to the display period of the check result in the special view display unit 37a. Among them, when the above determination result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed on the special view display unit 37a, and when the above determination result corresponds to the second range, the special view display unit When "5" is displayed in 37a and the determination result corresponds to the third range, "7" is displayed in the special view display unit 37a.

  When the display period of the check result is started, the display corresponding to the determination result of the various parameters at the normal time is to be displayed, and "2" is displayed at first in the spread map display unit 38a. During the normal target period, the special view display unit 37a displays a display corresponding to the determination result of various parameters at the normal time. That is, when the determination result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed on the special view display unit 37a, and when the determination result corresponds to the second range, the special view display unit When "5" is displayed in 37a and the determination result corresponds to the third range, "7" is displayed in the special view display unit 37a. For example, if the determination result is the first range, "2" is continuously displayed in the common view display unit 38a in the normal target period, and "3" is continuously displayed in the special view display unit 37a. The normal target period is continued for 5 seconds.

  When the normal target period has elapsed, subsequently, since the display corresponding to the determination result of the various parameters in the open / close execution mode is to be displayed, “3” is displayed on the common view display unit 38 a. In the open / close execution mode target period, the special view display unit 37a performs display corresponding to the determination result of various parameters in the open / close execution mode. That is, when the determination result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed on the special view display unit 37a, and when the determination result corresponds to the second range, the special view display unit When "5" is displayed in 37a and the determination result corresponds to the third range, "7" is displayed in the special view display unit 37a. For example, if the determination result is the second range, "3" is continuously displayed on the common view display unit 38a in the open / close execution mode target period, and "5" is continuously displayed on the special view display unit 37a. . The open / close execution mode target period is continued for 5 seconds as in the normal target period.

  When the open / close execution mode target period has elapsed, subsequently, since the display corresponding to the above determination result of various parameters in the high frequency support mode is to be displayed, “4” is displayed on the common view display unit 38 a . In the high frequency support mode target period, the special view display unit 37a displays a display corresponding to the determination result of various parameters in the high frequency support mode. That is, when the determination result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed on the special view display unit 37a, and when the determination result corresponds to the second range, the special view display unit When "5" is displayed in 37a and the determination result corresponds to the third range, "7" is displayed in the special view display unit 37a. For example, if the determination result is the third range, "4" is continuously displayed on the common view display unit 38a in the high frequency support mode target period, and "7" is continuously displayed on the special view display unit 37a. Ru. The high frequency support mode target period is continued for 5 seconds similarly to the normal target period and the switching execution mode target period.

  The display period of the check result is set to a period in which each of the normal target period, the open / close execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period occurs at least once. Specifically, the display period of the check result is set to 30 seconds so that each of the normal target period, the open / close execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period occurs twice. Then, in the display period of the check result, the change of the period from the normal target period → the open / close execution mode target period → the high frequency support mode target period is repeatedly executed.

  After the process of step S3505 is executed in the check waiting process (FIG. 61), information corresponding to the display period of the check result (specifically, 30 sec) is set in the displaying counter provided in the main RAM 65 (specifically, 30 sec) Step S3506). Thereafter, “1” is set to the in-display flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3507). The in-display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is a display period of the check result.

  If "1" is set in the in-display flag of the main RAM 65, an affirmative determination is made in step S2707 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) of the main CPU 63. In this case, the processing of step S2708 to step S2719 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 51) is not executed. For example, even if the game ball enters the ball entering portions 24a and 31 to 34 due to the fact that the ball entering detection process (step S2710) is not executed, it is invalidated. However, as described above, before the display period of the check result is started, since the game ball fired properly is not present in the game area PA, the game ball fired properly is checked In the display period of a result, it does not enter a ball into any of the ball entering parts 24a, 31 to 34. Further, when the special figure special power control process (step S2714) is not executed, all control of the special figure special power is stopped including the acquisition process of the hold information (step S2803). In addition, the control of the general drawing general power control processing (step S2715) is not executed, and all the control of the general drawing general power control is stopped. Further, the payout output process (step S2718) is not executed, and all payout instructions of the gaming ball to the payout side CPU 92 are stopped. However, the payout of the game ball based on the award ball command whose output to the payout side CPU 92 has already been completed is continued by the drive control by the payout side CPU 92.

  In the check process (FIG. 59), the process of displaying the check result is executed by making an affirmative determination in step S3401 by setting “1” to the in-display flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3414). FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the process of displaying the check result.

  First, the value of the counter during display of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3601). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the displayed counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S3602).

  If the value of the displayed counter is not “0” (step S3602: NO), the target period of the normal result, the open / close execution mode target period, or the high frequency support mode target period is one of the display periods of the check results. It is determined whether it is time to finish and switch to the next target period (step S3603). The determination of whether or not it is the switching timing of the target period is performed based on the value of the counter during display. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3603, the display content update process is executed (step S3604). In the updating process, the special view display unit 37a and the general display unit 37a are configured to have display contents corresponding to the next target period among the current target period among the normal target period, the opening / closing execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period. The display control of the figure display unit 38a is performed. In this case, display control is executed so that the display contents corresponding to the target period to be switched to will be displayed for the common view display unit 38a, and the tabulation process (step for waiting for check (FIG. 61) for the special view display unit 37a). The display control is executed so that the display contents of the information of the determination result corresponding to the target period of the current switching destination among the information of the determination result written in the main side RAM 65 in S3504).

  If it is determined in step S3602 that the value of the display counter in the main RAM 65 is "0", display restoration processing of the special view display unit 37a and the general view display unit 38a is executed (step S3605). In the display return process, these special views are displayed so that the display contents of the special view display unit 37a and the general view display unit 38a become the display contents stored in the main RAM 65 in step S3408 of the check process (FIG. 59). The display control of the display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a is performed. As a result, the display contents of the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a return to the display contents immediately before the start of the check waiting period.

  Thereafter, the in-display flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3606). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), and the process returns to step S2708 to step S2719. When the process of step S3606 is executed, the counters 171a to 171e of the normal counter area 171, the counters 172a to 172e of the open / close execution mode counter area 172, and the counters 173a of the high frequency support mode counter area 173. Clear the value of ~ 173 e to "0". As a result, the ball entry history of the ball entry units 24 a and 31 to 34 is initialized, and management of the ball entry history can be newly started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, even if the processing of step S3606 is executed, the counters 171a to 171e of the normal counter area 171, the counters 172a to 172e of the open / close execution mode counter area 172, and high frequency support The values of the counters 173a to 173e in the mode counter area 173 may be maintained as they are. In this case, the entering history of the ball entering units 24a, 31 to 34 is accumulated so as to straddle the execution times of notification of the calculation result using the entering history a plurality of times. Further, in the configuration, the ball entering history of the ball entering units 24a and 31 to 34 is received based on the reception of the history erasing signal from the hall computer HC and the occurrence of the erasing operation using the operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10. May be eliminated.

  Thereafter, processing for resuming game times is executed (step S3607). As a result, when a new start of game times is permitted and the check waiting period is started while the game times are being executed, the progress of the temporarily stopped game times is resumed. Specifically, the display control of the special view display unit 37a corresponding to the game play temporarily suspended is resumed. Further, the updating of the special figure special power timer counter is resumed, and the measurement of the duration of the game is resumed. Further, in the resumption processing of the game play, the state in which the new start of the demonstration display is prohibited is also released. That is, the state in which execution of step S2802 in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52) is prohibited is cancelled.

  Thereafter, restart processing of the open / close execution mode is executed (step S3608). As a result, when the new start of the open / close execution mode is permitted and the check waiting period is started during the execution of the open / close execution mode, the progress of the temporarily stopped open / close execution mode is resumed. Specifically, the update of the special figure special power timer counter is resumed. In addition, when the check waiting period is started while the round game is being executed, the special power prize device 32 is in the open state. In this case, in the resumed round game, the upper limit duration of the open state of the special power winning device 32 is not measured again from the beginning, but the measurement is resumed from the remaining upper limit duration when the round game is temporarily stopped. Do.

  After that, restart processing of the normal power control is executed (step S3609). Thereby, the start of a new variable display cycle of common drawing display portion 38a is permitted, and when the check waiting period is started during execution of common drawing common control, the common drawing common control which has been temporarily stopped is Progress is resumed. Specifically, when the check waiting period is started during the variable display of the common drawing display unit 38a, the display control of the common drawing display unit 38a is resumed, and the measurement of the continuation period of the variable display times is restarted. Be done. Further, when the waiting period for check is started in a state where the commercial item 34a is in the open state, the commercial item 34a is in the open state. In this case, the resumed open state is not measured again from the beginning of the upper limit duration of the open state of the general public utility symbol 34a, but is measured from the remaining upper limit duration when the open state is temporarily stopped. Resume.

  Thereafter, the process of releasing the prohibition of the game ball is executed (step S3610). As a result, in the situation where the gaming balls are stored in the upper tray 55a, the firing operation of the gaming balls is performed on the firing operation device 28, whereby the state where the firing of the gaming balls is executed is restored.

  Next, the progress of the check waiting period and the display period of the check result will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 63 (a) shows the timing of outputting a check start instruction signal from the hall computer HC, FIG. 63 (b) shows the execution period of the game, and FIG. 63 (c) shows the execution period of the open / close execution mode. Fig. 63 (d) shows the execution period of the common view general control, Fig. 63 (e) shows the prohibited period of the game ball firing, Fig. 63 (f) shows the check waiting period, Fig. 63 (g Shows the display period of the check result.

  First, a case will be described in which a check start instruction signal is output during execution of the game times and the general-purpose-general-power control.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (b), the game is being executed, and as shown in FIG. 63 (d), at the timing of t1, which is being executed, the hall is shown in FIG. 63 (a). As a check start instruction signal is output from the computer HC, the game play is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63 (b), and the normal drawing general control is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63 (d). Further, at the timing of the t1, the firing of the gaming ball is prohibited as shown in FIG. 63 (e), and it becomes a check waiting period as shown in FIG. 63 (f). In this case, the display contents of the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a are display contents for notifying that it is a check waiting period.

  Thereafter, at time t2, when the fixed time T1 elapses from the time t1, the check waiting period ends. At the timing of the said t2, the calculation using the management result of the ball entering history to each ball entering part 24a, 31-34 is performed. In this case, after the game ball is fired from the game ball launch mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 28 during the time T1, the shot game sphere is one of the ball entering portions 24a, 31 to 34 from the longest time required for the main CPU 63 to specify that the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a corresponding to the ball entering units 24a and 31 to 34 entered the ball are detected by the main CPU 63 Well set for a long enough time. And, as described above, the firing of the game ball is prohibited at the timing of t1. Therefore, all the game balls flowing down the game area PA do not exist by the time the check waiting period elapses, and the ball entry history to each ball entering part 24a, 31 to 34 becomes the time the check waiting period elapses. It will be in the state of all acquisition.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (g), the display period of the check result is started at the timing of t2. In the display period of the check result, as described above, the normal target period in which the display corresponding to the determination result of various parameters at normal time is executed by the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a, and the open / close execution mode The display corresponding to the judgment result of various parameters at the time of the opening / closing execution mode target period executed by the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a, and the judgment result of various parameters in the high frequency support mode A high frequency support mode target period in which the display to be executed is executed by the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a sequentially occurs.

  After that, when the fixed time T2 has elapsed from the timing t2 at the timing t3, the display period of the check result is ended as shown in FIG. 63 (g). As a result, as shown in FIG. 63 (e), the state in which the game ball is prohibited from being released is released at the timing of t3. In addition, at the timing of the t3, the game time is resumed as shown in FIG. 63 (b), and the normal drawing general control is resumed as shown in FIG. 63 (d).

  Next, a case will be described where a check start instruction signal is output during execution of the switching execution mode and the general control for general purpose.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (c), as shown in FIG. 63 (a), at the timing of t4 during execution of the open / close execution mode as shown in FIG. 63 (c) and during execution of the normal power control as shown in FIG. When the hall computer HC outputs a check start instruction signal, the open / close execution mode is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63 (c) and the normal power control is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63 (d). Ru. Further, at the timing of the t4, the firing of the gaming balls is prohibited as shown in FIG. 63 (e), and it becomes a check waiting period as shown in FIG. 63 (f). In this case, the display contents of the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a are display contents for notifying that it is a check waiting period.

  Thereafter, at time t5, when the fixed time T1 elapses from the time t4, the check waiting period ends. At the timing of the time t5, the calculation using the management result of the ball entry history to each ball entering unit 24a, 31 to 34 is executed. The time of T1 is the same as the time from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (g), the display period of the check result is started at the timing of t5. Thereafter, at time t6, when the fixed time T2 elapses from the time t5, the display period of the check result is ended as shown in FIG. 63 (g). The time T2 is the same as the time from the timing t2 to the timing t3. Further, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 63 (e), the state in which the launch of the gaming ball is prohibited is released. Further, at timing t6, the open / close execution mode is resumed as shown in FIG. 63 (c), and the normal charge general control is resumed as shown in FIG. 63 (d).

  Next, the main processing of the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the main processing, in steps S3701 to S3703 and S3705 to S3714, the same processing as steps S101 to S109 and steps S112 to S115 in the main processing (FIG. 7) in the first embodiment is executed. On the other hand, in the main processing in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S3704 that the check waiting flag or the displaying flag of the main RAM 65 is set to “1”, the RAM of the power / emission control device 78 in step S3705. The process of step S3706 is executed without executing the process of determining whether the erase switch is operated. That is, the operation of the RAM erase switch is invalidated in the check waiting period or the display period of the check result. As a result, when the check waiting period is started and the progress of the game is stopped, the game hall manager misunderstands that the situation is due to the abnormality of the pachinko machine 10, and the main RAM 65 is initialized. The main RAM 65 should not be cleared even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or off while operating the RAM erase switch to execute the clear processing (step S3709) Is possible. In the same manner as the first embodiment, the main RAM 65 is supplied with power for storing data from the power-off unit at power-off / power-off control device 78 even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. Supplied.

  On the other hand, even if "1" is set in the check waiting flag or the displaying flag of the main RAM 65, the processes of steps S3706 to S3708 are executed. That is, even in the check waiting period or the display period of the check result, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" (step S3706: NO), the main RAM 65 is cleared (step S3709). Also when the calculation result of the checksum is abnormal (step S3708: NO), the clear process of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S3709). As a result, when the power failure process is not normally executed or when some abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65, the main RAM 65 clear processing is executed even if it is the check waiting period or the display period of the check result. As a result, the initialization of the main RAM 65 can be performed.

  Next, the contents of execution control of the effect in the check waiting period or the display period of the check result and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  First, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the case where the effect for game circulation is executed will be described. FIG. 65 is a view individually showing the symbols variably displayed by the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 66 is a view showing a display surface of the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a) to FIG. 65 (j), a pattern which is a kind of pattern has nine types of main designs to which numerals "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and a shell-shaped picture pattern It is constituted by the sub pattern which consists of. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers of "1" to "9" to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a), in the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower are set as a plurality of display areas. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols and the sub symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol . In the lower figure pattern row Z3, nine types of main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in the ascending order of the numbers, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are formed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1" The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged in each, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, ten main symbols are arranged and are configured by twenty symbols. Then, in the symbol display device 41, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (b), waiting areas SA1 to SA9 are set in the symbol display device 41 so that three symbols are displayed for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As a result, 3 × 3 are obtained. A total of nine symbols are displayed at the same time. Incidentally, each standby area SA1 to SA9 includes a stop position, and when the symbol is displayed in the final stop state, the symbols waiting in each standby area SA1 to SA9 stop at each stop position Is displayed. Further, in the symbol display device 41, five effective lines are set to connect the three waiting areas SA1 to SA9, that is, the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the right downward line L4, and the right upward line L5 are set. It is done. Then, the variation display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a combination of symbols with the same numeral attached to one of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is finished, the jackpot animation is displayed as the occurrence of the low probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result. In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) corresponds to the "specific symbol", and when the most advantageous jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol The combination is displayed stopped. Also, the main symbol with an even number (2, 4, 6, 8) corresponds to the "non-specific symbol", and when the low probability jackpot result occurs, the same non-specific symbol combination stop display Be done.

  In addition, when it becomes a low winning a prize high probability big hit result, the combination of the predetermined symbol which is not a combination of the same symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  In more detail about the contents of the fluctuation display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, when the effect for the game circulation is started, the high-speed fluctuation display which is a low identification mode causes the symbols of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to be displayed. The variable display is started, and thereafter, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is switched to the low speed variable display which is the high identification mode in a predetermined order and, in the predetermined order, to the waiting area SA1 to SA9 on each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The symbol is displayed on standby. Then, after the symbols are displayed in an oscillating state over the oscillating display period in a state where the symbols are displayed in a standby state in each standby area of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols are displayed still as final stop display And the still display state is continued over the final stop period. In this case, the swing display means that the symbols waiting in the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 swing in the same waiting areas SA1 to SA9, and the respective symbols are in the corresponding waiting areas SA1 to SA9. In the range including the stop position, and further, each symbol swings in the range sandwiching the corresponding stop position. In this way, when the stationary display is performed after the oscillating display is performed, the fluctuation display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 → the oscillating display in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 in the case where the symbols are finally displayed still It becomes possible to make it be stepwise such as a still display, and to make it easy for the player to recognize that the symbol is finally displayed still.

  When the display control device 82 receives a variation pattern command from the sound side CPU 163, it reads a data table corresponding to the variation pattern command from a ROM (not shown) provided in the display control device 82, and displays the symbol display device according to the data table. Execute 41 display control. In this case, this data table corresponds to the continuation period of the current game run, and by executing display control of the symbol display device 41 according to the data table, high speed fluctuation display → low speed fluctuation in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Display → standby display → still display will be performed. That is, the control timing for switching from the high speed fluctuation display to the low speed fluctuation display, the switching timing from the low speed fluctuation display to the standby display, the switching timing from the standby display to the stationary display, and the command for recognizing the termination timing of the stationary display It is not sent to the device 82. This makes it possible to reduce the number of commands transmitted from the sound light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82. Further, when the stationary display is started in the symbol display device 41, the final stop display of the pattern corresponding to the lottery result of the current game is started also in the special view display unit 37a, but this final stop display The main CPU 63 does not transmit the corresponding command to the sound CPU 163 at the start of. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound CPU 163 can be reduced.

  It should be noted that in a situation where the standby display is performed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 and the low speed fluctuation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2, it differs from the symbols variably displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 A reach effect using a character image may be executed. Since the start timing and the end timing of the reach effect are also determined in the data table, there is no need to transmit a command from the sound light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82 at the start and end of the reach effect.

  In the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), a hold display area Ga is set at the lower center. The hold display area Ga is divided and displayed such that unit hold display areas Ga1, Ga2, Ga3 and Ga4 having the same number as the maximum number of hold information stored in the hold area RE are arranged in the horizontal direction. There is. Specifically, the maximum number of the hold information is four, and the first unit hold display area Ga1, the second unit hold display area Ga2, and the third unit hold display area correspond to this in the hold display area Ga. Ga3 and a fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set. When the number of the hold information stored in the hold area RE is one, the predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, and the hold information stored in the hold area RE When the number of is two, a predetermined image for suspension is displayed only in the first unit suspension display area Ga1 and the second unit suspension display area Ga2, and the number of suspension information stored in the suspension area RE is In the case of three, predetermined images for suspension are displayed only in the first unit suspension display area Ga1, the second unit suspension display area Ga2, and the third unit suspension display area Ga3, and are stored in the area RE for suspension When the number of the hold information is four, a predetermined hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area Ga1 to the fourth unit hold display area Ga4. The number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 in which a predetermined hold image is displayed by transmitting a command corresponding to the acquisition command from the sound light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82 when the hold information is acquired Will increase. In addition, when a new game is started, a command corresponding to the shift command is transmitted from the sound light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82, whereby a unit hold display area Ga1 in which a predetermined hold image is displayed The number of ~ Ga4 decreases.

  Next, the contents of execution control of the effect in the check waiting period or the display period of the check result will be described.

  As described above, when the check waiting period is started, the main CPU 63 transmits a check start command to the sound side CPU 163 in step S3412 of the check process (FIG. 59). Then, when the sound light side CPU 163 receives the check start command, the sound light side CPU 163 sets “1” to the end standby flag of the sound side RAM 165 in step S2912 of the effect control process (FIG. 53) to set the end standby state. . In step S2913, a check display command is transmitted to the display control device 82.

  When the display control device 82 receives the check display command, the symbol display device 41 displays a notification image Gr indicating that it is a check waiting period or a display period of the check result. 67 (a) and 67 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the check waiting period or the display period of the check result. As shown in FIG. 67 (a) and FIG. 67 (b), a notification image "Checking" is displayed at the lower left corner and the lower right corner of the symbol display device 41. As a result, the player focusing on the symbol display device 41 can confirm that the current state is the check waiting period or the display period of the check result by confirming the notification image Gr. FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b) show the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the situation where the effects for the game are being executed, but in the open / close execution mode and during the demonstration effect In the check waiting period or the display period of the check result, the notification image Gr is displayed on the symbol display device 41. In this way, not only the situation in which the effects for the game run are being executed, but also the notification that it is the check waiting period or the display period of the check result even if the opening / closing execution mode is being executed and the demonstration effect is being executed. It becomes possible to do with the display device 41. The content of the notification image Gr is arbitrary. For example, the notification may be performed by dimming the entire symbol display device 41.

  When the display control device 82 receives the check display command, the display control device 82 executes not only the process for displaying the notification image Gr in the symbol display device 41 but also the process for continuing the execution of the display effect. Specifically, when a check display command is received in a situation where a demonstration effect is being executed, display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so as to repeat a series of moving image display for demonstration effect.

  When a command for check display is received during execution of a game circulation effect and before the start of the final stop period in the game circulation effect, the timing at which the swing display is started in the current game circulation effect is Until it is started, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed according to the contents of the data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command received from the sound light side CPU 163 at the start of the presentation for this game run. Even when it is time to start still display in the data table, the swing display is continued.

  67A and 67B, the manner in which the game display effect is executed in the symbol display device 41 in the check waiting period or the display period of the check result will be described. As shown in FIG. 67 (a), in the situation where the symbol variation display is performed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the display region in which the symbol variation display is performed and the position not overlapping the reserved display region Ga The notification image Gr indicating that it is the check waiting period or the display period of the check result is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), swing display of symbols is performed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, the symbols waiting in the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 are displayed in the same waiting areas SA1 to SA9 so as to swing in the vertical direction different from the lateral direction which is the fluctuation direction of the symbols. Then, this rocking display is continued even when the original still display starts.

  When the check display command is received in the final stop period of the game effect, the symbol display device 41 is controlled to be displayed so as to continue the symbol stationary display. When a check display command is received in the opening period of the open / close execution mode, the symbol display device 41 is controlled to repeat a series of moving image display of the opening period. When the check display command is received in the open / close period in which the special power winning device 32 is repeatedly opened and closed in the open / close execution mode, display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed to repeat a series of moving image display in the open / close period. When a check display command is received in the ending period of the open / close execution mode, the symbol display device 41 is controlled to repeat a series of operation display of the ending period.

  When the sound-side CPU 163 enters an end standby state, the sound-light CPU 163 makes an affirmative determination in step S2901 of the effect control process (FIG. 53). In this case, it is determined in step S2915 whether or not any effect command has been received from the main CPU 63. The rendering command is a command transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound-side CPU 163 to designate a trigger for starting the rendering, and specifically corresponds to a demonstration start command, a variation command, an opening command, and an ending command.

  If one of the effect commands has been received (step S2915: YES), the end waiting flag of the sound light side RAM 165 is cleared to "0" (step S2916). Thus, the end waiting state is released. Thereafter, various effect determination processing at the time of termination standby cancellation is executed (step S2917). In the various effect determination process at the time of end standby release, if the command received this time is a demonstration start command, the effect determination process for a demonstration in step S2903 is executed, and if the command received this time is a change command, the game in step S2906 The effect determination process for the occasion is executed, and if the command received this time is the opening command, the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode in step S2909 is executed, and if the command received this time is the ending command, the effect corresponding to it is determined Execute the process

  Thereafter, in the case where the end standby state which has ended this time occurs during the execution of the effect for the game round, and the standby display is performed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 (step S2918: YES And final stop processing is executed (step S2919). Note that when the sound-side CPU 163 performs execution control of effects for game circulation, the data table is read from the sound-side ROM 164 to the sound-side RAM 165 as described above, but this data table does not enter an end standby state. Data indicating the timing at which the standby display is started in the execution period of the effect for the game circulation in the case where the game is performed is set.

  In the final stopping process, before the effect determined in step S2917, the effect contents are adjusted so that the symbol is displayed still over the final stopping period (for example, 0.5 sec) in the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the data table for the final stop period is read out as a data table for controlling the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, and after control based on the data table for the final stop period is executed, step S2917 The control based on the data table corresponding to the contents of the effect determined at step S. is executed.

  Thereafter, command transmission processing at the time of termination standby cancellation is executed (step S2920). In the command transmission process, a demonstration start command is transmitted to the display control device 82 if the present situation is to start the demonstration effect, and it is determined if the present situation is to start the presentation for the game cycle The variation pattern command corresponding to the content of the rendered effect is transmitted to the display control device 82, and if the current time is a condition to start the open / close execution mode, the open command is transmitted to the display control device 82, and the current execution is open / close execution If the mode ending period should be started, an ending command is sent to the display control unit 82.

  If the display control device 82 is not in a state of continuing the swing display of the symbol as the effect for game use, the execution control of the display effect in the symbol display device 41 as already described for the reception of each command. I do. On the other hand, when the display control device 82 receives each of the above-mentioned commands in a situation where the swing display of the symbol is continued as an effect for game use (specifically, the demo start command, the change command or the opening command is received) In the case where the symbols are displayed in a rocking manner, after displaying each symbol stationary for a final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec), a display effect corresponding to the received command is started. In this case, if the display effect to be executed after the final stop period is a display effect of which the execution period is determined such as the effect for the game circulation and the effect for the opening period, the final stop period is generated first. And shorten the execution period of the display effect to be executed thereafter by the final stop period.

  Specifically, if the display effect to be executed after the final stop period is an effect for game use, the period during which high-speed variation display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is shortened by the final stop period. As a result, it is possible to generate a final stop period before the start of a new game-related effect, while suppressing the appearance of the game-related effect.

  Further, if the display effect to be executed after the final stop period is the effect of the opening period, the timing for starting the effect of the opening period is delayed by the final stop period. In the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the effect of the opening / closing period is started as it is after the effect of the opening period is ended, but in the effect of the opening / closing period, a series of moving image display is repeated. Therefore, even if the end timing of the presentation in the opening period is interrupted until after the start of the opening and closing period, the appearance of the presentation for the opening and closing execution mode has little influence.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When a ball is entered into the ball entering portion 24a, 31 to 34 as a predetermined event, the values of the corresponding counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, 173a to 173e are incremented by one, and the information of the ball entry history is The various counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, and 173a to 173e are stored. Then, a predetermined parameter is derived as an operation result by performing an operation using information stored in the various counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, 173a to 173e, and information of the derived operation result Is notified. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the ball entry history of the gaming balls to the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34. Further, by storing and holding the ball entry history information in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized alteration to the ball entry history information. In this case, in the situation where various parameters are derived using the information on the ball entry history, the progress of the game is limited. As a result, various parameters can be derived in a situation different from the situation in which a normal game is played. Therefore, it is not necessary to parallel the progress of the normal game and the derivation of various parameters, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In the situation where various parameters are derived, the progress of the game is restricted by restricting the execution of at least a part of the processes for advancing the game. This makes it possible to prevent the number of processes per unit time from extremely increasing in a situation where various parameters are derived.

  When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, the calculation is performed after the launch of the gaming ball is prohibited. Thereby, it becomes possible to calculate various parameters in the situation where entering of the game ball to the ball entering parts 24a, 31 to 34 which is a trigger for changing various parameters is restricted.

  When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, until the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 enters the ball entry sections 24a and 31 to 34 after the launch of the game ball is limited. Various parameters are calculated after a period longer than the longest period assumed as the period required for. As a result, it becomes possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where the game ball does not reliably enter the ball entering parts 24a, 31 to 34, which is a trigger for changing various parameters.

  In the situation where information setting is performed to indicate that the various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history and the result of the calculation is notified (that is, the check waiting flag of the main RAM 65 or the displaying flag is “1”) Even if the power on / off operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the RAM erase switch is turned ON, the clearing process (step S3709) of the main RAM 65 is blocked. As a result, when progress of the game is restricted in a situation where various parameters are calculated, the main RAM 65 is cleared even if the clear operation is performed in an attempt to cancel the restricted situation. It is possible to prevent processing from being performed.

  Even when the execution of the clear process of the main side RAM 65 for the clear operation is blocked as described above, the main process (FIG. 64) is executed in the situation where the power failure flag is not set to "1". When the checksum error occurs, the main RAM 65 is cleared. As a result, even if the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where various parameters are calculated, it is possible to leave room for the clear process of the main RAM 65 to be executed.

  The state in which the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history is canceled when the display period of the predetermined check result elapses. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that the progress of the game is left in a restricted state.

  Even if the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, the execution of the effect in the symbol display device 41 is continued. This makes it possible to prevent the termination of the effect immediately even if the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of an opportunity to calculate various parameters while the player is playing the game. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused when a restriction on the progress of the game occurs.

  In the situation where the game display effect is being executed by the symbol display device 41, when the opportunity to calculate various parameters is generated and the progress of the game is restricted, it becomes the trigger to end the effect of the game circulation originally. Even if the continuation period of the game times has passed, the control for ending the effect of the game times is not executed. Thereby, in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to make the effects for the game circulation continued, and even in the situation where the various parameters are derived, the effect is restricted even in the game progress It is possible to make the player think that the execution of is continued.

  In the situation where the effects of the game circulation are continued in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to calculate various parameters, the command for starting new effects such as the change command, the opening command and the demonstration start command is It is canceled when transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound CPU 163. As a result, it is possible to release the state without transmitting a dedicated command for releasing the state in which the effects for the game run are continued from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163.

  In the case of continuing the effects for the game cycle in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to calculate various parameters, the standby display of the previous stage at which the symbol is stopped is continued when the effect for the game cycle is ended. Be done. As a result, it is possible to continue the effects of the game circulation in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while making it possible for the player to recognize the stop result of the symbol. Further, when the restriction on the progress of the game is released and the effect for the game cycle is ended, it is only necessary to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction on the progress of the game is canceled. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly and quickly finish the effects of the game circulation for the restriction release of the progress of the game.

  In the case where the effects of the game circulation are continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to calculate various parameters, the corresponding notification is also executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused with the fact that the effects for the game circulation continue longer than expected.

  Notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters calculated using the ball entry history are displayed on the special view display unit 37a where the variable view of the special view is executed and the general view display unit 38a where the variable view of the general view is executed. Is executed. As a result, the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a can be used together as a display unit for performing the notification, and the configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which a dedicated display unit is provided. It becomes.

  When notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is executed using the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a, the display of the special view in the special view display unit 37a and the display of the common view in the common view display unit 38a Is suspended. As a result, it is possible to make the notification contents in the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a clear.

  When notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is completed using the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a, the notification of the display contents of the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a is started. The display contents just before the This makes it possible to resume the display of the special view in the special view display unit 37a and the display of the common view in the common view display unit 38a after the end of the notification corresponding to the contents of the various parameters.

  When notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is executed using the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a, regarding the special view display unit 37a, the display mode used for displaying the special view is the various parameters described above. The common mode display unit 38a does not use the display mode used when displaying the common view as the display mode of the notification corresponding to the contents of the various parameters. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the administrator of the game hall clearly grasp that the notification corresponding to the contents of the various parameters is executed using the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a.

  When notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is executed using the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a, the contents of different types of notification targets are sequentially switched and displayed. Thereby, it becomes possible to display the contents of different types of notification targets using the same display units 37a and 38a.

<Another form of the thirteenth embodiment>
-In the case where various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history to the ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34, the configuration is such that the firing of the game ball is prohibited, but it is not limited to this. It may be configured not to prohibit the launch of In this case, even if firing of the gaming ball is continued by configuring various parameters to be calculated using information on the ball entry history at that time when an instruction signal to start check is received. It becomes possible to calculate various parameters without being affected by it.

  · The device that performs notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters calculated using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34 is limited to the configurations that the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a Instead, the display light emitting unit 53 provided in the front door frame 14 may be shared, or a dedicated display unit may be provided. By performing the above notification using the display light emitting unit 53 provided in the front door frame 14, it is possible to easily confirm the notification content. Also, by executing the above notification using a dedicated display unit, the device on which the above notification is performed becomes clear to the game hall manager.

  Further, in the configuration in which the above notification is performed using a dedicated display unit, when a trigger such as reception of a check start instruction signal occurs, the ball entry history to the ball entering unit 24a or 31 to 34 is used. Then, various parameters may be calculated, the notification content of the calculation result may be updated, and the notification by the updated notification content may be continued until the next update is performed. Thus, by confirming the dedicated display unit at an arbitrary timing, it becomes possible to grasp the notification content corresponding to the immediately preceding calculation result. Alternatively, the dedicated display unit may be configured to be positioned so that the display surface can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52, and provided in the substrate box of the main control device 60 The configuration may be

  The opportunity for execution of calculation using the history of entering the ball into the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is not limited to receiving a check start instruction signal from the hole computer HC of the game hall, for example, The configuration may be such that the trigger is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed, and the configuration is such that the trigger is generated each time the total period of the period during which the game ball is being fired becomes a predetermined period. Alternatively, the trigger may be generated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, and the trigger may be generated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Alternatively, the trigger may occur when the demonstration effect continues for a predetermined period or more, and the trigger occurs when a predetermined operation unit provided on the pachinko machine 10 is operated. May be configured, the opportunity may be configured to occur when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a state where a predetermined operation section is operated.

  In the above embodiment, when the calculation using the history of entering the ball into the ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 is executed, the payout of the game ball is not stopped in the above embodiment, but instead, the payout of the game ball is also issued. It may be configured to be stopped.

  ・ Even when calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is executed, effects such as effects for game circulation, effects for opening / closing execution mode, demonstration effects, etc. are displayed as light emission units 53 Although the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41 are configured to be continued as they are, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect may be temporarily interrupted. In this case, when the notification of the calculation result is ended, the effect is resumed from the state of being temporarily interrupted.

  In the configuration in which the operation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24 a and 31 to 34 and the notification of the operation result are performed in a control unit different from the main CPU 63 as in the first embodiment and the like The supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 may be stopped in a situation where the calculation and notification of the calculation result are executed. Even in this case, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in a situation where the above-mentioned calculation and notification of the calculation result are executed.

  -Even if the main CPU 63 is equipped with an RTC and the date and time measured by the RTC is outside the business hours of the game hall, even if the game ball enters the ball entering portion 24a, 31 to 34. It may be configured not to be reflected in the ball entry history. In this case, for example, even if it is intended to intentionally set the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 outside the business hours of the game hall, it becomes possible to make it impossible.

  The configuration may be such that even if the ball entry of the game ball to the ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 occurs under the situation where the game ball is not fired, it is not reflected in the ball entry history. In this case, when an action to clean the gaming ball is performed on the ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34, it is possible to prevent it from being reflected in the ball entry history.

  -Although the configuration is such that the progress of the game is limited before the calculation using the history of entering the ball into the ball entering units 24a and 31 to 34 is started, these may be simultaneously generated, and the calculation is executed The progress of the game may be restricted at the timing when the calculation result is notified after that without restricting the progress of the game.

  -The state in which the progress of the game is restricted along with the execution of the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry part 24a, 31-34 is canceled by a factor different from the lapse of the display period of the check result The configuration may be For example, it may be configured to be released when an instruction signal to end the check is received from the hole computer HC of the game hall, or may be released by operating the operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  -When the execution trigger of the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entering part 24a, 31-34 occurs in the situation where the effect for game circulation is executed with the symbol display device 41, the game round in the middle of the execution The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the effect for standby is in the state of standby display. For example, the configuration may be such that the start of the effect for the next game round is waited after the completion of the stationary display.

  -When the execution of the operation using the ball entry history to the ball entering portion 24a, 31 to 34 occurs in the situation where the effect for the opening and closing execution mode is being executed by the symbol display device 41, the opening and closing in the middle of the execution The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the presentation for the execution mode is continued, and may be temporarily interrupted at that time.

  -In the configuration in which the progress of the game is restricted when it is detected that an illegal action has occurred, the configuration in which the execution of the effect is continued even in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted Good. In addition, in the configuration in which the progress of the game is limited when the state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a predetermined state, the configuration in which the execution of the effect is continued even under a situation where the progress of the game is limited You may

  -In the configuration in which the final stop command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163 at the end of the effect for game use, the state in which the standby display is continued on the symbol display device 41 is that the final stop command is the main side It may be configured to be canceled based on transmission from the CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163. Even in this case, it is not necessary to transmit a dedicated command for canceling the state in which the standby display is continued by the symbol display device 41 from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163.

  The values of various parameters calculated as a result of using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34 may be notified as it is. This allows the game hall manager to grasp various parameters in detail.

  · A pattern display device in addition to or instead of the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a as a result calculated using the history of entering the ball into the ball entering units 24a and 31 to 34 or information corresponding thereto 41 may be displayed. Thereby, the manager of the gaming hall can easily grasp the above calculation result.

Fourteenth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, an aspect from the reception of the check start instruction signal to the start of the check waiting period is different from that of the thirteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing check processing in the present embodiment.

  If neither the display period of the check result nor the check waiting period is set (steps S3801 and S3802: NO), it is determined whether the termination trigger wait flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to “1” ( Step S3803). The end trigger wait flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the start of the check waiting period is on standby after receiving the check start instruction signal.

  If "1" is not set in the termination trigger waiting flag (step S3803: NO), the game is currently being played on the condition that a check start instruction signal has been received from the hall computer HC (step S3804: YES) It is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode or the normal power control is being executed (step S3805). If the game is currently being executed, is in the open / close execution mode, or is being executed during the general-purpose program control (step S3805: YES), the end trigger wait flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1". (Step S3806). As a result, it becomes a termination trigger waiting period for waiting for the start of the check waiting period. On the other hand, if the game is currently being executed, the opening / closing execution mode, or the normal power control is not being executed (step S3805: NO), the processing of step S3809 to step S3814 is executed. Further, when the termination trigger wait flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" and it is the termination trigger wait period (step S3803: YES), the game is currently being executed, the open / close execution mode, and Under the condition that the power control is not being executed at all (step S3807: NO), after clearing the termination trigger waiting flag of the main RAM 65 to "0" and ending the termination trigger waiting period (step S3808), the step The processing of S3809 to step S3814 is executed.

  In detail, the process of step S3809 to step S3814 executes the game ball launch prohibition process (step S3809) in the same manner as step S3404 of the process for check (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment. Thereafter, storage processing of the display contents of the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a is executed (step S3810) in the same manner as step S3408 of the check process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment. Similar to step S3409 of the check process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment, start processing of check waiting display of the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a is executed (step S3811). Further, the process for setting the check waiting counter is executed (step S3812) as in step S3410 of the check process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment, and the check process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment. Similarly to step S3411 of step 59), "1" is set in the check waiting flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3813), and the check is started similarly to step S3412 of the processing for check (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment. The command is transmitted to the sound side CPU 163 (step S3814). This starts the check waiting period.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when an instruction signal to start check is received during execution of the game run, during the opening / closing execution mode, or during execution of the computer program control, the start of the check waiting period is waited, and During execution, in open / close execution mode, and when it is not in execution of the general view general control, the check waiting period is started. As a result, since there is no need to interrupt these situations and execute processing to restore them later, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity and the processing load. In addition, since it is not necessary to interrupt each situation as described above, in the present embodiment, when the check waiting period is started, the processing for interrupting the game time as in the thirteenth embodiment (step S3405), interruption of the open / close execution mode The process (step S3406) and the interruption process of the general drawing general control are not executed (step S3407).

  If "1" is set in the check waiting flag of the main RAM 65 and it becomes a check waiting period, an affirmative determination is made in step S3802 of the check process, and the check waiting process is executed in step S3815. The processing content of the check waiting process is the same as the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. When the check waiting process is executed and the check waiting period is switched to the display period of the check result, an affirmative determination is made in step S3801 of the check processing, and the process of displaying the check result in step S3816 is performed. Run.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the process of displaying the check result.

  In the process of displaying the check result, first, the value of the displaying counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the display counter after the one subtraction is “0” (step S3902).

  If the value of the displayed counter is not “0” (step S 3902: NO), the target period of the normal result, the open / close execution mode target period, or the high frequency support mode target period is one of the target periods of the check result display period. It is determined whether it is time to finish and switch to the next target period (step S3903). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3903, the display content update process is executed (step S3904). In the updating process, the special view display unit 37a and the general display unit 37a are configured to have display contents corresponding to the next target period among the current target period among the normal target period, the opening / closing execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period. The display control of the figure display unit 38a is performed. The processing contents of these steps S3903 and S3904 are the same as the processing contents of steps S3603 and S3604 of the processing (FIG. 62) of displaying the check results in the thirteenth embodiment.

  If it is determined in step S3902 that the value of the displaying counter of the main RAM 65 is "0", the special view is displayed as in step S3605 of the process of displaying the check result in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 62). The display restoration process of the unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a is executed (step S3905). Thereafter, the in-display flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3906). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), and the process returns to step S2708 to step S2719. After that, as in step S3610 of the process (FIG. 62) of displaying the check result in the thirteenth embodiment, the process of releasing the prohibition of the game ball is executed (step S3907).

  Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 70, the progress of the end trigger waiting period, the check waiting period, and the display period of the check result will be described. FIG. 70 (a) shows the timing of outputting a check start instruction signal from the hall computer HC, FIG. 70 (b) shows the execution period of the game, and FIG. 70 (c) shows the execution period of the common control 70 (d) shows the prohibited period of the game ball firing, FIG. 70 (e) shows the end trigger waiting period, FIG. 70 (f) shows the check waiting period, and FIG. 70 (g) shows it. Indicates the display period of the check result.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (b), at time t1 during which the game is being executed, an instruction signal for starting check is outputted from the hole computer HC as shown in FIG. 70 (a). In this case, the game play is continued without interruption at the timing of t1. Further, as shown in FIG. 70 (e), the end trigger waiting period is set at the timing of t1.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), at the timing of t2 during which the game is being executed, the computer control routine is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the gaming round ends at the timing of t3 during execution of the universal drawing universal control. However, the termination trigger waiting period is continued because the routine control is still being executed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the normal drawing general control ends at the timing of t4. As a result, the game is being executed, the open / close execution mode, and the general-purpose power control is not being executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 70 (e) and FIG. 70 (f), the end trigger waiting period is shifted to the check waiting period at the timing of t4. In this case, the display contents of the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a are display contents for notifying that it is a check waiting period. In addition, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), the firing of the game balls is prohibited at the timing of t4.

  Thereafter, at time t5, when the fixed time T1 elapses from the time t4, the check waiting period ends. At the timing of the time t5, calculation of various parameters using the ball entry history to each ball entering unit 24a, 31 to 34 is executed. In this case, after the game ball is fired from the game ball launch mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 28 during the time T1, the shot game sphere is one of the ball entering portions 24a, 31 to 34 from the longest time required for the main CPU 63 to specify that the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a corresponding to the ball entering units 24a and 31 to 34 entered the ball are detected by the main CPU 63 Well set for a long enough time. And, as already described, the firing of the game ball is prohibited at the timing of t4. Therefore, all the game balls flowing down the game area PA do not exist by the time the check waiting period elapses, and the ball entry history to each ball entering part 24a, 31 to 34 becomes the time the check waiting period elapses. It will be in the state of all acquisition.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (g), the display period of the check result is started at the timing of t5. In the display period of the check result, as described above, the normal target period in which the display corresponding to the determination result of various parameters at normal time is executed by the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a, and the open / close execution mode The display corresponding to the judgment result of various parameters at the time of the opening / closing execution mode target period executed by the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a, and the judgment result of various parameters in the high frequency support mode A high frequency support mode target period in which the display to be executed is executed by the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a sequentially occurs.

  Thereafter, at time t6, when the fixed time T2 elapses from the time t5, the display period of the check result is ended as shown in FIG. 70 (g). As a result, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), the state in which the game ball is prohibited from being released is released at the timing of t6.

  According to the present embodiment described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is performing specific operations such as game times, opening / closing execution mode and potting control, the calculation opportunity of various parameters using the ball entry history is Even if it occurs, the progress of the game is not restricted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the gaming machine, the open / close execution mode, and the general-purpose power control by the occurrence of the operation trigger of various parameters.

  When the calculation trigger of various parameters occurs in a situation where one of the game times, the opening / closing execution mode and the general control is performed in the pachinko machine 10, the specific operation to be executed is ended. The progress of the game is restricted later. As a result, it is possible to derive various parameters in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted with respect to the occurrence of the calculation trigger of various parameters while preventing the execution of the specific operation.

  In the situation where the game is being played, the progress of the game is not restricted even if the calculation opportunity of various parameters occurs. As a result, it is possible to calculate various parameters under a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, while not interrupting the game play.

  In the situation where the open / close execution mode is being performed, the progress of the game is not restricted even if the calculation trigger of various parameters occurs. As a result, it is possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, while not interrupting the open / close execution mode.

  In the open / close execution mode, when the special power winning device 32 is open, the execution of the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entering portion 24a, 31 to 34 and the restriction of the progress of the game are waited, and the open / close execution is performed. Even in the mode, when the special electric power winning device 32 is closed, the execution of the calculation using the ball entering history to the ball entering unit 24a, 31 to 34 and the restriction of the progress of the game may not be kept waiting .

The fifteenth embodiment
In this embodiment, management of the ball entering history to each ball entering unit 24a, 31 to 34, calculation using the management result, and notification of the calculation result are executed not by the main CPU 63 but by the sound side CPU 163 This point is different from the thirteenth embodiment in the points. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of the input port 201 provided in the MPU 162 of the audio light emission control device 81. The MPU 162 is provided with an input port for receiving a command from the main CPU 63 separately from the input port 201.

  The input port 201 is provided with a plurality of buffers 202 a to 202 g. Specifically, first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g through the signal paths 203a to 203g, and each of the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g is an input target signal When the signal is LOW, information "0" is stored as the first data, and when the signal to be input is HI, information "1" is stored as the second data. The relationship between the LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

  A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 202a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a first signal of LOW level in a situation where a new gaming ball is not detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one game is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a When the ball is detected, the first signal of HI level is output over a specific period. The specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the first signal of HI level is input to the first buffer 202a.

  A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 202b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is performed by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a When the ball is detected, the second signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the second signal of HI level is input to the second buffer 202b.

  A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 202c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a third signal of LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and one game is generated by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. When a ball is detected, a third signal of HI level is output over a specific period. The specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the third signal of HI level is input to the third buffer 202c.

  A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 202d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal of the LOW level in a state where a new game ball is not detected by the special power detection sensor 45a, and one special game ball is detected by the special power detection sensor 45a. The fourth signal of HI level is output over a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the fourth signal of the HI level is input to the fourth buffer 202 d.

  A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 202e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fifth signal of the LOW level in a state where a new gaming ball is not detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a, and one game is performed by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a. When the ball is detected, the fifth signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the fifth signal of HI level is input to the fifth buffer 202 e.

  A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 202f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the sixth signal of the LOW level in a state where a new game ball is not detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a, and one game is performed by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. When a ball is detected, a sixth signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the sixth signal of the HI level is input to the sixth buffer 202 f.

  A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 202g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the seventh signal of the LOW level in a state where a new gaming ball is not detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a, and one gaming ball is detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a. In this case, the seventh signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the seventh signal of the HI level is input to the seventh buffer 202 g.

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of the correspondence relationship area 204 provided in the sound light side ROM 164. As shown in FIG. The correspondence areas 204 correspond to the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g provided in the input port 201 of the MPU 162 of the audio light emission control device 81 on a one-to-one basis, and correspond to the first to seventh correspondence areas 204a to 204a. 204g is provided.

  In the first correspondence area 204a, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is the information for specifying the type of signal input to the first buffer 202a by the sound light side CPU 163 is the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 Are stored in advance. In addition, information indicating the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 as well as information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is in the first correspondence relationship area 204a is also (10) It is stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In the second correspondence relationship area 204b, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is present as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 202b by the sound light side CPU 163 is the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 Are stored in advance. In addition, information (10 pieces) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31 as well as information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 in the second correspondence relationship area 204b. It is stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In the third correspondence area 204c, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is present as information for specifying the type of signal input to the third buffer 202c by the sound light side CPU 163 is the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 Are stored in advance. In addition, information (10 pieces) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31 as well as information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 in the third correspondence relationship area 204c. It is stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the fourth correspondence relationship area 204 d, information indicating that the special power winning device 32 is the information for specifying the type of the signal input to the fourth buffer 202 d by the sound light side CPU 163 is the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 Are stored in advance. In addition, information (15 pieces) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special power winning device 32 as well as information indicating that it is the special power winning device 32 in the fourth correspondence relationship area 204d. It is stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In the fifth correspondence area 204e, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 202e by the sound light side CPU 163, information indicating that it is the first operation port 33 is the shipment of the pachinko machine 10 It is stored in advance at the stage. In addition, information indicating the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the first operation opening 33, together with information indicating that the first operation opening 33 is in the fifth correspondence area 204e (one unit ) Is also stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In the sixth correspondence area 204f, the information indicating that the second operation port 34 is the information for specifying the type of the signal input to the sixth buffer 202f by the sound light side CPU 163 is shipment of the pachinko machine 10 It is stored in advance at the stage. In addition, information indicating the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the second operation opening 34 together with information indicating that it is the second operation opening 34 in the sixth correspondence relationship area 204 f (one piece ) Is also stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In the seventh correspondence area 204 g, information indicating that the out port 24 a is used as information for specifying the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 202 g by the management CPU 112 at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 in advance. It is stored.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the check process (step S2706) is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51). However, the check process is not executed in the present embodiment. In addition to determining whether or not the game is suspended at step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) incidentally, it is determined whether or not it is a display period of the check result. However, in the present embodiment, although the determination as to whether or not the game is stopped is performed, the determination as to whether or not it is the display period of the check result is not performed. Further, in the ball entering detection process in step S 2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), the same process as the ball entering detection process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), the management output process is executed as the process following the external information setting process of step S2719.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU 63.

  First, "7" is set in the management target counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S4001). The management target counter identifies with the main CPU 63 that there is a management target for which the identification of whether or not the signal output state to the sound light side CPU 163 should be changed in the present management output processing has not been performed yet At the same time, the main CPU 63 is a counter for specifying which of the management targets the signal output state to the sound light side CPU 163 should be changed. The target to be identified by the main CPU 63 as to whether or not the signal output state to the sound light side CPU 163 should be changed in one management output process is the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. It is. Therefore, first, "7" is set to the management target counter.

  After that, it is determined whether the output state of the signal to the sound light side CPU 163 for the management target corresponding to the value of the current management target counter is HI level (step S4002). If it is not the HI level (step S4002: NO), it is determined whether "1" is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the management object counter (step S4003). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is "7" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether the first output flag is "1" or not. When the value of the management target counter is "6" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether "1" is set to the second output flag, and the value of the management target counter If the value is "5" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether the third output flag is "1" or not, and the value of the management target counter is "4" If there is a special power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the fourth output flag is set to "1", and the value of the management target counter is "3" and the first operation port detection sensor 46a If it corresponds to the fifth output flag, "1" is set. If the value of the control target counter is "2" and corresponds to the second operation port detection sensor 47a, "1" is set in the sixth output flag. If the value of the management target counter is “1” and corresponds to the out port 24 a, it is determined whether “1” is set in the seventh output flag. As in the first embodiment, “1” is set to the first to seventh output flags in the ball entering detection process (FIG. 10).

  If "1" is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S4003: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is HI level (Step S4004). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter is cleared to "0" (step S4005).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4002, it is determined whether an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S4006). Specifically, whether the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the control target counter among the first to seventh signals is switched from the LOW level to the HI level It is determined whether or not. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of history setting processing described later for executing monitoring of the input port 201 in the sound side CPU 163, and a signal switched from LOW level to HI level It is a period during which the sound light side CPU 163 can reliably specify the output state of the. If a trigger to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S4006: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S4007).

  When a negative determination is made in step S4003, when the process of step S4005 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step S4006, or when the process of step S4007 is performed, the value of the management target counter of the main RAM 65 is set to 1. The subtraction is performed (step S4008). Then, it is determined whether the value of the management target counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S4009). If the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S4009: NO), the processing of step S4002 and subsequent steps is executed for the management target corresponding to the new value of the management target counter.

  Next, the effect control process of the present embodiment executed by the sound light side CPU 163 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The effect control process is repeatedly performed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

  When the sound-side CPU 163 receives the opening command from the main CPU 63 (step S4101: YES), the sound-side CPU 163 sets “1” in the opening / closing execution mode flag provided in the sound-side RAM 165 (step S4102). The open / close execution mode flag is a flag for specifying that the open / close execution mode is in the sound-light CPU 163. Thereafter, an effect setting process for the open / close execution mode is executed (step S4103). In the effect setting process for the open / close execution mode, the data table for the open / close execution mode is read from the sound light side ROM 164 to the sound light side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. Thereby, effects for the open / close execution mode are executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Also, it sends an opening command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the opening command, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so that the display effect for the open / close execution mode is executed.

  When the sound-side CPU 163 receives the ending command from the main CPU 63 (step S4104: YES), the sound-side RAM 165 clears the open / close execution mode flag to "0" (step S4105). Thereafter, an effect setting process for ending is executed (step S4106). In the effect setting process for ending, a data table for ending is read out from the sound side ROM 164 to the sound side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. Thereby, the effect of the ending period is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Also, an ending command is sent to the display control unit 82. When the display control device 82 receives the ending command, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so that the display effect of the ending period is performed.

  When the sound-side CPU 163 receives the high-frequency start command from the main CPU 63 (step S4107: YES), the sound-side CPU 163 sets “1” to the high-frequency support flag provided in the sound-side RAM 165 (step S4108). The high frequency start command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 when the high frequency support mode is started. In addition, the high frequency support flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side CPU 163 that it is the high frequency support mode. Thereafter, an effect setting process for high frequency support is executed (step S4109). In the effect setting process for the high frequency support, the data table for the high frequency support mode is read from the sound side ROM 164 to the sound side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. Thereby, effects for the high frequency support mode are executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Also, the high frequency start command is transmitted to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 performs display control of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the high frequency support mode is executed by receiving the high frequency start command.

  When the high-frequency end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S4110: YES), the sound-side CPU 163 clears the high-frequency support flag of the sound-side RAM 165 to “0” (step S4111). The high frequency end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 when the high frequency support mode is ended. Thereafter, an effect setting process for low frequency support is executed (step S4112). In the effect setting process for low frequency support, the data table for low frequency support mode is read from the sound side ROM 164 to the sound side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. Thereby, effects for the low frequency support mode are executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the high frequency end command is transmitted to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 performs display control of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the low frequency support mode is executed by receiving the high frequency end command.

  When the sound light side CPU 163 receives the door open command from the main CPU 63 (step S4113: YES), the sound light side CPU 163 sets “1” in the door open flag provided in the sound light side RAM 165 (step S4114). The door open command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 when the front door frame 14 is opened from the closed state. In addition, the door open flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side CPU 163 that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Thereafter, notification start processing is executed (step S4115). In the notification start process, the data table for door open notification is read from the sound side ROM 164 to the sound side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. Thereby, in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, a notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is in the open state is performed. Also, it transmits a door open command to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is in the open state is executed by receiving the door open command.

  When the sound light side CPU 163 receives the door closing command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4116: YES), it clears the door open flag of the sound light side RAM 165 to "0" (step S4117). The door closing command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 when the front door frame 14 is closed from the open state. Thereafter, notification end processing is executed (step S4118). In the notification end process, the notification indicating that the front door frame 14 in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 is in the open state is ended. Also, it transmits a door closing command to the display control device 82. By receiving the door closing command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is in the open state is ended.

  Thereafter, the history setting process is executed in step S4119 and the check process is executed in step S4120, and then the other processes are executed in step S4121. In the other processing, processing such as when receiving a variation command and a type command from the main CPU 63 is executed.

  Next, the history setting process executed in step S4119 of the effect control process (FIG. 74) will be described.

  First, the normal counter area 211, the open / close execution mode counter area 212, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 213 provided in the sound light side RAM 165 will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG. The first counters 211a, 212a, and 213a, the second counters 211b, 212b, and 213b, the third counters 211c, 212c, and 213c, the fourth counters 211d, 212d, and 213d, and the fifth counters respectively correspond to the areas 211 to 213. 211e, 212e, and 213e, sixth counters 211f, 212f, and 213f, and seventh counters 211g, 212g, and 213g are provided. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 202a has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the first counters 211a, 212a, and 213a. Information of the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the second counters 211b, 212b, and 213b. Information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 202c has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third counters 211c, 212c, and 213c. Information of the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourth counters 211d, 212d, and 213d. Information of the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fifth counters 211e, 212e, and 213e. The sixth counters 211f, 212f, and 213f store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh counters 211g, 212g, and 213g.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a history setting process performed in step S4119 of the effect control process (FIG. 74) in the sound light side CPU 163.

  In the history setting process, when the door open flag in the sound light side RAM 165 is set to "1", that is, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S4201: YES), the normal history setting process (Step S4204) The history setting process (step S4205) in the open / close execution mode and the history setting process (step S4206) in the high frequency support mode are not executed. Since the game area PA is formed by the space divided back and forth by the back of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front of the game board 24, the front door frame 14 is opened. Even if the game area PA is opened forward and the game ball is fired toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball can not flow down the game area PA normally. In addition, when game ball entry to ball entry section 24a, 31-34 occurs when front door frame 14 is in the open state, the manager of the game hall because of the elimination of maintenance and trouble This is a case where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and the game ball enters due to maintenance or the like. Since entering of such a game ball is not entry of the game ball in the regular game execution situation, it is not necessary to manage entry of such a game ball. Therefore, in the history setting process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processes in steps S4204 to S4206 are performed.

  When “1” is not set in any of the door open flag in the sound side RAM 165, the open / close execution mode flag, and the high frequency support flag, that is, the front door frame 14 is closed and the open / close execution mode If it is not one of the frequency support modes (steps S4201 to S4203: NO), the normal history setting process is executed (step S4204). In the normal history setting process, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has switched to the HI level, the value of the normal first counter 211a is incremented by one, When it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has switched to the HI level, the value of the second counter 211b for normal use is added by one, and the third input to the third buffer 202c is generated. When it is confirmed that the signal has switched to the HI level, the value of the third counter 211c for normal use is incremented by 1, and it is confirmed that the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d has switched to the HI level. When it is confirmed that the value of the fourth counter 211d for normal use is incremented by 1 and the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e is switched to the HI level When it is confirmed that the value of the normal fifth counter 211e is incremented by 1 and it is confirmed that the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f is switched to the HI level, the value of the normal sixth counter 211f is set to 1 When it is confirmed that the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g has switched to the HI level, the value of the seventh counter 211g for normal use is incremented by one.

  If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the open / close execution mode (step S4201: NO, step S4202: YES), history setting processing in the open / close execution mode is executed (step S4205). In the history setting process in the open / close execution mode, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 is switched to the HI level, the value of the first counter 212a for the open / close execution mode Is added, and when it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has switched to the HI level, the value of the second counter 212b for the open / close execution mode is added one, and the third buffer 202c is added. When it is confirmed that the third signal input to the H level has been switched, the value of the third counter 212c for the open / close execution mode is incremented by 1, and the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d is When it is confirmed that the level has been switched to the HI level, the value of the fourth counter 212d for the open / close execution mode is incremented by 1 and input to the fifth buffer 202e When it is confirmed that the signal 5 has switched to the HI level, the value of the fifth counter 212e for the open / close execution mode is incremented by 1, and the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f is switched to the HI level. If it is confirmed that the value of the sixth counter 212f for the open / close execution mode is incremented by 1 and it is confirmed that the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g has switched to the HI level, the open / close execution mode The value of the seventh counter 212g for this is incremented by one.

  If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the high frequency support mode (step S4201: NO, step S4203: YES), history setting processing in the high frequency support mode is executed (step S4206). In history setting processing in the high frequency support mode, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has switched to the HI level, the first counter 213a for the high frequency support mode Value is added, and when it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has switched to the HI level, the value of the second counter 213b for the high-frequency support mode is added one, When it is confirmed that the third signal input to the third buffer 202c has switched to the HI level, the value of the third counter 213c for the high-frequency support mode is added by 1 and input to the fourth buffer 202d. When it is confirmed that the fourth signal has switched to the HI level, the value of the fourth counter 213d for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one, and the fifth When it is confirmed that the fifth signal input to the flip-flop 202 e has switched to the HI level, the value of the fifth counter 213 e for the high-frequency support mode is added by 1 and the fifth input to the sixth buffer 202 f When it is confirmed that the sixth signal has switched to the HI level, the value of the sixth counter 213f for the high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1, and the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g is switched to the HI level. If it has been confirmed that the value of the seventh counter 213g for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the process for check executed in step S4120 of the effect control process (FIG. 74) in the sound light side CPU 163.

  If it is not the display period of the check result (step S4301: NO), the processing of step S4303 to step S4308 is executed under the condition that the check start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S4302: YES). The check start command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163 when an instruction signal to start the check is transmitted from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main CPU 63 may be configured to transmit a check start command to the sound side CPU 163 when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the demonstration display. The main CPU 63 may be configured to send a check start command to the sound light side CPU 163 when the predetermined operation unit provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is operated. The check start command may be transmitted from the CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163, and the main light side CPU 63 starts to check the sound light side CPU 163 every time a predetermined period (for example, 120 minutes) elapses from the transmission time of the previous check start command. The command may be transmitted. The trigger for executing the processing in steps S4303 to S4308 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is received from the main CPU 63, and the event that triggered the transmission of the check start command as described above is Whether the sound has occurred or not is grasped by the sound light side CPU 163, and when the sound light side CPU 163 grasps the occurrence of the event, the processing of steps S4303 to S4308 may be executed.

  In the processes of steps S4303 to S4308, first, the normal-use arithmetic process is executed (step S4303). In the normal-use arithmetic processing, by referring to the contents of the first to seventh correspondence areas 204a to 204g of the sound light side ROM 164, the same ball entry portion among the first to seventh counters 211a to 211g for normal use The values of the counters corresponding to 24a, 31 to 34 are summed. Specifically, since the information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 is stored in the first to third correspondence areas 204a to 204c as already described, the first to third correspondence areas 204a to 204c A sum K2 is calculated by summing up the values of the normal first to third counters 211a to 211c corresponding to 204c. On the other hand, in the fourth to seventh correspondence areas 204d to 204g, information corresponding to the respective ball entering portions 24a and 32-34 is stored. In this case, the values of the fourth to seventh counters 211d to 211g for normal use are grasped as the values of the ball entering portions 24a and 32 to 34 different from each other. Specifically, the value of the seventh counter 211g for normal use is set to K1 corresponding to the out port 24a, and the value of the fourth counter 211d for normal use is set to K3 corresponding to the special power prize device 32, and the fifth counter for normal use The value of 211e is K4 corresponding to the first operation port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 211f for normal use is K5 corresponding to the second operation port 34. Then, the parameters 7 and 8 are calculated in the same manner as the tabulation process (step S3504) of the process for waiting for check (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. Thereafter, the same processing as the parameter management processing (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed on various parameters in the normal state. That is, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is assumed that the calculated various parameters are in the first range, and the value of the seventh parameter is 0. If only one of the condition of exceeding 7 and the condition of the value of the eighth parameter exceeding 0.6 is satisfied, it is assumed that the calculated various parameters are in the second range, and the seventh When the parameter value exceeds 0.7 and the eighth parameter value exceeds 0.6, it is determined that the various parameters calculated are in the third range as the various parameters in the normal state. Run against. Then, the information of the determination result is written to the main RAM 65.

  Thereafter, arithmetic processing for the open / close execution mode is executed (step S4304). In the arithmetic processing for the opening / closing execution mode, the total value K2 is calculated by summing the values of the first to third counters 212a to 212c for the opening / closing execution mode as in the ordinary arithmetic processing (step S4303). . Further, the value of the seventh counter 212g for the opening / closing execution mode is K1 corresponding to the out port 24a, the value of the fourth counter 212d for the opening / closing execution mode is K3 corresponding to the special power winning device 32, and the value for the opening / closing execution mode The value of the fifth counter 212e is K4 corresponding to the first operation port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 212f for the open / close execution mode is K5 corresponding to the second operation port 34. Then, the parameters 7 and 8 are calculated in the same manner as the tabulation process (step S3504) of the process for waiting for check (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. Thereafter, the same processing as the parameter management processing (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed on various parameters in the open / close execution mode. That is, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is assumed that the calculated various parameters are in the first range, and the value of the seventh parameter is 0. If only one of the condition of exceeding 7 and the condition of the value of the eighth parameter exceeding 0.6 is satisfied, it is assumed that the calculated various parameters are in the second range, and the seventh When the parameter value exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, it is judged that the calculated various parameters are in the third range. Execute for the parameter. Then, the information of the determination result is written to the main RAM 65.

  Thereafter, arithmetic processing for the high frequency support mode is executed (step S4305). In the arithmetic processing for the high frequency support mode, K2 which is the total value is calculated by summing the values of the first to third counters 213a to 213c for the high frequency support mode as in the ordinary arithmetic processing (step S4303). calculate. Further, the value of the seventh counter 213g for the high frequency support mode is K1 corresponding to the out port 24a, and the value of the fourth counter 213d for the high frequency support mode is K3 corresponding to the special power winning device 32, the high frequency support The value of the fifth counter 213e for mode is K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 213f for high frequency support mode is K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Then, the parameters 7 and 8 are calculated in the same manner as the tabulation process (step S3504) of the process for waiting for check (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. Thereafter, the same processing as the parameter management processing (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed on various parameters in the high frequency support mode. That is, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is assumed that the calculated various parameters are in the first range, and the value of the seventh parameter is 0. If only one of the condition of exceeding 7 and the condition of the value of the eighth parameter exceeding 0.6 is satisfied, it is assumed that the calculated various parameters are in the second range, and the seventh When the parameter value exceeds 0.7 and the eighth parameter value exceeds 0.6, it is determined in the high-frequency support mode that the various parameters computed are in the third range. Execute for various parameters. Then, the information of the determination result is written to the main RAM 65.

  Thereafter, display start processing of the calculation result is executed (step S4306). In the display start process, a determination result command corresponding to the information of each determination result derived in each calculation process of steps S4303 to S4305 is transmitted to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the determination result command, the display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to display all the information of each determination result derived in each calculation process of steps S4303 to S4305. Thereby, an image showing which of the first range, the second range and the third range corresponds to the various parameters in the normal state, and the various parameters in the opening / closing execution mode have the first range, the second range and the second An image showing which of the three ranges corresponds to, and an image showing which of the first range, the second range, and the third range the various parameters in the high frequency support mode correspond to are displayed as symbols. It is displayed on the device 41. In this case, the image corresponding to the information of the determination result corresponds to various parameters in the normal state at the corner of the symbol display device 41, various parameters in the open / close execution mode, and various parameters in the high frequency support mode. The respective images are displayed in such a manner that the game hall manager can recognize whether the game is being played.

  Thereafter, information corresponding to the display period (specifically, 30 sec) of the check result is set in the display counter provided in the sound light side RAM 165 (step S4307). The value set in the display counter is periodically (eg, 4 msec cycle) subtracted. Further, “1” is set to the in-display flag provided in the sound light side RAM 165 (step S4308). The in-display flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side CPU 163 that it is a display period of the check result.

  If "1" is set in the display flag of the sound light side RAM 165, an affirmative determination is made in step S4301. In this case, the value of the counter during display of the sound light side RAM 165 is decremented by 1 (step S4309). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the displayed counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S4310). If the value of the counter during display is “0” (step S4310: YES), display end processing of the calculation result is executed (step S4311). In the display end process, a display end command is transmitted to the display control unit 82 so that the display of the image corresponding to the information of each of the determination results in the symbol display unit 41 is ended. By receiving the display end command, the display control unit 82 controls the display of the symbol display unit 41 so that the display of the image corresponding to the information of each of the determination results is ended.

  Thereafter, the in-display flag of the sound light side RAM 165 is cleared to "0" (step S4312). When the process of step S4312 is executed, the counters 211a to 211g of the normal counter area 211, the counters 212a to 212g of the open / close execution mode counter area 212, and the counters 213a of the high frequency support mode counter area 213 Clear the value of ̃213 g to “0”. As a result, the ball entry history of the ball entry units 24 a and 31 to 34 is initialized, and management of the ball entry history is newly started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, even if the processing of step S4312 is executed, the counters 211a to 211g of the normal counter area 211, the counters 212a to 212g of the open / close execution mode counter area 212, and high frequency support The values of the counters 213a to 213g in the mode counter area 213 may be maintained as they are. In this case, the entering history of the ball entering units 24a, 31 to 34 is accumulated so as to straddle the execution times of notification of the calculation result using the entering history a plurality of times. Further, in the configuration, the ball entering history of the ball entering units 24a and 31 to 34 is received based on the reception of the history erasing signal from the hall computer HC and the occurrence of the erasing operation using the operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10. May be eliminated.

  According to the present embodiment described above, the accumulation of the ball entering history of the ball entering units 24a, 31 to 34, the operation using the ball entering history, and the notification of the operation result are not on the sound side It is executed by the CPU 163. Thereby, while suppressing that the processing load of the main CPU 63 that manages and controls the progress of the game increases, the accumulation of the ball entry history of the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34, the calculation using the ball entry history , And notification of the calculation result can be performed.

  The ball entering results of the ball entering units 24 a and 31 to 34 are sounded from the main CPU 63 using a dedicated signal path provided separately from the signal path for transmitting a command from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163 It is transmitted to the light side CPU 163. As a result, it is possible to transmit the ball entry results of the ball entry units 24 a and 31 to 34 from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163 without increasing the number of commands.

  Information indicating which signal receiving path the ball entry results of the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34 correspond to which ball entry results for the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34, and corresponding to each signal path Information on the number of winning balls of the game ball is stored in advance in the sound side ROM 164. Thereby, the processing for grasping which signal passage corresponds to the ball entry result of which ball entry part 24a, 31-34, and the information of the number of winning balls of the game ball corresponding to each signal channel There is no need to transmit from the main CPU 63 to the sound CPU 163.

  Note that the result of entering the ball in the ball entering units 24a and 31 to 34 is limited to a configuration in which the main CPU 63 transmits it to the sound-side CPU 163 using a dedicated signal path different from the command signal path. For example, the main CPU 63 may transmit the sound to the CPU 163 using a signal path for command. In this case, the main CPU 63 may transmit a command corresponding to the type of each of the ball entering units 24 a and 31 to 34 to the sound light side CPU 163. In the configuration, information on the number of winning balls corresponding to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 may be included in each command, and the information on the number of winning balls corresponding to each command is the sound side ROM 164 May be stored in advance.

Sixteenth Embodiment
In the thirteenth embodiment, notification of the calculation result of various parameters using the ball entry history to each ball entering unit 24a, 31 to 34 is executed using the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a. In the present embodiment, the display unit for executing this notification is different. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the notification display devices 215 to 217 are provided on the main control substrate 61 of the main control device 60. First, main controller 60 will be described. 78 is a front view of main controller 60, and FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, main controller 60 is configured such that main control substrate 61 is accommodated in substrate box 60a. As shown in FIG. 79, the MPU 62 is mounted on the element mounting surface 61 a which is one of the plate surfaces of the main control substrate 61. The substrate box 60a is formed transparent so that the MPU 62 accommodated in the substrate box 60a can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. Although the substrate box 60a is formed to be colorless and transparent, the substrate box 60a may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 62 accommodated in the substrate box 60a can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. The main controller 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface 61a of the main control substrate 61 in the substrate box 60a faces the back of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by making the gaming machine main body 12 open to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually check the opposing wall portion 60b It becomes possible to visually observe the MPU 62 through the facing wall portion 60b.

  The substrate box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c and 60d back and forth, but the plurality of case bodies 60c and 60d may be separated as shown in FIG. A connecting portion 60e is provided for blocking and leaving a trace when the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated. A plurality of connecting portions 60e are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular substrate box 60a. As a result, even if the partial bonding portion 60e is broken to separate the case bodies 60c and 60d in a state in which the separation of the case bodies 60c and 60d is prevented using the partial bonding portion 60e, It is possible to prevent the separation of the case bodies 60c and 60d again by bringing the other coupling portion 60e into the coupled state. In addition, when the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated, the joint portion 60e is broken and its trace remains, so that whether or not the case body 60c and 60d is improperly separated by visually confirming the joint portion 60e It becomes possible to grasp. Further, a sealing seal 60f is attached to one side of the substrate box 60a opposite to one side where the coupling portions 60e are juxtaposed so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c and 60d. When the seal 60f is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case bodies 60c and 60d. Thereby, when the sealing seal 60f is peeled off at the time of separation of the case bodies 60c and 60d, it becomes possible to leave the mark.

  In main controller 60 of the above configuration, main control board 61 is provided with a plurality of notification display devices 215 to 217 as shown in FIG. Specifically, a first notification display device 215, a second notification display device 216, and a third notification display device 217 are provided. Each of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 is a segment display in which seven display segments by LEDs are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this and it is not limited to this and it is a single multicolor emission type. It may be a light emitter, may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be an organic EL display. Each of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 is installed with its display surface facing the direction in which the element mounting surface 61 a of the main control board 61 faces. This makes it possible to visually observe the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 housed in the substrate box 60a from the outside of the substrate box 60a. Further, as described above, the main controller 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface 61a of the main control substrate 61 in the substrate box 60a faces the back of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened forward of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the rear face of the resin base 21 is exposed forward of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third through the opposing wall portion 60b. It becomes possible to visually observe the notification display devices 215-217.

  In the first notification display device 215, various parameters (seventh parameter and eighth parameter) under normal conditions specified in the tabulation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. The judgment result of is displayed. In this case, if the determination result of the various parameters is the first range, the first notification display device 215 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the first range, and the determination results of the various parameters Is the second range, characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the second range are displayed on the first notification display device 215, and the determination result of the various parameters is the third range. The first notification display device 215 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the third range.

  In the second notification display device 216, various parameters (the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter in the opening / closing execution mode specified in the tabulation process (step S3504) in the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment The judgment result of parameter is displayed. In this case, when the determination result of the various parameters is the first range, the second notification display device 216 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the first range, and the determination results of the various parameters. Is the second range, the second notification display device 216 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the second range, and the determination results of the various parameters are the third range. The second notification display device 216 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the third range.

  In the third notification display device 217, various parameters (the seventh parameter and the seventh parameter in the high-frequency support mode specified in the tabulation process (step S3504) in the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment The judgment result of 8 parameters is displayed. In this case, when the determination result of the various parameters is the first range, the third notification display device 217 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the first range, and the determination results of the various parameters. Is the second range, characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the second range are displayed on the third notification display device 217, and the determination result of the various parameters is the third range. The third notification display device 217 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the third range.

  Incidentally, the display of each determination result in the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 is checked in the same manner as the display of each determination result in the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a in the thirteenth embodiment. It is started when the display period of the result is reached and ended when the display period of the check result is ended. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 may be configured to always display the determination results immediately before. In addition, when it is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 that the gaming machine main body 12 is opened relative to the outer frame 11, immediately before in the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 The display of each determination result is started, and when it is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine body 12 that the gaming machine body 12 is closed to the outer frame 11, the first to third The display of each determination result on the notification display devices 215 to 217 may be terminated. In this case, it is possible to limit the period in which the display is performed in the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217.

  A blocking sheet 60g is provided in a facing region facing the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 in the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface 61a of the main control substrate 61 in the substrate box 60a. The blocking sheet 60g is provided to make the inside of the substrate box 60a, more specifically, the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 invisible in the substrate box 60a through the region where the blocking sheet 60g is provided. ing. Specifically, although a hologram sheet is provided as the blocking sheet 60g, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a reflection sheet or a irregular reflection sheet may be provided. Since the shielding sheet 60g is provided, even if the area in the substrate box 60a where the shielding sheet 60g is provided is viewed from the front, the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 are displayed by the presence of the shielding sheet 60g. It becomes impossible to visually inspect. Thereby, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened forward of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 for the purpose of maintenance or the like in a situation where a game is performed in the pachinko machine 10, the first to third by the player. The possibility that the notification display devices 215 to 217 will be viewed is reduced.

  On the other hand, since the blocking sheet 60g is provided in a partial region of the facing wall portion 60b, by visually viewing the facing wall portion 60b toward the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217, The display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 can be visually observed from the outside of the substrate box 60 a. Therefore, it is possible for the manager of the game hall to visually observe the notification contents of the respective determination results in the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 from the outside of the substrate box 60a.

  Incidentally, the blocking sheet 60g is not provided in the region facing the MPU 62 in the facing wall portion 60b. As a result, even if the blocking sheet 60g is provided, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the MPU 62 from being deteriorated upon visual check.

  A member may be provided in place of the blocking sheet 60g to reduce the visibility of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217. For example, a sheet that is colored and transparent but has a low degree of transparency may be provided instead of the shielding sheet 60g. In this case, when the sheet is viewed from the front, although the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 can be visually recognized, the display content on the display surface becomes difficult to see.

Seventeenth Embodiment
In each of the above embodiments, an example in which the pachinko machine 10 adopts a configuration for managing a game history is shown, but in the present embodiment, an example in which a configuration for managing a game history is employed in the slot machine 310 is shown. First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 310 will be described. 80 is a front view of the slot machine 310, FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the slot machine 310 with the front door 312 opened, and FIG. 82 is a front view of the housing 311.

  As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the slot machine 310 includes a housing 311 forming an outer shell thereof. The housing 311 is formed in a box shape opened forward as a whole by fixing a plurality of wood panels.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, a front door 312 is attached to the front side of the housing 311. The front door 312 is supported by the housing 311 such that the internal space of the housing 311 can be opened and closed with the shaft portion 312a provided on the left side thereof as a rotation axis. The front door 312 is locked by a locking device 312 b provided on the back surface thereof so as to be unopenable, and this locked state is released by an unlocking operation of the key cylinder 313 with a predetermined key.

  As shown in FIG. 80, a game panel 314 is provided on the upper side of the central portion of the front door 312. In the game panel 314, three vertically long display window portions 315L, 315M, 315R are formed in a line. The display windows 315L, 315M, 315R are made of a transparent or semi-transparent material, and the inside of the slot machine 310 is visible through the display windows 315L, 315M, 315R.

  As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the inside of the housing 311 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 311a, and a reel unit 316 is attached to the top of the partition plate 311a. The reel unit 316 includes a left reel 316L, a middle reel 316M and a right reel 316R which are respectively formed in a cylindrical shape. Each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel 316L, 316M, 316R. The rotational axes of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are disposed on the same axis extending substantially in the horizontal direction, and the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are in one-to-one correspondence with the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R is visible through the corresponding display windows 315L, 315M, 315R. In addition, when the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are projected as if they are moving from the top to the bottom through the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R.

  On the lower left side of the game panel 314, as shown in FIG. 80, there is provided a start lever 321 operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 316L, 316M and 316R. When the start lever 321 is operated while game media such as medals are betted, the reels 316L, 316M, 316R start to rotate simultaneously.

  On the right side of the start lever 321, stop buttons 322, 323, 324 are provided which are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 316L, 316M, 316R. The stop buttons 322, 323, and 324 are disposed immediately below the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R corresponding to the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to be stopped. The respective stop buttons 322, 323, 324 can be stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed since the left reel 316L has started rotating.

  The rotation of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is started based on the operation of the start lever 321, and the rotation of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is stopped based on the operation of each stop button 322, 323, 324. Until the execution of various processes such as the awarding of the game and the management of the gaming state is completed, it corresponds to one game (game time).

  On the lower right side of the display windows 315L, 315M, 315R, a medal insertion slot 325 for inserting a medal as an investment value is provided. The medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 325 is guided to the hopper device 318 if acceptance is permitted by the selector 317 provided on the back of the front door 312 as shown in FIG. From the medal discharge port 312c provided at the lower front of the front door 312, the medal receiver 312d is guided (see FIG. 80). The hopper device 318 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiver 312 d through the medal discharge port 312 c when a prize corresponding to the addition of the game medium is established on the activated line. There is.

  Below the medal insertion slot 325, as shown in FIG. 80, a return button 326 is provided which is pressed when the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 325 is jammed in the selector 317. In addition, on the lower left side of the display windows 315L, 315M, 315R, a first credit insertion button 327 for inserting a credited virtual medal for a maximum possible amount of bets at one time, and two virtual medals at one time And a third credit insertion button 329 for inserting one virtual medal at a time.

  A settlement button 331 is provided on the left side of the start lever 321. That is, the present slot machine 310 has a credit function of storing and storing the surplus insertion medals and the payout medals at the time of winning as the predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) as virtual medals. When the settlement button 331 is operated under the situation where it is stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal discharge port 312c as a real medal.

  As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, a power supply device 319 is provided inside the housing 311. The power supply device 319 includes a power switch 319a operated at the time of power on / off, a reset button 319b for resetting various states of the slot machine 310, and a setting state of the slot machine 310 from “setting 1” There is provided a setting key insertion hole 319c operated to change in the range of setting 6 ".

  Next, the symbols attached to the reels 316L, 316M, 316R will be described.

  FIG. 83 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 316L, the middle reel 316M and the right reel 316R. As shown in the figure, twenty symbols are arranged in a line on each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. Further, although the numbers “0” to “19” are assigned corresponding to the respective reels 316L, 316M, 316R, these numbers can be viewed by the main controller 340 from the display windows 315L, 315M, 315R. And the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are not actually attached. However, the following description will be made using the corresponding numbers.

  As a symbol, "bell" symbol (for example, the 19th of left reel 316L), "watermelon" symbol (for example, the eighteenth of left reel 316L), "cherry" symbol (for example, the 17th of left reel 316L), " "Replay" symbol (for example, 16th of left reel 316L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 15th of left reel 316L), "LUCKY" symbol (for example, 13th of left reel 316L), "red 7" symbol (for example For example, there are eight types of the 12th of the left reel 316L and the "white 7" symbol (for example, the 10th of the left reel 316L). Then, as shown in FIG. 83, the number and arrangement order of various symbols in each reel 316L, 316M, 316R are completely different.

  FIG. 84 is a front view of the display windows 315L, 315M, 315R. Each of the display window portions 315L, 315M, 315R is formed such that among the twenty symbols attached to the corresponding reels 316L, 316M, 316R, there are three symbols that allow the entire symbol to be visible. For this reason, in the state where all the reels 316L, 316M, 316R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols become visible through the display window parts 315L, 315M, 315R.

  In the slot machine 310, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where the symbols of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R can be visually recognized. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle design of the left reel 316L, the middle design of the middle reel 316M, and the middle design of the right reel 316R. The rotation of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is started with a prescribed number of medals bet, and when the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the benefit of medal payout, re-play Any of the profit and the transition of the gaming state is awarded.

  That is, in the slot machine 310, only one main line ML is set as a line on which winning can be established. The main line ML is set as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the upper pattern of the left reel 316L, the subline SUL1 connecting the middle design of the middle reel 316M and the lower design of the right reel 316R, the upper design of the left reel 316L, the upper design of the middle reel 316M and the upper design of the right reel 316R The subline SUL2 connected, the lower symbol of the left reel 316L, the subline SUL3 connecting the lower symbol of the middle reel 316M and the lower symbol of the right reel 316R, the lower symbol of the left reel 316L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 316M and the right reel 316R Even if a combination of symbols to be won is established on a line extending along a straight line such as the subline SUL4 connecting the upper symbols of the symbol, the winning will not be established.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 85, the correspondence between the combination of symbols to be won and the benefit given when the symbol is won will be described. FIG. 85 is an explanatory view for explaining the correspondence between a combination of symbols to be won and a benefit to be awarded when the symbol is won.

  As a small winning combination in which medals are paid out, there are a first compensation winning, a second compensating winning, a third compensating winning, a bell winning, a first watermelon winning, a second watermelon winning and a cherry winning. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is either the "BAR" symbol or the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "bell" symbol, of the right reel 316R If the stop symbol is a "bell" symbol, it will be the first compensation prize. In addition, the stop symbol of left reel 316L on main line ML is either “watermelon” symbol or “LUCKY” symbol, the stop symbol of middle reel 316M is “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of right reel 316R is If it is a "bell" symbol, it will be the second compensation prize. Also, on the main line ML, when the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "bell" symbol, It will be the third compensation prize. When one of the first compensation winning to the third compensation winning becomes, the number of objects to be provided with game media becomes "1".

  When the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "bell" symbol, the bell prize is won It becomes. When a bell prize is won, the number of objects to be provided with game media is "9".

  The stop symbol of the left reel 316L on the main line ML is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "watermelon" symbol. Watermelon wins. When the first watermelon winning is achieved, the number of objects to be provided with game media is "7".

  When the stop symbol of the left reel 316L on the main line ML is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "BAR" symbol, the second Watermelon wins. When the second watermelon winning is achieved, the number of objects to be provided with game media is "7".

  When the stop symbol of the left reel 316L on the main line ML becomes the "cherry" symbol, it is a cherry winning even if the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R are both. In the case of a cherry winning, the number of objects to be provided with game media is "2".

  A normal replay prize, a first RT replay prize, a second RT replay prize, a first fall replay, as a prize provided with a replay bonus that allows the player to play the next game without betting medals (or virtual medals). There is a prize and the second fall replay prize. Specifically, on main line ML, the stop symbol of left reel 316L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of middle reel 316M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of right reel 316R is the "replay" symbol. In the case, you usually get a Replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 316L on the main line ML is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "replay" symbol, the first RT It becomes a replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "replay" symbol, the second RT It becomes a replay prize. If the stop symbol of the left reel 316L on the main line ML is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "replay" symbol, the first It will be a fall replay prize. If the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "watermelon" symbol, the second It will be a fall replay prize.

  When one of the above-described replay wins, it becomes possible to play the next game while making the bet unnecessary for both the medal and the virtual medal. Specifically, when any of the replay wins in a game in which three bets of medals are made, the game of the next game may be started in a bet of three sheets, making betting unnecessary for both medals and virtual medals. It becomes possible.

  Further, among the various replay wins, the first RT replay win, the second RT replay win, the first fall replay win, and the second fall replay win are not only the opportunity to give the replay win bonus but also the transition to the gaming state. Become. In the slot machine 310, a plurality of types of gaming states are set such that the types of winning combinations to be selected for the lottery and the winning probability of each combination are different in the lottery process of the winning combinations. Occurs when a replay prize that is a trigger is established.

  There are a first BB prize and a second BB prize as state transition prizes in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is "red 7" If it is a symbol, it will be the first BB prize. The stop symbol of the left reel 316L on the main line ML is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "white 7" symbol , It will be the 2nd BB prize. When the first BB winning or the second BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

  The BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be provided per unit game count is higher than in the normal mode described later and in the non-AT state (this state is also referred to as a normal gaming state). Furthermore, the BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be provided per unit game count is higher than any gaming state other than the BB state. Specifically, the player is made to be able to establish a bell prize, and is elected with a higher probability (for example, about 1 / 1.1) than in the case of other gaming states, and each reel 316L when the player is elected , 316M, 316R and bell stop winning timing regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324 with respect to the rotational position of each of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. The BB state continues over a plurality of games, and ends when the end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. Although the end condition is arbitrary, it is set as the end condition that the total number of game media provided after the BB state is started is equal to or more than the end reference number (for example, “350”) in the slot machine 310. There is.

  Next, an apparatus for executing various types of notification and various types of effects will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 80, an upper lamp 332 and a speaker 333 are provided on the upper portion of the front door 312, and an image display device 334 is provided. The upper lamp 332 is controlled to emit light in a mode corresponding to the abnormality when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, and is controlled to emit light in a mode according to the winning result. In addition, the upper lamp 332 is controlled to emit light so that a light emission effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 334 is performed. The speakers 333 are provided as a left-right pair, and sound output is controlled so that a sound or a voice corresponding to the abnormality is output when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, and a sound or a voice corresponding to a winning result Sound output is controlled so as to be output. In addition, the sound output of the speaker 333 is controlled so that the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 334 is performed.

  The image display device 334 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, and may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 334 is display-controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning result of the combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface.

  Credit display unit 335 for displaying the number of virtual medals stored and stored in display panel unit 315L, 315M, 315R on game panel 314 of front door 312 An assigned number display unit 336 for displaying the number of gaming media is provided. The display portions 335 and 336 are each formed of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses an LED of a single color emission type such as green.

  The slot machine 310 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, a main controller 340 is provided above the reel unit 316. The main controller 340 is attached to a back plate 311 b that produces the back of the housing 311. The main control device 340 is configured such that the main control substrate 341 is accommodated in the substrate box 345.

  An MPU 342 is mounted on an element mounting surface which is one plate surface of the main control substrate 341. The substrate box 345 is formed transparent so that the MPU 342 accommodated in the substrate box 345 can be visually observed from the outside of the substrate box 345. Although the substrate box 345 is formed to be colorless and transparent, the substrate box 345 may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 342 accommodated in the substrate box 345 can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 345. The main controller 340 is mounted on the back surface of the back plate 311 b of the housing 311 such that the facing wall portion 345 a facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 341 in the substrate box 345 faces the slot machine 310 forward. Accordingly, by opening the front door 312 forward of the slot machine 310 with respect to the housing 311 to expose the internal space of the housing 311, it becomes possible to visually check the opposing wall portion 345a of the substrate box 345 It is possible to view the MPU 342 visually through the facing wall portion 345a.

  The substrate box 345 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies back and forth. In these plurality of case bodies, for preventing separation of the case bodies and leaving a trace thereof in separation of the case bodies. A coupling portion 345 b is provided. A plurality of coupling portions 345 b are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular substrate box 345. As a result, even if the partial bonding portion 345b is broken to separate the case body in a state in which the partial bonding portion 345b is used to prevent the separation of the case body, another coupling portion 345b is subsequently formed. By combining them, it is possible to prevent the separation of the case body again. Further, when the case body is separated, the joint portion 345b is broken and the trace thereof remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether the separation of the case body is performed illegally by visually confirming the joint portion 345b. Become. Further, a sealing seal 345 c is attached to one side of the substrate box 345 different from the side on which the coupling portions 345 b are juxtaposed so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the seal seal 345c is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body. Thereby, when the seal seal 345c is peeled off at the time of separation of the case body, it becomes possible to leave the mark.

  In the main control device 340 having the above configuration, the main control board 341 is provided with a plurality of notification display devices 346 to 348. Specifically, a first notification display device 346, a second notification display device 347, and a third notification display device 348 are provided. Each of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is a segment display in which seven display segments by LEDs are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this and it is not limited to this. It may be a light emitter, may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be an organic EL display. Each of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is installed in such a manner that the display surface thereof faces in the same direction as the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 341 faces. Accordingly, it is possible to visually observe the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 accommodated in the substrate box 345 from the outside of the substrate box 345. Further, as described above, the main controller 340 is mounted on the back plate 311 b of the housing 311 so that the facing wall portion 345 a facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 341 in the substrate box 345 faces the slot machine 310 forward. Therefore, when the front door 312 is opened forward of the slot machine 310 with respect to the housing 311 to expose the internal space of the housing 311 forward of the slot machine 310, the first to the first through the facing wall portion 345a. 3) It becomes possible to visually observe the notification display devices 346 to 348. The management result of the game history is notified using the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348. This will be described in detail later.

  Visual confirmation of the main controller 340 is performed by opening the front door 312 forward of the slot machine 310 with respect to the housing 311. In order to improve the visibility of the visual check of the main controller 340 performed by opening the front door 312, the housing 311 is provided with lighting devices 349a and 349b. The illumination devices 349a and 349b are provided one each on the back surface of the left side plate 311c and the back surface of the right side plate 311d of the housing 311 so as to be a left-right pair. The illumination devices 349 a and 349 b are provided with high-brightness LEDs as light emitters, and are installed so that the light irradiation direction is the main controller 340. The irradiation range IR of the light by the illumination devices 349 a and 349 b includes the range facing the MPU 342 in the facing wall portion 345 a of the main control device 340. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the MPU 342. Further, the irradiation range IR includes a range facing the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 in the facing wall portion 345a of the main control device 340. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348. Further, the irradiation range IR includes the range in which the coupling portion 345 b is provided in the substrate box 345 of the main controller 340 and the range in which the sealing seal 345 c is provided. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the coupling portion 345b and the sealing seal 345c.

  The irradiation of the light from the illumination devices 349a and 349b is performed according to the opening angle of the front door 312 with respect to the housing 311, although the details will be described later. In order to detect the opening angle of the front door 312, an opening angle sensor 312e is provided on the rear surface of the front door 312 and at a position adjacent to the shaft portion 312a as shown in FIG. It is possible to detect whether or not the front door 312 is in a closed state with respect to the housing 311 by the opening angle sensor 312e, and when the front door 312 is open, the opening angle is a predetermined opening angle It is possible to detect whether or not Although the method of detecting the opening angle of the front door 312 by the opening angle sensor 312e is arbitrary, for example, when the front door 312 is in the closed state, it is pressed and the front door 312 is in the open state. The detection unit from which the pressed state is released and the open angle of the front door 312 exceed the predetermined open angle, and the pressed state is not detected until the open angle of the front door 312 becomes the predetermined open angle. And can be considered individually.

  In addition to the main control device 340, the slot machine 310 is provided with an effect control device 350 as shown in FIG. The effect control device 350 is disposed on the front door 312 so as to be superimposed on the rear of the image display device 334. The effect control device 350 controls the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333 and the image display device 334 based on the command received from the main control device 340. In the same manner as the main control device 340, the effect control device 350 is configured such that the control substrate is accommodated in the substrate box.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 310 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The main control device 340 has a main control board 341 which controls the main control of the game. An MPU 342 is mounted on the main control board 341. The MPU 342 is a ROM 343 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 342 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 343 is executed. A certain RAM 344 and a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, etc. are incorporated. The fact that the ROM 343 and the RAM 344 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 342 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip.

  The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 342, the reel unit 316, the start detection sensor 321a for detecting the operation of the start lever 321, the stop detection sensors 322a, 323a and 324a for individually detecting the operation of the stop buttons 322, 323 and 324, and the medal insertion The operations of the inserted medal detection sensor 325a for detecting the medal inserted from the mouth 325, the credit insertion detection sensors 327a, 328a and 329a for individually detecting the operation of the credit insertion buttons 327, 328 and 329, and the settlement button 331 are detected The setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 319c provided in the power supply device 319. The settlement detection sensor 331a, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 318, the sensor for detecting the operation of the reset button 319b provided in the power supply device 319 To detect Sa, and is connected to various sensors such as the opening angle sensor 312e for detecting the opening angle of the front door 312, the signals from the sensors are input to MPU342.

  On the output side of the MPU 342, a reel unit 316, a selector drive unit 317a provided in the selector 317, a payout motor of the hopper device 318, first to third notification display devices 346 to 348, illumination devices 349a and 349b, and The effect control device 350 and the like are connected. In each game, the rotational drive control of each reel 316 L, 316 M, 316 R of the reel unit 316 is performed by the MPU 342. As already described, the selector 317 detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 325 by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a if the acceptance is permitted and then guides it to the hopper device 318, and the inserted medal if the acceptance is prohibited. It has a function of discharging to the medal tray 312d without being detected by the detection sensor 325a. The selector drive unit 317a has a function to switch the state of the selector 317 between the acceptance permission state and the acceptance prohibition state. Specifically, the position for acceptance permission of the passage switching piece provided in the selector 317 is provided. Operate between the and the position for no reception. The MPU 342 switches the state of the selector 317 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state by switching the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 317a.

  Further, the MPU 342 executes the drive control of the hopper device 318 when the small winning combination is established and the payout of the medal is executed. In addition, when the supply of the operation power to the MPU 342 is started, the MPU 342 starts the display for notifying the management result of the game history in the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 and at the same time the game history is Whenever the management result is updated, the display contents are updated. Further, the MPU 342 executes the light emission control of the illumination devices 349a and 349b according to the opening angle of the front door 312. The MPU 342 transmits a command to the effect control device 350 at each timing of each game, and transmits a command for notifying the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R in the image display device 334 to the effect control device 350. .

  The power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 319 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342 (not shown). The power supply unit 319 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies drive power to the main controller 340 and other electronic devices of the slot machine 310 and a power failure monitoring circuit, and the power failure monitoring circuit applies the power supply unit from an external power supply. The voltage which is being monitored is monitored, and when the voltage falls below the reference voltage, a power failure signal is output to the MPU 342. The MPU 342 executes power failure processing by receiving a power failure signal, and enables recovery to the processing state before the power failure after power recovery. Further, the power supply device 319 is provided with a power-off power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 344 as power-off power in a situation where supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, the data is stored in the RAM 344 in a state (for example, one day or two days) where backup power can be supplied by the power supply part during power interruption Be done. However, by turning on the power of the slot machine 310 in a state where the reset button 319 b provided on the power supply device 319 is pressed, the data stored in the RAM 344 is initialized.

  The effect control device 350 includes an effect control board 351 for controlling execution of various types of notification and various types of effects. An MPU 352 is mounted on the effect control board 351. The MPU 352 is a ROM 353 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 352 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data upon execution of the control program stored in the ROM 353. A certain RAM 354 is incorporated, and a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are incorporated. The fact that the ROM 353 and the RAM 354 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 352 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip. In addition, although backup power is not supplied from the power supply unit of the power supply during interruption of power supply to the RAM 354 in a situation where supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, backup power is also supplied to the RAM 354. Good.

  The MPU 352 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The MPU 342 of the main controller 340 is connected to the input side of the MPU 352 as described above, and receives various commands from the MPU 342. An upper lamp 332, a speaker 333 and an image display device 334 are connected to the output side of the MPU 352. The MPU 352 executes light emission control of the upper lamp 332, sound output control of the speaker 333 and display control of the image display device 334 based on the command received from the MPU 342 of the main control device 340, thereby various notification and effects To be done.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 342, the ROM 343, and the RAM 344 of the main control device 340 are referred to as the main MPU 342, the main ROM 343, and the main RAM 344, respectively, and the MPU 352, the ROM 353, and the RAM 354 of the effect control device 350 are each provided The MPU 352, the effect side ROM 353, and the effect side RAM 354 are referred to.

  Next, the process executed by the main MPU 342 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU 342.

  In the main processing, first, initialization processing is executed (step S4401). In the initialization process, the interrupt by the timer interrupt process is permitted, and furthermore, various initializations are performed on the register group in the main MPU 342, the I / O device, and the like. After the initialization process is completed, the display start process is executed (step S4402). In the display start process, the display on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is started. In this case, when information on the management result of the game history immediately before the previous power failure is stored in the main RAM 344, the display corresponding to the information is performed to display the first to third notification display devices 346- Execute 348 display control. On the other hand, when the main RAM 344 does not store information of the management result of the game history immediately before the previous power off, or when the proper information is not stored as the information, a predetermined initial display (for example, all lighting Control of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 so as to be performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 319c and the power is turned on (step S4403). If the power is turned on with the setting key inserted (step S4403: YES), and if the reset button 319b is not turned on at the time of power on (step S4404: NO), then the winning probability is as it is The setting process is executed (step S4406). On the other hand, if the reset button 319b is turned on when the power is turned on (step S4404: YES), a clear process (step S4405) is executed, and then a winning probability setting process is executed (step S4406).

  In the clear process, all areas in the main RAM 344 are initialized. In this case, the main RAM 344 stores an area for storing the setting value of the slot machine 310, an area for storing data indicating whether or not the BB state is stored, and data indicating the total number of provided gaming media in the BB state. Area, area where data indicating whether or not it is AT state is stored, area where data for specifying the end condition of AT state is stored, data which indicates the type of lottery mode to be described later, game history management result Of the main RAM 344 including the total game number counter 344a and the advantageous game number counter 344b are cleared to "0". As a result, when the clear process is executed, the normal gaming state is established regardless of the state before the power is turned off, and the state of the power before the power is turned off is controlled by the progress of the game triggered by the occurrence of abnormality. If there is, the abnormal state is released.

  In the winning probability setting process, the current setting value is read on the condition that the setting key is inserted and turned on, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display portion 335 provided on the game panel 314. When the clear process (step S4405) of the main side RAM 344 is executed, a display corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed on the credit display unit 335 when the winning probability setting process starts, and the clear process (step S4405) Is not executed, a display corresponding to the set value in the state before the power shutoff is performed. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by one each time the reset button 319 b is operated, and the updated setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 335. When the reset button 319 b is operated in a situation where the setting value is “setting 6”, the setting value is updated to “setting 1”. When the ON operation of the setting key is canceled after the start lever 321 is operated, the winning probability setting process is ended. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display unit 335 is ended. After executing the winning probability setting process, the process proceeds to the normal process (step S4407). The normal processing will be described in detail later.

  If the setting key ON operation has not been performed in the main processing (step S4403: NO), the power recovery processing after step S4408 is executed. The power recovery process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 310 to the state before power off. In the power recovery process, the main RAM 344 is checked to determine whether the setting value of the slot machine 310 is normal (step S4408). Specifically, it is determined that the setting value is normal if the setting value is any of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and is determined to be abnormal if the setting value is “0” or “7” or more. If the set value is normal, it is checked whether the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S4409). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 344. When the operation power supply to the main MPU 342 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to "1" when the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed. Will be set. If "1" is set in the power failure flag, it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S4410). Specifically, the checksum value of the main side RAM 344 is checked to confirm whether the value is normal or not.

  When all the steps S4408 to S4410 make an affirmative determination, it means that the power failure process at the time of the previous power failure has been normally executed. In this case, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 344 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 342, and the data saved in the main RAM 344 is restored to the register of the main MPU 342. The state is restored to the state before the power was shut off (step S4411). Further, the power failure flag of the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S4412). Thereafter, after a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery processing is transmitted to the effect side MPU 352 (step S4413), the address returns to the address before the power is turned off (step S4414).

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in any of steps S4408 to S4410, the operation inhibiting process is executed. In the operation inhibiting process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is inhibited (step S4415), and all actuators connected to the output port are cleared by clearing all output ports of the main MPU 342 to "0". Is turned off (step S4416), and error notification processing is performed to notify the hole manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S4417). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the clear process (step S4405).

  Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 342 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 msec.

  In the register save process (step S4501), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 342 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 344. In step S4502, it is checked whether "1" is set in the power failure flag, and when "1" is set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S4503 to execute power failure processing.

  The power failure flag is set when the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply 319 is input to the main MPU 342. In the power failure process, it is first determined whether or not the transmission of the command has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, the present process is terminated to return to the timer interrupt process and the transmission of the command is completed. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 342 is stored in the main RAM 344. Thereafter, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 342 is cleared, and all actuators not shown are turned off. Then, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main RAM 344 is normal is calculated when the power failure is eliminated, and is stored in the main RAM 344 and the RAM access thereafter is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in preparation for the fact that the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed.

  If "1" is not set in the power failure flag at step S4502, various processes after step S4504 are performed. In step S4504, the watchdog timer clear processing for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S4505, an interrupt end declaration process is performed to enable setting of the next timer interrupt to the main MPU 342 itself. In step S4506, in order to rotate the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the stepping motors provided on the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. In step S4507, while reading the state of various sensors connected to the input port, a sensor monitoring process is performed to monitor whether the read result is normal or not.

  In step S4508, timer operation processing is performed to subtract the values of the counters and timers. In step S4509, a counter process is performed to externally output the result of counting the bet number of medals and the number of payouts. In step S4510, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the effect MPU 352 is performed. In step S4511, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port. In step S4512, the values of the registers saved in the main RAM 344 in the previous step S4501 are restored to the corresponding registers in the main MPU 342, respectively. In step S 4513, a management process is performed to manage the game history and to cause the display corresponding to the management result to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348. In step S 4514, an illumination process is performed to control the light emission of the illumination devices 349 a and 349 b according to the opening angle of the front door 312. Thereafter, in step S4515, an interrupt permitting process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is ended. The details of the management process of step S4513 and the illumination process of step S4514 will be described later.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the normal processing executed by the main MPU 342.

  In the normal processing, first, start waiting processing is executed (step S4601). In the start waiting process, when any replay winning is generated in the previous game, an automatic insertion process is performed to make the same number of game media bet as the number of bets in the previous game. In addition, in the start waiting process, when the medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a, if the current bet number is not more than "3" which is the maximum prescribed number, the bet number is incremented by 1 and the bet number Is greater than or equal to "3" which is the maximum prescribed number, the value of the credit counter provided in the main RAM 344 is incremented by one. The credit counter is a counter for specifying the number of virtual medals stored and stored by the main MPU 342.

  In the start waiting process, when the automatic insertion process is not executed and any one of the credit insertion buttons 327 to 329 is operated, the credit for setting the bet number corresponding to the operation Execute response processing of input. In the credit insertion processing, when the first credit insertion button 327 is operated, the maximum amount of gaming media bettable at that time is made to be betted, and the second credit insertion button 328 or the second When the 3 credit insertion button 329 is operated, the bet state corresponding thereto is made. In this case, when a virtual medal is used for the bet, a value for the number of virtual medals betted is subtracted from the credit counter. In addition, when the virtual medals of the number necessary to set the bet number corresponding to the operated credit insertion buttons 327 to 329 are not stored and stored, it is possible to bet in relation to the virtual medals stored and stored. The maximum amount of gaming media is betted.

  In the start waiting process, when the bet number is equal to or more than the maximum prescribed number and the value of the credit counter is equal to or more than the upper limit storage number (specifically, “50”), the acceptance prohibiting process is executed. In the reception prohibition process, the selector 317 is set in the reception prohibition state by stopping the output of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 317a. Thereby, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 325, the medal is discharged to the medal receiver 312d without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a. On the other hand, when the bet number is less than the maximum prescribed number or when the value of the credit counter is less than the upper limit storage number, the acceptance permission process is executed. In the reception permission process, the selector 317 is set to the reception permission state by starting the output of the drive signal to the selector driver 317a. Thus, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 325 are collected by the hopper device 318 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a. In the start waiting process, when the settlement button 331 is operated and the automatic insertion process is not executed, the medal corresponding to the total number of the bet number and the value of the credit counter is via the medal discharge port 312c. The hopper device 318 is driven and controlled to be discharged to the medal receiver 312 d. As a result, the game medium internally stored is paid out to the player as an actual medal.

  After execution of the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not the bet number of medals has reached a specified number ("3" in the present embodiment) (step S4602). If the bet number has not reached a specified number, the start is started. The process returns to the waiting process (step S4601). If the bet number has reached the specified number, it is determined whether the start lever 321 has been operated (step S4603). If the start lever 321 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S4601). On the other hand, when the start lever 321 is operated, after the main line ML is validated, the acceptance prohibition process is executed (step S4604). Thus, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 325, the medal is discharged to the medal receiver 312d without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a. Thereafter, a lottery process for performing lottery of a part in the current game is executed (step S4605), and drive control of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is performed in a mode corresponding to the result of the current lottery process (step S4605). The reel control process is executed (step S4606).

  Thereafter, a medal payout process is executed (step S4607). In the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is established in the current game, a process for providing the player with medals or virtual medals of the number corresponding to the small winning combination is executed. Specifically, when a virtual medal is awarded, a value corresponding to the small winning combination is added to the credit counter, and when the value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit storage number, the upper limit storage number is exceeded. The hopper device is driven and controlled so that the medals for several minutes are paid out to the medal receiver 312d.

  After that, a response process at the end of the game is executed to enable setting of the gaming state corresponding to the result of the current game (step S4608). Then, the reception permission process is executed (step S4609). Thus, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 325 are collected by the hopper device after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a.

  The lottery process executed in step S4605 of the normal process (FIG. 83) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, a random number to be used when making a success / failure determination of the winning combination is acquired (step S4701). In the slot machine 310, when the start lever 321 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates a random number of 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 321, the main MPU 342 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 344. With this configuration, the random number can be acquired promptly at the timing when the start lever 321 is operated, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 310 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 321 is operated.

  After the random number is obtained, the lottery table for performing the pass / fail determination of the winning combination is read out from the main ROM 343 (step S4702). Here, in the slot machine 310, there are prepared in advance six probability of winning from "setting 1" to "setting 6", and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 319c to perform an ON operation and predetermined operation By performing the above, it is possible to set which lottery process is to be performed based on which winning probability. It should be noted that the “provision n + 1” is a winning probability that is more advantageous for the player than the “prevention n”. Further, there are three types of lottery modes in which the lottery table is different in the main MPU 342 even if they are set values of the same stage, a normal mode, a first RT mode, and a second RT mode. In addition, as a game state, a BB state exists separately from the state of each of these lottery modes. In step S4702, the lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current setting value and the current gaming state is selected.

  The lottery table corresponding to each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode will be described by taking the case of “setting 3” as an example. First, the normal mode lottery table selected in the normal mode will be described. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram for describing a normal mode lottery table. In the following description, the explanatory view of FIG. 92 is referred to as appropriate.

  As shown in FIG. 91, index values IV are set in the normal mode lottery table, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. The point value PV defines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the free run counter.

  Specifically, bell winning data and first compensation winning data are set to index value IV = 1. In the case of winning with index value IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 92, when the first stop (reel on which the stop command is generated first) is the left reel 316L, the second stop target and the third stop target are Regardless of the type of reel and the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, the bell winning is surely generated, and in the case other than that, the first compensating winning is surely generated.

  In the slot machine 310, reel control is performed on each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R that can be slid up to a maximum of four symbols after the stop buttons 322 to 324 are operated. In other words, reel control is performed on each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to stop the operation until the specified time (190 msec) elapses after the stop buttons 322 to 324 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to make it easier to achieve a prize corresponding to the winning combination, and to avoid that a prize corresponding to the combination not winning is established. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R that can be slid is limited as described above, a combination of symbols for achieving a winning on one reel 316L, 316M, and 316R is configured. Depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 322 to 324, it may happen that the corresponding design symbol does not stop on the main line ML if there are five or more symbols between the design symbols (the event is also called “dropout”) Say). The first compensation prize to the third compensation prize, the bell prize and the various replay prizes are prize modes in which no dropout occurs when the reels 316L, 316M, 316R are stopped in the corresponding order, and the first watermelon prize, the second The watermelon prize, the cherry prize, the first BB prize and the second BB prize are prize modes in which dropping may occur depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R.

  As shown in FIG. 91, bell winning data and second compensation winning data are set in the index value IV = 2. In the case of winning with index value IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 92, when the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reel and the respective stop buttons 322 to 324 Regardless of the operation timing of the bell winning combination is reliably established, otherwise, the second compensation winning combination is reliably established.

  As shown in FIG. 91, bell winning data and third compensating winning data are set in the index value IV = 3. In the case of winning with index value IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 92, when the first stop is the right reel 316R, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reel and the respective stop buttons 322 to 324 The bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing, and in the other cases, the third compensating winning is surely established.

  As shown in FIG. 91, only the first watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV = 4. In the case of winning with index value IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 92, the first watermelon winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, the first watermelon winning may not be established.

  As shown in FIG. 91, only the second watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV = 5. In the case of winning with the index value IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 92, the second watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, the second watermelon winning may not be established.

  As shown in FIG. 91, only cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 6. In the case of winning with the index value IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 92, cherry winning may be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 322 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 316L, the cherry winning may not be established.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the first BB winning data is set to the index value IV = 7. In the case of winning with the index value IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 92, the first BB prize can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324, there is a possibility that the first BB winning will not be established. Further, as shown in FIG. 91, the second BB winning data is set to the index value IV = 8. In the case of winning with the index value IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 92, the second BB winning may be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, there is a possibility that the second BB winning will not be established.

  Here, the winning data other than the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data is erased in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning is achieved, and is held in the games following the winning game. It does not go over. On the other hand, except for the case where the main RAM 344 is cleared, the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data support the BB winning even after the game after the winning game. Memory is kept until. In this case, in the game in which the first BB win data or the second BB win data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first BB win data and the second BB win data is excluded from the lottery targets. This makes it possible to prevent the BB winning data from being newly stored despite the fact that the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is already stored, and a plurality of BB winning data are accumulated. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

  As shown in FIG. 91, normal replay winning data and first RT replay winning data are set to index value IV = 9 to 12, respectively. In this case, when the index value IV = 9 is won, as shown in FIG. 92, the first stop is the middle reel 316M and the second stop (the reel where the second stop command is issued) is the left reel 316L. If the third stop (the reel where the stop command is finally generated) is the right reel 316R, the first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, otherwise In this case, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. When the index value IV = 10, the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 324, and in the case other than that, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. When the index value IV = 11, the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 324, and in the case other than that, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. When the index value IV = 12, the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 324, and in the case other than that, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324.

  When the normal mode lottery table shown in FIG. 91 is selected, the probability of winning when index value IV = 1, the probability of winning when index value IV = 2, and the probability of index value IV = 3 The probability of becoming is approximately 1 / 5.0, and the probability of winning at index value IV = 4 is approximately 1/131, and the probability of winning at index value IV = 5 is approximately 1 It is / 187 and the probability of winning in the case of index value IV = 6 is about 1/423, the probability of winning in the case of index value IV = 7, and the victory in the case of index value IV = 8 The probability is about 1/218 each, the probability of winning at index value IV = 9, the probability of winning at index value IV = 10, the probability of winning at index value IV = 11, Probability of winning in the fine index value IV = 12 is about 1 / 28.0, respectively.

  Here, in the normal mode lottery table, as described above, first RT replay winning data is set as winning data with index value IV = 9 to 12 in addition to the normal replay winning data (see FIG. 91). The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 12 is approximately 1 / 7.0. When the player wins with one of the index values IV = 9 to 12, the stop corresponding to the winning combination of the stop order of the first stop, the second stop and the third stop of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. When the order is reached, the first RT replay winning is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) is the first RT mode lottery table.

  Next, the first RT mode lottery table selected in the case of the “setting 3” and the first RT mode will be described. FIGS. 93 and 94 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first RT mode lottery table.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 93, the winning combination data set to each of the index values IV = 1 to 8 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 91). In this case, the combination that enables the provision of gaming media is set to index value IV = 1 to 6, and the winning combination data and each winning probability set to each of index values IV = 1 to 6 are By being the same, the types of roles that enable the provision of game media and the winning probability of those roles are mutually the same in each of the normal mode and the first RT mode. Further, BB winning data is set to index values IV = 7 to 8 similarly to the normal mode lottery table, and the winning probability is the same as that for the normal mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning in any of the BB roles in the normal mode and the first RT mode is the same.

  The winning combination data set to index value IV = 9 or later is different from the normal mode. Specifically, in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 93, second RT replay winning data is set as winning data of index value IV = 9 to 12 in addition to normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 12 is approximately 1 / 10.1. In the case of winning with index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 94, when the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R. The second RT replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and in the other cases, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. When the index value IV = 10, the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. When the index value IV = 11, the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. When the index value IV = 12, the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. In the first RT mode, the stop order corresponds to the winning combination in which the stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R is won with one of the index values IV = 9-12. When it becomes, the second RT replay winning is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When shifting to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) is the lottery table for the second RT mode.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 93, first fall replay replay winning data is set as winning data of the index value IV = 13 to 18, in addition to normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 13-18 is approximately 1 / 10.9.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, when the index value IV = 13 is won, as shown in FIG. 94, the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is In the case of the right reel 316R, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and in the other cases, the first fall replay playing is performed at the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. Certainly occur regardless of the situation. In the case where the index value IV = 14 is won, the first replay is the left reel 316L, the second pause is the right reel 316R, and the third pause is the middle reel 316M. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in the other cases, the first falling replay win occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 322 to 324. When the index value IV = 15, the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in the other cases, the first falling replay win occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 322 to 324. When the index value IV = 16, the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in the other cases, the first falling replay win occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 322 to 324. If the index value IV = 17, the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in the other cases, the first falling replay win occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 322 to 324. When the index value IV = 18, the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in the other cases, the first falling replay win occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 322 to 324. When the first fall replay winning combination is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When shifting to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) is the normal mode lottery table.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 19. The probability of winning in the index value IV = 19 is set higher than the probability of winning in other roles, and specifically, it is won in about 1 / 6.7. When the index value IV = 19 is won, the normal replay winning will be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R and the stop operation timing of the respective reels 316L, 316M, 316R. .

  In the first RT mode lottery table, an index value IV of 9 to 19 is set to enable the establishment of the replay winning. Then, the winning probability of these winning combinations is set to the probability as described above, so that the winning probability (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) of the winning combinations enabling the establishment of the replay winning in the first RT mode is approximately 1 It is /2.9. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 7.0. That is, the first RT mode is a gaming state in which the probability of replay is higher than that in the normal mode.

  Next, the second RT mode lottery table selected in the case of the “setting 3” and the second RT mode will be described. 95 and 96 are explanatory diagrams for describing the second RT mode lottery table.

  In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 95, the winning combination data set to each of the index values IV = 1 to 8 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 91) and the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 93). In this case, the combination that enables the provision of gaming media is set to index value IV = 1 to 6, and the winning combination data and each winning probability set to each of index values IV = 1 to 6 are By being the same, the types of roles that enable the provision of game media and the winning probability of those roles are mutually the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. In addition, BB winning data is set to index value IV = 7 to 8 similarly to the lottery table for the normal mode and the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the winning probability is the lottery table for the normal mode and the lottery for the first RT mode. It is identical to the table. That is, the probability of winning in any of the BB roles in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode is the same.

  The winning combination data set to index value IV = 9 or later is different from the normal mode and the first RT mode. More specifically, in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 95, second fall replay replay winning data is set as winning data of index value IV = 9 to 14 in addition to normal replay winning data. . The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 14 is approximately 1 / 5.5.

  In the case of winning with index value IV = 9 in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 96, the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is In the case of the right reel 316R, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in the other cases, the second falling replay replay winning at the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324 Certainly occur regardless of the situation. When the index value IV = 10, the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning combination reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. When the index value IV = 11, the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R. This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning combination reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. When the index value IV = 12, the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning combination reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. When the index value IV = 13, the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning combination reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. When the index value IV = 14 is won, when the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, the normal replay winning is performed each time. This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning combination reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. When the second fall replay winning combination is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) is the first RT mode lottery table.

  Only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 15 in the second RT mode lottery table. The probability of winning with the index value IV = 15 is set higher than the probability of winning with the other part, and specifically, it is won with about 1 / 6.3. When the index value IV = 15 is won, the normal replay winning will be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R and the stop operation timing of the respective reels 316L, 316M, 316R. .

  In the second RT mode lottery table, an index value IV of 9 to 15 is set to enable the establishment of the replay winning. Then, the winning probability of these winning combinations is set to the probability as described above, so that the winning probability (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) of the winning combinations enabling the establishment of the replay winning in the second RT mode is approximately 1 It is /2.9. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 7.0. That is, the second RT mode is a gaming state in which the probability of replay is higher than that in the normal mode. On the other hand, the replay probability in the first RT mode is approximately 1 / 2.9. That is, the second RT mode has the same replay probability as the first RT mode. However, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the replay probability in the first RT mode is the same as the replay probability in the second RT mode. For example, although the replay probability is slightly different between the first RT mode and the second RT mode The second RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the first RT mode, or the first RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the second RT mode.

  The lottery table for the normal mode, the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the lottery table for the second RT mode are set in one-to-one correspondence with each of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and the setting value is high. Although the winning probability of the BB combination is higher as it is, the replay probability set in each lottery mode is the same or substantially the same regardless of which setting value. In addition, in a situation where one of the BB roles has been won, the first BB role and the second BB may be in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode so that the BB roles are not won in duplicate. The part is excluded from the lottery object. In addition to the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table in the main side ROM 343, the BB lottery referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) is also in the BB state. A table is stored. In the lottery table for BB, only three types of roles of bell, first watermelon and second watermelon are set as the lottery target roles, and the probability of winning the bell is set to about 1 / 1.1. The winning probability of the first watermelon combination is set to about 1/100, and the winning probability of the second watermelon combination is set to about 1/100. As a result, in the BB state, the expected number of game media to be provided per unit game number is higher than in other game states.

  Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 90), after selecting the lottery table (step S4702), the index value IV is set to "1" (step S4703), and the determination value DV used when determining the success or failure of the combination is set. (Step S4704). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the first determination value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S4701 is used as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to “1”, which is the current index value IV, is added to the random number value. A new judgment value DV is set.

  After that, it is judged whether or not the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV (step S4705). It is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds “65535” in the success or failure determination of the winning combination. If “65535” is exceeded, the winning data acquisition process for setting the data of the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 344 is executed (step S4706). In the winning data acquisition process, all the winning data set for the current index value IV in the reference lottery table is set in the main RAM 344. If the winning data is set, if the winning data is winning data other than BB winning data, “0” is cleared after the end of the current game regardless of the presence or absence of winnings corresponding to the winning data. In the case of winning data, "0" is cleared when a winning is achieved.

  If the determination value DV does not exceed “65535” (step S4705: NO), it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV has been lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (step S4707), and it is determined whether there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether there is a determination target to be determined as a success or failure (step S4708). Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV incremented by one has exceeded the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined whether the determination is yes or no, the process returns to step S4704 and continues the determination of the combination. At this time, in step S4704, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for the determination of success or failure of the previous combination to obtain a new determination value DV. In step S4705, it is determined whether or not a winning combination has been made on the basis of the determination value DV.

  When the process of step S4706 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S4708, it means that the determination on the winning combination of the winning combination has ended. In this case, after the stop information setting process for setting the stop information for reel stop control is executed (step S4709), the game start command is set as the transmission target to the effect MPU 352 (step S4710). The game start command is a command for causing the effect-side MPU 352 to recognize that a new game has been started, and the current game state in the game start command is any of the normal gaming state, the BB state, and the AT state. Information indicating whether there is any and information corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 90) in the current game are included.

  When the effect side MPU 352 receives the game start command, it grasps the contents of the outline of the effect in the current game based on the contents of the game start command, and the details of the effect in a mode according to the contents of the outline of the realized effect Determine the contents of the item by lottery. Then, a data table corresponding to the contents of the determined effect is read out from the effect side ROM 353 to the effect side RAM 354, light emission control of the upper lamp 332, sound output control of the speaker 333 and display of the image display device 334 according to the read data table Execute control.

  Next, the reel control process executed in step S4606 of the normal process (FIG. 89) will be described.

  In the reel control process, the rotation of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is started in the situation where the rotation of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R is not started. In this case, the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are driven and controlled to rotate at a constant speed after a predetermined acceleration period. The operation of each stop button 322 to 324 is invalid until the constant speed rotation is achieved.

  In the reel control process, the stop buttons 322 to 324 corresponding to the rotating reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are operated after the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R rotate at a constant speed, and the reels are operated. The reels 316L, 316M, and 316R corresponding to the stop buttons 322 to 324 are stopped. In this case, the information for stop control corresponding to the result of the lottery process (step S4605) of the combination in the current game and the timing at which the stop operation is performed, in the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R targeted for the stop operation. The number of slips until the symbol is actually stopped is determined based on the symbol existing at a predetermined position (for example, the lower part). Then, the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped at the timing when the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to be stopped are moved in the rotational direction by the determined slippage number. The slippage number is one of “0”, “1”, “2”, “3” and “4”. Moreover, while the number of slips makes it possible to stop on the main line ML of the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination as much as possible, the stop on the main line ML of the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination not winning is assured It is set to avoid. In the case of index values IV of IV = 1 to 3 and IV = 9 or later, the winning combination target is changed according to the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R, and thus the index value IV is won In this case, the stop control information is changed according to the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. Further, in the reel control process, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the main line ML when all the reels 316L, 316M, 316R have stopped. Then, if any of the replay wins is established, the replay bonus is awarded, and if any of the wins corresponding to the grant of the game medium is established, the prize is dealt. A setting is made to give a number of game media.

  Next, the response processing at the time of game end executed in step S4608 of the normal processing (FIG. 89) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the response processing at the end of the game, the value of the total game number counter 344a (see FIG. 86) provided in the main RAM 344 is incremented by 1 (step S4801). The total game number counter 344a is a counter for measuring the number of digested games regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the BB state, the AT state, or the ART state. In the AT state, it is more for the player than when the combination of symbols corresponding to the case where the stop order of the stop buttons 322 to 324 becomes the predetermined correct order is not the correct order by being established on the main line ML. In a situation in which a winning combination of winning prizes has been won, it refers to a state in which the stop order, which is the correct order, is notified. The lottery player corresponding to the stop order can be elected in either the non-AT state or the AT state, but the stop order which is the correct order in the non-AT state is not notified while the stop order is the correct order in the AT state Since the order is notified, the AT state is more advantageous to the player than the non-AT state. Specifically, in the AT state, when an index value IV of a winning combination is won according to the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R in the index values IV = 1 to 3 and the index values IV = 9 or later, If there is, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R for establishing a winning combination of winning combinations for the player is informed, and if it is in the non-AT state, such stop order notification is not executed. In addition, notification of the stop order, when the lottery process of the winning combination (Figure 90) is executed from the main MPU 342 to the effect side MPU 352 a game start command corresponding to the lottery result is transmitted, based on the game start command The display control of the image display device 334 by the MPU 352 is started before the reels 316L, 316M, 316R can be stopped in the game corresponding to the execution time of the lottery process (FIG. 90) of the combination. The ART state is a gaming state in which the user is staying in the first RT mode or the second RT mode in the AT state. In the ART state, the probability of establishing a replay winning is increased, and the expected number of game media to be granted in one game is increased as described above. Therefore, it becomes possible to make an ART state into an advantageous gaming state.

  In the response processing at the end of the game, when it is in the winning state or BB state of any of the BB roles (step S4802: YES), processing for BB is executed (step S4803). In the processing for BB, if any BB role has been won, it is determined whether or not a BB prize corresponding to the BB role that has been won has occurred in the current game, and a BB prize is generated. If it is, then the gaming state is shifted to the BB state by setting "1" to the BB state flag provided in the main RAM 344. As a result, in the lottery process (FIG. 90) of the winning combination in the next and subsequent games, the BB lottery table is referred to. Further, by transmitting a command indicating transition to the BB state to the effect side MPU 352, the top lamp 332, the speaker 333 and the image display device 334 start the effect for the BB state. The BB winning data is deleted from the main side RAM 344 when shifting to the BB state, thereby releasing the BB winning state. Further, the same BB state is obtained regardless of whether the first BB winning or the second BB winning occurs.

  In the processing for BB in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the addition of gaming media has occurred in the current game, and when the provision of gaming media is occurring, the total number of grants provided in the main RAM 344 is used. The number of game media provided in the current game is added. Then, it is determined whether the value of the total grant number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the end reference number. If it is less than the value corresponding to the end reference number, the processing for BB is ended as it is. If it is equal to or more than the value corresponding to the end reference number, the BB state is ended by clearing the BB state flag of the main RAM 344 to "0". Also, by transmitting a command indicating that the BB state has ended to the effect side MPU 352, an ending image is displayed on the image display device 334, and thereafter, for the BB state in the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333 and the image display device 334. End the production of.

  When the BB state ends, the lottery mode is the normal mode even if the lottery mode before the start of the BB state is any mode. In addition, when the BB state is started in the AT state, the ART preparation state processing described later is performed after the BB state ends regardless of the state before the start of the BB state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4802 or if the process of step S4803 is performed, it is determined whether it is in the AT state (step S4804). If it is not in the AT state (step S4804: NO), RT mode transition processing (step S4805) and transition opportunity management processing (step S4806) are executed. When the stop operation on the middle reel 316M or the right reel 316R is first performed in the game in the state of neither BB state nor AT state, a notification indicating that the stop operation should be performed from the left reel 316L is executed. However, no penalty is imposed to limit the giving of benefits in subsequent games.

  In the RT mode transition process (step S4805), when it is specified that the first RT replay winning has occurred in the current game, the first RT mode is entered, and the second RT replay winning occurs in the current game. If it is determined that there is a switch to the second RT mode. In addition, in the transition process of the RT mode, when it is specified that the second fall replay winning combination has occurred in the current game, the transition to the first RT mode is made, and the first fall replay winning combination occurs in the current game. If it is determined that there is a change to the normal mode.

  In the transition chance management process (step S4806), as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 98, it is determined whether or not a special combination is won in the lottery process (FIG. 90) of the combination in the current game (step S4901). The special role is any of index values IV = 4 to 6. If the special combination is won (step S4901: YES), it is determined whether "1" is set in the advantage restriction flag provided in the main side RAM 344 (step S4902). The advantageous restriction flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 342 that the transition to the AT state (that is, the ART state) is prohibited. The process in the case where “1” is set to the advantageous restriction flag will be described later.

  If “1” is not set in the advantage restriction flag (step S4902: NO), the transition lottery table corresponding to the content of the stock bonus is read from the main side ROM 343 to the main side RAM 344. The stock benefits can be accumulated when the special role is won in the lottery process (FIG. 90) in the normal gaming state and the advantage restriction flag of the main side RAM 344 is set to "1". It is a privilege. The stock benefits are set in six stages of “0” to “5”, and the stock benefits are “0” in the situation where there is no accumulated benefit. In the transition lottery table corresponding to the stock benefit being "0", when it is elected with index value IV = 4, AT transition is won with a probability of 5% and it is won with index value IV = 5 In this case, the AT transition is won with a probability of 10%, and when it is elected with the index value IV = 6, the AT transition is won with a probability of 15%. The contents of the transition lottery table to be referred to when the stock benefits are “1” to “5” will be described later.

  After the transition lottery table is read in step S4903, an AT transition lottery process is executed (step S4904). In the AT transition lottery process, the value of the transition lottery counter periodically (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) is updated in the main side RAM 344 and the read transition lottery counter value is read against the transition lottery table. Match.

  When the AT transition is won in the transition lottery process to the AT state (step S4905: YES), the initial game number lottery table corresponding to the contents of the stock bonus is read from the main ROM 343 to the main RAM 344 (step S4906). In the initial game number lottery table corresponding to the stock benefit being "0", the probability that 50 games will be selected is 90%, the probability that 100 games will be selected is 9%, and 200 games will be selected. Probability of being 1%. The contents of the initial game number lottery table to be referred to when the stock benefits are “1” to “5” will be described later.

  After the initial game number lottery table is read in step S4906, an initial game number lottery process is executed (step S4907). In the initial game number lottery process, the value of the game number lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) is read in the main side RAM 344 and the read game number lottery counter value is used as the initial game number Check against the lottery table. Then, the initial game number corresponding to the comparison result is set in the ART game number counter provided in the main RAM 344 (step S4908).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the current RT mode is the second RT mode (step S4909). In the case of the second RT mode (step S4909: YES), there is no need to wait for promotion to the second RT mode in the AT state, so this transition chance management process is ended as it is. As a result, the gaming state is the AT state, and the ART state is the second RT mode. In this case, a command indicating that the ART state has been started is transmitted to the effect MPU 352. By receiving the command, the effect side MPU 352 causes the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333 and the image display device 334 to perform an effect indicating that the ART state has been started, and thereafter performs an effect corresponding to the ART state It is performed by the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333 and the image display device 334. After that, the value of the stock benefit counter provided in the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S4909). The stock benefit counter is a counter for identifying the presence / absence of the stock benefit and the value of the stock benefit with the main MPU 342.

  If it is not the second RT mode (step S4910: NO), it is necessary to wait for promotion to the second RT mode as the ART preparation state, so "1" is set in the ART preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 344 (Step S4911). The ART preparation state flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 342 that the ART preparation state is set.

  Returning to the explanation of the response processing at the end of the game (FIG. 97), when the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 is 1 or more or when the ART preparation status flag of the main RAM 344 is set to "1" In step S4804, an affirmative determination is made. In this case, the ART preparation state processing is executed (step S4808) on condition that "1" is set in the ART preparation state flag of the main RAM 344 (step S4807: YES).

  In the ART preparation state processing, it is determined whether or not promotion to the second RT mode has occurred, and when promotion to the second RT mode has occurred, the ART preparation state flag of the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0". Thereby, the gaming state shifts from the AT state to the ART state. Also, a command indicating that the ART state has been started is transmitted to the effect MPU 352. By receiving the command, the effect side MPU 352 causes the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333 and the image display device 334 to perform an effect indicating that the ART state has been started, and thereafter performs an effect corresponding to the ART state It is performed by the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333 and the image display device 334.

  In addition, when the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, regardless of whether or not "1" is set in the ART preparation state flag, the player is elected with any of index values IV = 1 to 3 In this case, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for notifying the establishment of the bell winning is notified. Further, when the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, regardless of whether or not "1" is set in the ART preparation state flag, the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 91) or the lottery for the first RT mode When one of index values IV = 9 to 12 in the table (FIG. 93) is won, the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R for establishing the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning is notified. . In addition, when the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the index value IV = 1 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 93) regardless of whether or not the ART preparation state flag is set to "1". When the player wins the game in any one of 13 to 18, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for establishing the regular replay winning is notified.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4807, ART state processing is executed (step S4809). FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing ART state processing.

  First, the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b (see FIG. 86) provided in the main RAM 344 is incremented by one (step S5001). The advantageous game number counter 344 b is a counter for measuring the number of games digested until the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 becomes “0” after the transition to the ART state occurs. The value of the advantageous game number counter 344b is maintained without being cleared to "0" even if the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. . That is, the advantageous game number counter 344b is used to measure the total number of games generated in a plurality of ART states.

  Thereafter, RT mode transition processing is executed (step S5002). In the transition process of the RT mode, when it is identified that the first RT replay winning has occurred, the first RT mode is entered, and when it is identified that the second RT replay winning is identified, the second RT mode is entered. When it is determined that the first fall re-play prize has occurred, the mode is shifted to the normal mode, and when it is specified that the second fall re-play prize has occurred, the mode is shifted to the first RT mode.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special combination is won in the lottery process (FIG. 90) of the combination in the current game (step S5003). The special role is any of index values IV = 4 to 6. If the special combination is won (step S5003: YES), the additional lottery process for the number of continuing games is executed (step S5004). In the continuation game number addition lottery process, it is determined whether or not to add the number of continued games in the ART state, and when the addition is performed, the number of added games is determined. In the continuation game number addition lottery process, the continuation game number addition lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 to 6 is read from the main side ROM 343 and periodically (eg, 1.49 msec cycle) in the main side RAM 344 The value of the updated game number lottery counter is read, and the value of the lottery counter is collated with the number-of-continuous-games addition lottery table. The continuation drawing number addition lottery table is set such that the probability that the addition will occur in the order of IV = 4 → IV = 5 → IV = 6 is high, and the number of expected acquisition games of the addition game increases in the order. ing. If it is determined that the additional game is won in the continuing game number additional lottery process (step S5005: YES), the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process is added to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 (step S5006) .

  If a negative determination is made in step S5003, a negative determination is made in step S5005, or if the process of step S5006 is performed, the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 is decremented by 1 (step S5007). Then, if the value of the ART game number counter after the one subtraction is “0” (step S5008: YES), an ART state end process is executed (step S5009). In the end process, a command indicating that the ART state has ended is transmitted to the effect MPU 352. The effect side MPU 352 receives the command, and after the effect indicating the end of the ART state is executed, the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333 and the image display device 334 so that the effect corresponding to the normal gaming state is executed. Control each of the

  Returning to the explanation of the response processing at the end of the game (FIG. 97), when the processing of step S4806 is executed, when the processing of step S4808 is executed, or when the processing of step S4809 is executed, (Step S4810). When receiving the game end command, the effect side MPU 352 controls each of the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333 and the image display device 334 so that the effect executed in the current game is ended. Thereafter, game management processing is executed (step S4811).

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing game management processing.

  In the game management process, when “1” is not set in the advantage restriction flag of the main side RAM 344 (step S5101: NO), the value of the total game number counter 344a of the main side RAM 344 is a value corresponding to the management trigger game number. It is determined whether it is "3000" or more (step S5102). The number of management trigger games is not limited to 3000 games, and may be 6000 games, for example. Further, the number of management trigger games is not limited to the configuration set to less than the maximum number of games that can be consumed in one business day in the game hall, and is set to about the maximum number of games It is good also as composition which is set as more than the number of the maximum games concerned. When the value of the total game number counter 344a is equal to or more than the management trigger game number (step S5102: YES), the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b of the main RAM 344 to the value of the total game number counter 344a Step S5103). That is, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result = “value of the advantageous game number counter 344b” / “value of the total game number counter 344a”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the calculation result exceeds the rate of the regulation target (step S5104). Specifically, it is determined whether the value calculated as a result of step S5103 exceeds “0.7”, which is the ratio of the control target. That is, when the total number of games in all gaming states including the normal gaming state, BB state, AT state and ART state reaches 3000 games, it is digested in the ART state or in the AT state after the ART state is started It is determined whether or not the total number of games exceeds 2100 games, which is 70% of 3000 games.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S5104, calculation processing of the number of restricted games is executed (step S5105). In the process of calculating the number of restricted games, the number of restricted games for which the transition to the AT state and the ART state is prohibited is performed in order to ensure that the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games falls below the ratio of regulated objects. Specifically, the number of restricted games = "value of the advantageous game number counter 344b"-"value of the total game number counter 344a" x "percentage of restriction target (that is," 0.7 ") +" number of additional games (specifically In practice, "100" is calculated. Then, the value of the calculated restriction game number is set in the restriction game number counter provided in the main RAM 344 (step S5106). The restricted game number counter is a counter for specifying the number of games for which the transition to the AT state and the ART state is prohibited by the main MPU 342. Further, “1” is set to the advantageous restriction flag of the main side RAM 344 (step S5107). This prohibits the transition to the AT state and the ART state.

  After that, when “1” is set in the ART preparation state flag of the main side RAM 344 (step S 5108: YES), the ART preparation state flag is cleared “0” as various clear processing and the ART game of the main side RAM 344 is performed. The number counter is cleared to "0" (step S5109). As a result, when "1" is set to the advantageous restriction flag of the main RAM 344 in the ART preparation state, the ART preparation state is ended without transition to the ART state. In this case, since the AT state ends, notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R for establishing the first RT replay win or the second RT replay win is not executed, and the first fall replay Notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for avoiding establishment of a winning or second falling replay winning is not performed. Thereafter, the normal return process is executed (step S5110). In the normal return process, a normal return command is transmitted to the effect MPU 352. When the effect side MPU 352 receives the normal return command, an effect indicating that the ART preparation state has ended and the normal gaming state is returned is executed without a transition to the ART state, and thereafter, the normal gaming state is made. Each of the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333 and the image display device 334 is controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

  If "1" is not set in the ART preparation status flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5108: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 is 1 or more (step S5111) . If the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more (YES in step S5111), that is, if it is in the ART state, the value of the ART game number counter is cleared to "0" (step S5112). As a result, if "1" is set in the advantage restriction flag of the main RAM 344 in the ART state, the ART state is ended even if the number of continued games in the ART state remains. In this case, since the AT state ends, notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R for establishing the first RT replay win or the second RT replay win is not executed, and the first fall replay Notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for avoiding establishment of a winning or second falling replay winning is not performed.

  Thereafter, an ART state termination process is executed (step S5113). In the end process, as in step S5009 in the ART state process (FIG. 99), a command indicating that the ART state has ended is transmitted to the effect MPU 352. The effect side MPU 352 receives the command, and after the effect indicating the end of the ART state is executed, the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333 and the image display device 334 so that the effect corresponding to the normal gaming state is executed. Control each of the The effect executed in this case is executed when the process of step S5009 in the ART state process (FIG. 99) is executed, that is, when the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 becomes "0" Same as the production. As a result, when the ART state ends, the ART state ends when the ART state ends, triggered by the fact that the advantage restriction flag of the main RAM 344 is set to “1” in the middle of the ART state, and It becomes possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to recognize which of the cases where the ART state is ended, which is triggered by the fact that the number of continuing games is “0”.

  Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 101 (a), in the ART state, any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 and the index value IV = 9 or later in the lottery process (FIG. 90) of the winning combination When the player wins the event, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R is informed. In FIG. 101 (a), an image G1 showing stopping the middle reel 316M first, an image G2 showing stopping the left reel 316L next, and an image G3 showing stopping the right reel 316R finally And are displayed. As described above, in the situation where the image notifying the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R is displayed, the ART state of the current time is started at the upper left corner portion of the image display device 334, A digested game number image G4 (specifically, an image of "30 games continuing") showing the number of games digested before the value of the game number counter reaches "0" is displayed. In the lower part of the image display device 334, a character image G5 "How long will it be continued?" Is displayed.

  However, the image display device 334 does not display an image notifying the remaining number of continued games in the current ART state, that is, the value set in the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344. Further, the notification that allows the player to recognize the number of remaining continuous games in the current ART state is not executed including the image display device 334. As a result, when the value of the total game number counter 344a becomes equal to or more than the value corresponding to the management trigger game number, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a exceeds the ratio of the regulation target In this case, even if the ART state is forcibly terminated even in the middle of the ART state, the termination of the ART state is due to the forced termination or the number of continuing games in the ART state is "0". It is possible to make it impossible for the player to grasp whether or not the player has become a player.

  Returning to the explanation of the game number management process (FIG. 100), when the process of step S5110 is executed, the negative determination is made in step S5111, or the process of step S5113 is executed, the total game number counter of the main RAM 344 Each of the value of 344a and the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b of the main side RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S5114). On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5102 or if a negative determination is made in step S5104, the process of step S5114 is not executed. As a result, the value of the total game number counter 344a becomes the management trigger game number and the execution restriction of the AT state and the ART state is generated, and managed using the total game number counter 344a and the advantageous game number counter 344b. The existing game history is temporarily cleared to "0".

  The present invention is not limited to this, and the process of step S5114 may be executed even when a negative determination is made in step S5104. In this case, when the value of the total game number counter 344a becomes equal to or greater than the management trigger game number, the total number of games is set regardless of whether or not "1" is set in the advantage restriction flag of the main RAM 344. The game history managed using the counter 344a and the advantageous game number counter 344b is temporarily cleared to "0".

  If “1” is set in the advantage restriction flag of the main RAM 344, the transition chance management process (FIG. 98) makes an affirmative determination in step S 4902. In this case, a stock lottery process for providing stock benefits is executed (step S4912). Granting Stock Benefits In the lottery process, it is determined whether or not stock benefits are to be granted. More specifically, in the stock lottery process for providing stock benefits, the lottery table for providing stock benefits corresponding to each of index values IV = 4 to 6 is read from main ROM 343, and periodically (eg, 1.49 msec in main RAM 344). The value of the stock benefit lottery counter updated in the cycle) is read out, and the value of the lottery counter is collated with the above-mentioned stock benefit given lottery table. The stock bonus grant lottery table is set such that the probability of winning the stock bonus is high in the order of IV = 4 → IV = 5 → IV = 6. If it is determined that the award is won in the award lottery process of the stock benefit (step S4913: YES), the value of the stock benefit counter provided in the main RAM 344 is incremented by 1 (step S4914).

  Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 101 (b), when the value of the stock benefit counter is 1 or more, a stock benefit image G6 indicating that the stock benefit is provided is displayed on the image display device 334. Be done. Further, the number-of-benefits number image G7 is displayed in the same number as the number of stock benefits granted. In the case of FIG. 101 (b), since the value of the stock benefit counter is "2", two benefit number images G7 are displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the stock bonus is given, and to make it possible for the player to recognize the number of the stock bonus given.

  If a stock bonus is given, in step S4903 of the transition chance management process (FIG. 98), the shift lottery table corresponding to the value of the stock bonus given is read out. In this case, the transition lottery table advantageous to the player is read out as the value of the stock bonus is larger. Specifically, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock bonus is “0” as described above, the AT transition is won with a probability of 5% when the index value IV = 4 is won. When it is elected with index value IV = 5, it is set that AT transition is won with a probability of 10%, and when it is elected with index value IV = 6, it is elected with AT probability of 15%. ing. On the other hand, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock bonus is “1”, the AT transition is won with a probability of 15% when the index value IV = 4 is won, and the index value IV = In the case of winning in 5, the AT transition is won with a probability of 20%, and when the index value IV = 6 is won, the AT transition is won with a probability of 25%. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock bonus is “2”, when it is elected with index value IV = 4, the AT transition is won with a probability of 25%, and it is elected with index value IV = 5 In this case, the AT transition is won with a probability of 30%, and the AT transition is won with a probability of 35% when the index value IV = 6 is won. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock bonus is “3”, when it is elected with index value IV = 4, AT transition is won with a probability of 35%, and it is elected with index value IV = 5 In this case, the AT transition is won with a probability of 40%, and when the index value IV = 6, the AT transition is won with a 45% probability. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock bonus is “4”, when it is elected with index value IV = 4, AT transition is won with a probability of 45%, and it is elected with index value IV = 5 In this case, the AT transition is won with a probability of 50%, and when the index value IV = 6 is won, the AT transition is won with a probability of 55%. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock bonus is “5”, when it is elected with index value IV = 4, AT transition is won with a probability of 55%, and it is elected with index value IV = 5 In this case, the AT transition is won at a probability of 60%, and the AT transition is won at a probability of 65% when the index value IV = 6. With the above-described configuration, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the provision of the stock bonus, and even in the situation in which "1" is set in the advantage restriction flag of the main RAM 344. It is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with winning the special part in the part lottery process (FIG. 90). Since the process of clearing the stock benefit counter of the main RAM 344 to "0" is executed when the AT transition is won in the AT transition lottery process, the AT transition in the AT transition lottery is performed until the AT transition is won. The probability of winning will not decrease.

  If the stock bonus is granted, the initial game number lottery table corresponding to the value of the stock bonus given is read out in step S4906 of the transition chance management process (FIG. 98). In this case, the larger the stock bonus value is, the more useful the initial game number lottery table for the player is read out. Specifically, as described above, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock bonus is “0”, the probability that 50 games are selected is 90%, and the probability that 100 games are selected is It is 9% and the probability that 200 games are selected is 1%. On the other hand, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock bonus is “1”, the probability of 50 games being selected is 80%, and the probability of 100 games being selected is 14%. The probability that 200 games are selected is 6%. In addition, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock benefit is “2”, the probability of 50 games being selected is 70%, and the probability of 100 games being selected is 19%, and 200 games The probability of being selected is 11%. Also, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "3", the probability of 50 games being selected is 60%, and the probability of 100 games being selected is 24%, 200 games The probability of being selected is 16%. In addition, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock bonus is "4", the probability of 50 games being selected is 50%, and the probability of 100 games being selected is 29%, and 200 games The probability that is selected is 21%. In addition, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock bonus is "5", the probability of selecting 50 games is 40%, and the probability of selecting 100 games is 34%. The probability of being selected is 26%. With the above-described configuration, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the provision of the stock bonus, and even in the situation in which "1" is set in the advantage restriction flag of the main RAM 344. It is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with winning the special part in the part lottery process (FIG. 90).

  Returning to the description of the game management process (FIG. 100), when the advantage restriction flag of the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5101: YES), the value of the restriction game number counter of the main RAM 344 is decremented by one. (Step S5115). Then, if the value of the restricted game number counter after the one subtraction is “0” (step S5116: YES), the advantage restriction flag of the main RAM 344 is cleared to “0” (step S5117). As a result, the execution of the AT state and the ART state is released. Incidentally, the value of the restricted game number counter is not notified, and the notification indicating that the state in which the execution of the AT state and the ART state is restricted is canceled is not executed. As a result, it is possible to make it impossible for the player to grasp at what timing the release of the regulation occurs.

  Next, a management process executed by the main MPU 342 in order to manage the game history and report the management result will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 102. The management process is executed in step S4513 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

  First, the value of the total game number counter 344a of the main RAM 344 is grasped (step S5201), and the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b of the main RAM 344 is grasped (step S5202). Then, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b of the main side RAM 344 to the value of the total game number counter 344a is calculated (step S5203). That is, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result = “value of the advantageous game number counter 344b” / “value of the total game number counter 344a”. Then, among the values obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100, the first place is displayed on the first notification display device 346, the tenth place is displayed on the second notification display device 347, and the first place is the second. The first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 are subjected to display control without being intervened by another control device so as to be displayed on the 3 notification display device 348 (step S5204). The calculation result is reported as a percentage display. Specifically, if the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100 is "35", "0" is displayed on the first notification display device 346, and "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 347. In the third notification display device 348, "5" is displayed. Further, for example, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is “100”, “1” is displayed in the first notification display device 346, “0” is displayed in the second notification display device 347, and 3 “0” is displayed on the notification display device 348.

  By executing the management process as described above, the management results of the game history are constantly displayed on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348, and the game hall manager is the front door 312. By viewing the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 in the open state, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history. In addition, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is executed in a cycle shorter than the shortest period required for the completion of one game, and further, the shortest time required from the end of one game to the start of the next one It is executed in a cycle shorter than the period. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can grasp the management result of the history of the games up to the game completed immediately before by visually observing the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348.

  Next, a flowchart of FIG. 103 is applied to the illumination processing for executing the light emission control of the illumination devices 349a and 349b provided for the purpose of irradiating the main controller 340 with light when the front door 312 is opened. It explains, referring to it. The illumination process is executed in step S4514 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

  When light is not emitted from the illumination devices 349a and 349b (step S5301: NO), it is determined whether the front door 312 is in the open state based on the state of the signal input from the opening angle sensor 312e. (Step S5302). If the front door 312 is in the open state (step S5302: YES), it is determined whether the opening angle of the front door 312 is within a predetermined angle range (step S5303). Specifically, based on the state of the signal input from the opening angle sensor 312e, it is determined whether the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle. The predetermined opening angle is set as an angle of 86% with respect to the maximum opening angle of the front door 312. Specifically, since the state in which the front door 312 is opened 90 ° with respect to the housing 311 is the maximum opening angle of the front door 312, the state in which the front door 312 is opened about 77 ° with respect to the housing 311 is predetermined Is set to the opening angle of. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5303, that is, if the front door 312 is not closed and the opening angle of the front door 312 is 77 ° or less, a drive signal is output to the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b (step S5304). As a result, light is emitted from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b to the irradiation range IR including the main control device 340. The light irradiation state is continued until the process of step S5306 described later is executed.

  When light is emitted from the illumination devices 349a and 349b (step S5301: YES), the front door 312 is closed or the front door 312 is closed based on the state of the signal input from the open angle sensor 312e. It is determined whether the opening angle exceeds a predetermined opening angle (step S5305). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5305, the output of drive signals to the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is stopped (step S5306). As a result, the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b are in the non-illumination state, and the irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b toward the irradiation range IR is stopped.

  Here, the relationship between the opening angle of the front door 312 and the control state of the illumination devices 349a and 349b will be described with reference to time charts of FIGS. 104 (a) and 104 (b). FIG. 104 (a) shows the state of the front door 312, and FIG. 104 (b) shows the control state of the illumination devices 349a and 349b. In the following description, FIGS. 105 (a) and 105 (b) will be referred to as appropriate. Fig. 105 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the state of the illumination devices 349a and 349b when the front door 312 is in the open state and the opening angle is equal to or less than the predetermined opening angle. ) Is an explanatory view for explaining the state of the illuminating devices 349a and 349b in the case where the opening angle of the front door 312 is the maximum opening angle exceeding a predetermined opening angle.

  First, the case where the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped in a situation where the opening angle of the front door 312 is equal to or less than the predetermined opening angle will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (a), in the state where the front door 312 is in the closed state, the opening operation of the front door 312 is started at the timing of t1. In this case, irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is started as shown in FIG. 104 (b) at the timing of t1. Thereafter, the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped in a state before the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle at the timing of t2. In this state, light is emitted from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b to the main control device 340 as shown in FIG. 105 (a). Thus, even if the front door 312 is slightly opened, the main control device 340 is illuminated brightly, so the game hall manager can use the board box 345 of the main control device 340 and the first to third notifications. It becomes possible to visually check the display contents of the display devices 346 to 348. In this case, since it is not necessary to open the front door 312 to the end in the confirmation operation, the confirmation operation can be facilitated.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the closing operation of the front door 312 is started at the timing of t3, and the front door 312 is closed at the timing of t4. In this case, the irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is stopped as shown in FIG. 104 (b) at the timing of t4.

  Next, the case where the opening operation of the front door 312 is performed until the opening angle of the front door 312 becomes the maximum opening angle will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (a), in the state where the front door 312 is in the closed state, the opening operation of the front door 312 is started at the timing of t5. In this case, irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is started as shown in FIG. 104 (b) at the timing of t5. Thereafter, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle. As a result, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is stopped at the timing of t6.

  Thereafter, the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped in a state where the opening angle of the front door 312 becomes the maximum opening angle at the timing of t7. In this state, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b to the main control device 340 is not performed. When the opening angle exceeds the predetermined opening angle as in the case where the opening angle of the front door 312 becomes the maximum opening angle, the inside of the housing 311 is illuminated by the light of the in-store illumination of the game hall and sunlight. . In this case, if the main control device 340 is illuminated by the lighting devices 349a and 349b, the visibility of the main control device 340 and the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 may be reduced. Be done. On the other hand, when the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle, such inconvenience occurs by stopping the irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b. It becomes possible not to do so.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104A, the closing operation of the front door 312 is started at the timing of t8, and the opening angle of the front door 312 becomes equal to or less than the predetermined opening angle at the timing of t9. In this case, irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is started as shown in FIG. 104 (b) at the timing of t9. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the front door 312 is closed at the timing of t10. In this case, irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is stopped at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The total number of games digested regardless of the gaming state is measured by the total game number counter 344a of the main side RAM 344 and the ART state or the number of games digested in the AT state after the ART state is started is the main It is accumulated and measured by the advantageous game number counter 344b of the side RAM 344. Then, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated, and when the calculated ratio is the ratio of the control target, the progress of the game is restricted. This makes it possible to restrict the progress of the game according to the generation state of the ART state, and when the generation state of the ART state does not match the aspect assumed in the design stage of the slot machine 310, It becomes possible to cope.

  When restriction is given to the progress of the game according to the calculation result of the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the restriction of the progress of the game is given such that the ratio deviates from the ratio of the regulation target. Thereby, even if the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games becomes the ratio of the control target, it becomes possible to make the ratio become the ratio of the range assumed in the design stage of the slot machine 310. .

  If the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is the ratio of the regulation target, the ART state is ended even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 is not "0". This makes it possible to forcibly terminate the ART state when the above ratio becomes the restriction target, and the generation state of the ART state does not match the one assumed at the design stage of the slot machine 310. In such a case, it is possible to restrict the execution mode of the gaming state.

  If the total number of games measured in the total game number counter 344a is equal to or greater than the number of management trigger games which is the number of games larger than the number of continuing games of the ART state that can be initially set when the ART state is newly started. In this situation, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated, and the ART state is forcibly ended when the calculated ratio is the ratio of the control target. This makes it possible to suppress the frequency of forced termination of the ART state.

  In the ART state, the remaining number of continued games in the ART state is not notified. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the ART state is forcibly ended because the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games becomes the ratio of the regulation target.

  When the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games becomes the ratio of the regulation target, the transition to the ART state is regulated. This makes it possible to forcibly block transition to the ART state according to the generation state of the ART state, and the generation state of the ART state does not match the aspect assumed in the design stage of the slot machine 310. In some cases, it is possible to restrict the execution mode of the gaming state.

  Depending on the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the period in which the transition to the ART state is restricted may vary. This makes it possible to prevent the limit of transition to the ART state from being set too small or too large regardless of the above ratio.

  When the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is the ratio of the restriction target, the transition to the ART state is prevented, and the special combination is won in the lottery process of the combination (FIG. 90). Although, the process for determining whether or not to shift to the ART state is not executed, stock benefits are provided as alternative benefits. As a result, in a situation where the transition to the ART state is compulsorily inhibited, it is possible for the player not to think that it was useless when winning the special role in the lottery process (FIG. 90) for the role in the situation where the transition to the ART state is forced It is possible to

  The more stock benefits granted, the more advantageous it is for the player. This makes it possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for winning the special part in the lottery process of the part (FIG. 90) even in a situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly inhibited. Become.

  If a stock benefit is granted, a corresponding alert is performed. This makes it possible to prevent the loss of the player's desire to continue the game even in a situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly inhibited.

  If stock benefits are granted, the transition to the ART state is likely to occur after the forced transition to the ART state is released. This makes it possible to associate the granting of stock benefits with the transition to the ART state. Therefore, even if the special winning combination is won in the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 90) in the situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly inhibited, the player is required to transition to the ART state. It can be expected.

  By providing the illumination devices 349a and 349b for illuminating the main control device 340, it becomes easy to perform the confirmation work of the main control device 340 performed by opening the front door 312. In this case, when the front door 312 is closed, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are not illuminated. This makes it possible to prevent the lighting devices 349a and 349b from becoming meaninglessly in the state of lighting when the main controller 340 is not checked. In addition, when the opening operation of the front door 312 is performed, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are naturally in the illumination state. As a result, there is no need to separately perform an operation for setting the illumination devices 349a and 349b in the illumination state, and thus the confirmation operation of the main control device 340 can be facilitated.

  The illumination devices 349a and 349b are provided in a housing 311 in which the main controller 340 is provided. This makes it easy to illuminate the main control device 340 by the illumination devices 349a and 349b according to the opening operation of the front door 312.

  Even when the front door 312 is disposed in any open position, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are not in the illumination state, and the illumination devices 349a and 349b selectively illuminate in some open positions. It becomes a state. As a result, when the illumination devices 349a and 349b are in the illumination state only when the main controller 340 is checked and the illumination devices 349a and 349b are in the illumination state, it is difficult to confirm the main controller 340. The illumination devices 349a and 349b can be brought into the non-illumination state.

  When the front door 312 is in the maximum open position, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are in a non-lighting state. As a result, in a situation where the main control device 340 is illuminated sufficiently brightly by the illumination of the game hall, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are in the non-illumination state, so the illumination by the illumination devices 349a and 349b makes the main control device 340 It is possible to prevent inconvenience such as difficulty in performing confirmation.

Another Form of the Seventeenth Embodiment
-The total game number of the digested game regardless of which gaming state and the advantageous game number which is the total of the digested game in the ART state are stored as history information, and the advantageous game number relative to the total game number However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the lottery process (FIG. 90) for a combination, the number of winnings of a predetermined combination to be a target of the lottery and the total number of games are stored as history information. The winning probability of the predetermined combination may be calculated. In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as the predetermined combination to be targeted, and the number of winnings is individually stored as history information for each of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination as well as the first combination. The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. Further, the number of winnings may be individually stored as history information for each of all the winning combinations, and the winning probability may be calculated for each of the winning combinations. This makes it possible to notify the administrator of the gaming hall of the winning probability of the part to be managed.

  Further, the total number of game media provided and the total game number may be stored as history information, and the number of game media provided per unit game may be calculated. As a result, it is possible to notify the administrator of the gaming hall of the number of provided gaming media per unit game. Also, the combination of the total number of game media grants and the total game number is stored as history information individually for each of BB state, ART state and normal gaming state, and the number of game media awarded per unit game number is The BB state, the ART state and the normal gaming state may be individually calculated.

  Further, the number of transitions to the BB state and the total number of games in the game state not in the BB state may be stored as history information to calculate the transition probability to the BB state. Further, the number of transitions to the ART state and the total number of games in the game state which is not the ART state may be stored as history information to calculate the transition probability to the ART state. Also, the total transition number to the BB state and the ART state and the total number of games of the game digested in the gaming state not in the BB state and the ART state are stored as history information, and the transition probability to the BB state and the ART state is It may be configured to calculate.

  The display of each determination result in the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 may be started when the display period of the check result is reached and ended when the display period of the check result is ended. . Further, when it is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the front door 312 that the front door 312 is opened relative to the housing 311, each determination immediately before in the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 The display of the result is started, and the first to third notification display devices are detected when it is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the front door 312 that the front door 312 is closed with respect to the housing 311. The display of each determination result in 3346 to 348 may be finished. In this case, it is possible to limit the period in which the display is performed in the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348.

  -Although it was set as the structure which does not alert | report the remaining continuation game number of an ART state, it is good also as composition which the said continuation game number is alert | reported. In this case, when the ART state is forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the image display device 334 may notify the reason for the forced termination. . This makes it possible to prevent the player from being confused with the forced termination of the ART state despite the fact that the number of continued games in the ART state is not "0". It becomes.

  Also, if the number of continuing games in the ART state is more than the number of games in which the ART state is forcibly ended due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the ART state is forced Alternatively, the number of remaining games until the game is ended may be notified as the number of continuing games in the ART state. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the ART state is forcibly ended.

  In addition, the ART state ends until the number of games in which the ART state is forcibly ended due to the relationship between the number of continued games in the ART state and the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total game number becomes 10 games. The configuration may be configured such that the number of remaining games up to is not notified, and the number of remaining games until the ART state ends may be notified when any of these games becomes 10 games. In this case, it is possible to make the player recognize that the ART state is less than 10 games remaining, and to prevent the player from feeling discomfort even if the ART state is forcibly ended. It becomes possible.

  -If the number of continuing games in the ART state is equal to or more than the number of games in which the ART state is forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the remaining continuation of the ART state Even if an opportunity to increase the number of games occurs, the addition may not occur.

  -If the ART state is forcibly ended due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the next ART state due to the number of continued games remaining in the ART state at the time of the forced termination It is good also as composition which changes the degree of advantage of. For example, the larger the number of continued games in the next ART state may be, or the number of continued games in the next ART state may increase, as the number of remaining consecutive games in the ART state increases when forced termination occurs. It is good also as composition which becomes easy to occur. This makes it possible to compensate for the occurrence of the forcible termination of the ART state at the stage where the number of remaining consecutive games in the ART state is large, in accordance with the remaining number of continued games.

  The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the notification of the calculation result using the game history is performed by the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348. For example, using the credit display portion 335 and the granted number display portion 336 It is good also as composition performed. As a result, it is possible to use the credit display unit 335 and the provision number display unit 336 as a display unit for notifying of the calculation result. Further, in the configuration, when there are a plurality of types of events to be notified, as in the thirteenth embodiment, the events to be notified of each type are sequentially switched and displayed. Good. In such a case, the type of the event to be notified is displayed on the credit display unit 335, for example, and the calculation result for the notification target event or the content of the calculation result is displayed on the credit display unit 335, for example. The information corresponding to may be displayed. As a result, even if there are a plurality of types of events to be notified, it is possible to make a notification on the plurality of types of events to be notified using a small number of display units.

  A counter for measuring the game history up to the number of management trigger games (specifically, 3000 games), and a counter for measuring the game history beyond the number of management trigger games may be provided. In this case, the former counter is used to perform calculation using the game history until the number of management trigger games is reached, and control corresponding to the calculation result is performed. Then, when the calculation is performed, the former counter is cleared to “0”. On the other hand, the latter counter is configured to cumulatively store the game history without performing “0” clear even if the above calculation is performed, and to perform the calculation using the cumulative game history. Thus, it becomes possible to manage the game history in a range exceeding the number of management trigger games while enabling execution of control corresponding to the calculation result every time the number of management trigger games is reached.

  The subject forcibly terminated in relation to the management result of the gaming history is not limited to the advantageous gaming state such as the ART state, but may be an adverse gaming state.

  An operation unit may be provided which is operated to forcibly turn off the illumination devices 349a and 349b even when the front door 312 is in the open state. In this case, when the illumination devices 349a and 349b do not require illumination, the illumination devices 349a and 349b can be brought into the non-illumination state. In addition, the operation unit may be provided at a position where it can be operated even when the front door 312 is closed. When the front door 312 is closed, operation is not possible and the front door 312 is opened. It is good also as composition provided in the position which becomes operable.

  -When the front door 312 is in the open state, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are always in the lighting state, and when the front door 312 is in the closed state, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are always in the non-lighting state It is good also as composition.

  -The illumination devices 349a and 349b are maintained in the non-illumination state until the predetermined opening angle is reached even if the front door 312 is opened from the closed state, and then the illumination angle is increased by the predetermined opening angle or more. The devices 349a and 349b may be configured to be in an illumination state. Moreover, in addition to the said structure, when the front door 312 becomes a largest open position like the said embodiment, it is good also as a structure which will be in a non-illuminating state for apparatus 349a, 349b for illumination.

  The intensity of the light emitted from the illumination devices 349a and 349b may be changed according to the opening angle of the front door 312. For example, in the closed state of the front door 312, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are in the non-illuminated state or in the illuminated state with relatively weak intensity, and the front door 312 is in the open state. When the angle is smaller than the angle, the illumination state may be relatively strong, and when the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle, the illumination state may be relatively weak.

Eighteenth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the configuration for managing the game history in the slot machine 310 is different from that of the seventeenth embodiment. The configuration different from the seventeenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the seventeenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 106 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various areas provided in the main side RAM 344. FIG.

  As in the seventeenth embodiment, the main RAM 344 is provided with a total game number counter 344a and an advantageous game number counter 344b. The total game number counter 344a is a counter for measuring the number of digested games regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the BB state, the AT state, or the ART state, as in the seventeenth embodiment. It is. Since the total number-of-games counter 344a measures the maximum number of 3,000 games, the total number-of-games counter 344a has a data capacity capable of measuring the number of games. Specifically, the total game number counter 344a has a data capacity of 2 bytes. The total game number counter 344a is information on the number of games being measured unless the main RAM 344 clear processing is performed at the time of the subsequent power ON operation even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned OFF. Hold.

  Similar to the seventeenth embodiment, the advantageous game number counter 344b is the number of games that have been digested until the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. It is a counter for measuring. Even if the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs, the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b is maintained without being cleared to "0". That is, the advantageous game number counter 344b is used to measure the total number of games generated in a plurality of ART states. Since the number of games of 3000 games is measured at the maximum by the advantageous game number counter 344b, the advantageous game number counter 344b has a data capacity capable of measuring the number of games. Specifically, the advantageous game number counter 344b has a data capacity of 2 bytes. Incidentally, even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, the advantageous game number counter 344b measures the information on the number of games being measured unless the clear processing of the main side RAM 344 is executed when the power is turned on thereafter. Hold.

  The main RAM 344 is provided with a total game number counter 361. The total game number counter 361, like the total game number counter 344a, is a counter for measuring the number of digested games regardless of whether the gaming state is normal gaming state, BB state, AT state, or ART state. is there. However, the total game number counter 361 maintains the measurement over the number of games exceeding 3000 games, and even when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, when the power is turned on thereafter. Information on the number of games being measured is held unless the main RAM 344 is cleared. The total game number counter 361 has a data capacity capable of measuring the number of games without reaching the upper limit over a plurality of business days. Specifically, the total game number counter 361 has a data capacity of 2 bytes. If the data capacity is 2 bytes, for example, assuming that the maximum number of games that can be executed in one business day is 8000, the total game number counter 361 continuously measures the number of games over five years or more. It becomes possible.

  The main RAM 344 is provided with a total accumulation buffer 362. FIG. 106 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the various counters 362a to 362c provided in the total accumulation buffer 362. FIG. The total accumulation buffer 362 includes a total total payout counter 362 a, a total advantageous middle counter 362 b, and a total bonus middle counter 362 c.

  The total total payout counter 362a is a counter for measuring the total number of gaming media paid out to the player regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the BB state, the AT state or the ART state. . Even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned OFF, the total total payout counter 362a is the total number of payouts of the game media being measured unless the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is executed when the power is turned ON thereafter. Hold information The total total payout counter 362a has a data capacity capable of measuring the total number of game media without reaching the upper limit over a plurality of business days. Specifically, the total total payout counter 362a has a data capacity of 3 bytes. If the data capacity is 3 bytes, for example, assuming that the maximum total number of payouts of gaming media in one business day is "12, 000", the total total payout counter 362a measures the total number of payouts of gaming media over four months or more It is possible to do

  The total advantageous middle counter 362 b measures the total number of game media paid out to the player after the transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter on the main RAM 344 becomes “0”. Is a counter for Even if the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs, the value of the total advantageous middle counter 362b is maintained without being cleared to "0". That is, the total advantageous middle counter 362 b is used to measure the total number of payouts of gaming media in a plurality of ART states. The total advantageous middle counter 362 b is the total number of payouts of gaming media being measured unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned on even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off. Hold information The total advantageous middle counter 362b has a data capacity capable of measuring the total number of game media without reaching the upper limit over a plurality of business days. Specifically, the total advantageous middle counter 362 b has a data capacity of 3 bytes. If the data capacity is 3 bytes, for example, assuming that the maximum total payout number of gaming media in one business day is "12,000", the total advantage of the total number of gaming media is counted over four months in total ad while counter 362b It is possible to do

  The total bonus middle counter 362c is a counter for measuring the total number of gaming media paid out to the player in the BB state. The value of the total bonus middle counter 362c is maintained without being cleared to "0" even if the BB state is ended. That is, the total bonus middle counter 362c is used to measure the total number of payouts of gaming media in a plurality of BB states. The total bonus counter 362c is the total number of payouts of the game media being measured unless the main RAM 344 clear processing is executed when the power is turned on even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off. Hold information The total bonus middle counter 362c has a data capacity capable of measuring the total number of game media without reaching the upper limit over a plurality of business days. Specifically, the total bonus middle counter 362c has a data capacity of 3 bytes. If the data capacity is 3 bytes, for example, assuming that the maximum total payout number of gaming media in one business day is “120000”, the total bonus payout counter 362c measures the total payout number of gaming media over four months or more It is possible to do

  The main RAM 344 is provided with a first accumulation buffer 363 and a second accumulation buffer 364. FIG. 106 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the various counters 363a to 363c provided in the first accumulation buffer 363. FIG. 106 (d) is an illustration showing various contents provided in the second accumulation buffer 364 It is an explanatory view for explaining contents of counters 364a-364c. As shown in FIG. 106 (c), the first accumulation buffer 363 includes a first total payout counter 363a, a first in-advantage counter 363b, and a first in-bonus counter 363c. Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (d), the second total accumulation buffer 364 is provided with a second total payout counter 364a, a second in-advantage counter 364b, and a second in-bonus counter 364c.

  The first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a, like the total total payout counter 362a, pay the player regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the BB state, the AT state or the ART state. It is a counter for measuring the total number of game media issued. Since the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a measure the total number of game media paid out in 6000 games at the maximum, the data capacity capable of measuring the total number of the game media It has become. Specifically, the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. The first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a are measured even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned on thereafter. It holds information on the total number of payouts of gaming media being played.

  The first advantage middle counter 363b and the second advantage middle counter 364b are the same as the total advantage middle counter 362b until the transition to the ART state occurs and the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 becomes "0". Is a counter for measuring the total number of game media paid out to the player. Even if the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state, the value of the first advantageous middle counter 363b and the value of the second advantageous middle counter 364b become "0". Maintained without being cleared. That is, the first advantageous middle counter 363 b and the second advantageous middle counter 364 b are used to measure the total number of payouts of gaming media in a plurality of ART states. Since the total number of gaming media paid out at the maximum of 6000 games is measured by the first advantageous middle counter 363b and the second advantageous middle counter 364b, the data capacity capable of measuring the total number of the gaming media It has become. Specifically, the first advantageous middle counter 363b and the second advantageous middle counter 364b each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. The first advantageous middle counter 363b and the second advantageous middle counter 364b are measured even when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned on thereafter. It holds information on the total number of payouts of gaming media being played.

  The first bonus middle counter 363c and the second bonus middle counter 364c are counters for measuring the total number of game media paid out to the player in the BB state, as in the total bonus middle counter 362c. The value of the first bonus middle counter 363 c and the value of the second bonus middle counter 364 c are maintained without being cleared to “0” even if the BB state ends. That is, the first bonus middle counter 363c and the second bonus middle counter 364c are used to measure the total payout number of gaming media in a plurality of BB states. Since the first bonus middle counter 363c and the second bonus middle counter 364c measure the total number of game media paid out at the maximum of 6000 games, the data capacity capable of measuring the total number of the game media It has become. Specifically, each of the first bonus middle counter 363c and the second bonus middle counter 364c has a data capacity of 3 bytes. The first bonus middle counter 363c and the second bonus middle counter 364c are measured even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned OFF, unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned ON thereafter. It holds information on the total number of payouts of gaming media being played.

  As shown in FIG. 106A, the main RAM 344 is provided with a calculation area 365 for total accumulation, a calculation area 366 for the first accumulation, and a calculation area 367 for the second accumulation. The total cumulative calculation area 365 uses the total total payout counter 362 a and the total advantageous counter 362 b provided in the total cumulative buffer 362 to count the total payout number of gaming media in the ART state with respect to the total payout number of gaming media The game media in the BB state with respect to the total number of payouts of the game medium using the total total payout counter 362a and the total bonus middle counter 362c provided in the total accumulation buffer 362 while storing information of the result of calculating the ratio of The information of the result obtained by calculating the ratio of the total number of payouts is stored. Using the first total payout counter 363a and the first in-advantage counter 363b provided in the first totaling buffer 363, the first totaling calculation area 366 is a game medium in a continuous period over 6000 games. The information of the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of payouts of the gaming media in the ART state to the total number of payouts is stored, and the first total payout counter 363a and the first bonus middle counter 363c provided in the first cumulative buffer 363 And stores the information of the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the BB state to the total number of payouts of gaming media in the continuous period over 6000 games. The second total calculation area 367 uses the second total payout counter 364a and the second in-advantage counter 364b provided in the second total accumulation buffer 364 to play game media in a continuous period over 6000 games. The second total payout counter 364a and the second bonus middle counter 364c provided in the second total accumulation buffer 364 are stored as well as storing information of the result of calculating the ratio of the total payout number of gaming media in the ART state to the total payout number of And stores the information of the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the BB state to the total number of payouts of gaming media in the continuous period over 6000 games.

  By providing the first total accumulation buffer 363 and the second total accumulation buffer 364 as described above, the total number of payouts of gaming media in the ART state with respect to the total number of payouts of gaming media in a continuous period of 6000 games. It becomes possible to calculate the ratio and the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the BB state to the total number of payouts of gaming media in consecutive periods over 6000 games. In this case, the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 are used in such a way that the start and end of the period to be managed are mutually offset. Specifically, the total number of games to be managed by the accumulation buffers 363 and 364 is A (specifically, 6000 games), and the number of accumulation buffers 363 and 364 is B (specifically, 2). In this case, the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted from each other by the number of A / B games (specifically, 3000 games). In addition, when a period to be managed in the first accumulation buffer 363 ends, a period to be managed next in the first accumulation buffer 363 occurs from the next game, and the second accumulation buffer When one management target period ends at 364, the next management target period in the second total accumulation buffer 364 occurs from the next game. Therefore, the period to be managed by the first accumulation buffer 363 and the period to be managed by the second accumulation buffer 364 are repeatedly generated with the start and end of the periods being shifted by a fixed number of games. It becomes.

  FIG. 107 is a time chart showing how a game history is managed in the present embodiment. FIG. 107 (a) shows the timing when 3000 games elapse, FIG. 107 (b) shows the execution timing of the game, FIG. 107 (c) shows the update timing of the total accumulation buffer 362, and FIG. 107 (d) 107 shows the update timing of the first accumulation buffer 363, FIG. 107 (e) shows the initialization timing of the first accumulation buffer 363, and FIG. 107 (f) shows the update timing of the second accumulation buffer 364, FIG. 107 (g) shows the initialization timing of the second accumulation buffer 364, and FIG. 107 (h) shows the management result calculated using the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364. The timing at which the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is switched from one to the other of the management results calculated as described above is shown.

  At time t1, the power of the slot machine 310 is turned on, and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 342 is started. In this case, as the main RAM 344 is cleared, as shown in FIG. 107 (e), the various counters 363a to 363c of the first cumulative buffer 363 are cleared to “0” (FIG. 107 (g). As shown in the above, the various counters 364a to 364c of the second total accumulation buffer 364 are cleared to "0". If the clear processing of the main RAM 344 is not executed even in the situation where the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 342 is started, for the first accumulation at the timing when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 342 is started The various counters 363a to 363c of the buffer 363 and the various counters 364a to 364c of the second total accumulation buffer 364 are not cleared to “0”, and the values at the time of the previous power off of the slot machine 310 are maintained as they are.

  After that, one game is executed as shown in FIG. 107B at each of the timing t2, the timing t3, the timing t4, the timing t5, and the timing t6. Then, 3000 games elapse as shown in FIG. 107A at the timing of t6. Assuming that payout of gaming media has occurred in each of these games, update processing of the total accumulation buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107 (c) at each of timing t2 to timing t6. As shown in FIG. 107 (d), the process of updating the first total accumulation buffer 363 is executed. It should be noted that, in the game in which payout of gaming media does not occur, update processing of the total accumulation buffer 362 and the first accumulation buffer 363 is not executed. At each of the timing t2 to the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 107 (f), the updating process of the second total accumulation buffer 364 is not executed. Since the period to be managed in the first accumulation buffer 363 and the period to be managed in the second accumulation buffer 364 are both shifted by 3000 games from the beginning and the end, the accumulation buffers 363 and 364 When the initialization process is executed, the update process of the second total accumulation buffer 364 is on standby until 3000 games elapse after the initialization process is executed.

  After that, one game is executed as shown in FIG. 107B at each of the timing of t7, the timing of t8, the timing of t9 and the timing of t10. Assuming that payout of gaming media has occurred in each of these games, update processing of the total accumulation buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107 (c) at each of the timing t7 to the timing t10. As shown in (d), update processing of the first total accumulation buffer 363 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 107 (f), update processing of the second total accumulation buffer 364 is executed. It should be noted that, in the game in which payout of gaming media does not occur, updating processing of the total accumulation buffer 362, the first accumulation buffer 363, and the second accumulation buffer 364 is not executed.

  The timing t10 is the timing at which 3000 games have passed from the timing t6 as shown in FIG. 107 (a). That is, it is the timing at which 6000 games, which is one management target period, have elapsed since the first total accumulation buffer 363 became the update target. Therefore, the management result for 6000 games is calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363. The calculated management result is stored in the first total calculation area 366. Then, after the management result is stored in the first total calculation area 366, as shown in FIG. 107 (e), various counters 363a to 363c of the first total buffer 363 are cleared to "0".

  Also, as shown in FIG. 107 (h), it is the switching timing of the display object. When the clear process of the main RAM 344 is executed, the display contents corresponding to the management results of the accumulation buffers 363, 364 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 become the initial display contents not corresponding to any management result. Then, the initial display content is continued in a period in which the management results of the accumulation buffers 363 and 364 are to be displayed until the first management result is calculated using the first accumulation buffer 363. By storing the information of the management result calculated using the first totaling buffer 363 at the timing of t10 in the first totaling calculation area 366, the totaling buffer 363 in the notification display devices 346 to 348, The display content of the management result of 364 is the display content corresponding to the information of the management result stored in the calculation area 366 for the first total. This display content is the totaling buffer 363 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 until the information of the management result calculated using the second totaling buffer 364 is stored in the second totaling calculation area 367, It is maintained as the display contents of the 364 management result.

  After that, one game is executed as shown in FIG. 107B at each of the timing of t11, the timing of t12, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14. Assuming that payout of gaming media occurs in each of these games, update processing of the total accumulation buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107 (c) at each of timing t11 to timing t14. As shown in (d), update processing of the first total accumulation buffer 363 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 107 (f), update processing of the second total accumulation buffer 364 is executed. It should be noted that, in the game in which payout of gaming media does not occur, updating processing of the total accumulation buffer 362, the first accumulation buffer 363, and the second accumulation buffer 364 is not executed.

  The timing t14 is the timing at which 3000 games have elapsed from the timing t10 as shown in FIG. 107 (a). That is, it is the timing at which 6000 games, which is one management target period, have elapsed since the second total accumulation buffer 364 has been updated. Therefore, the management result for 6000 games is calculated using the second total accumulation buffer 364. The calculated management result is stored in the second cumulative calculation area 367. Then, after the management result is stored in the second total calculation area 367, as shown in FIG. 107 (g), the various counters 364a to 364c of the second total buffer 364 are cleared to "0".

  Also, as shown in FIG. 107 (h), it is the switching timing of the display object. The information on the management result calculated using the second total accumulation buffer 364 at the timing of t14 is stored in the second total calculation area 367, so that the total accumulation buffer 363, in the notification display devices 346 to 348, The display contents of the management result of 364 are the display contents corresponding to the information of the management result stored in the second total calculation area 367 from the display contents corresponding to the information of the management result stored in the first total calculation area 366 It is switched to the contents. This display content is the totaling buffer in the notification display devices 346 to 348 until the information of the management result calculated using the first totaling buffer 363 is newly stored in the first totaling calculation area 366. It is maintained as the display contents of the management results of 363, 364.

  Thereafter, one game is executed as shown in FIG. 107 (b) at timing t15, timing t16, timing t17 and timing t18. Assuming that payout of gaming media has occurred in each of these games, update processing of the total accumulation buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. As shown in (d), update processing of the first total accumulation buffer 363 is executed, and as shown in FIG. It should be noted that, in the game in which payout of gaming media does not occur, updating processing of the total accumulation buffer 362, the first accumulation buffer 363, and the second accumulation buffer 364 is not executed.

  The timing of t18 is the timing at which 3000 games have elapsed from the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 107 (a). That is, it is the timing at which 6000 games have passed since the start of the new management target period using the first cumulative buffer 363. Therefore, the management result for 6000 games is calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363. The calculated management result is stored in the first total calculation area 366. Then, after the management result is stored in the first total calculation area 366, as shown in FIG. 107 (e), various counters 363a to 363c of the first total buffer 363 are cleared to "0".

  Also, as shown in FIG. 107 (h), it is the switching timing of the display object. By storing the information of the management result calculated using the first total accumulation buffer 363 at the timing of t18 in the first total calculation area 366, the total accumulation buffer 363, in the notification display devices 346 to 348, The display contents of the management result of 364 are the display contents corresponding to the information of the management result stored in the calculation area 366 for the first accumulation from the display contents corresponding to the information of the management result stored in the calculation area 367 for the second accumulation. It is switched to the contents. This display content is the totaling buffer in the notification display devices 346 to 348 until the information of the management result calculated using the second totaling buffer 364 is newly stored in the second totaling calculation area 367. It is maintained as the display contents of the management results of 363, 364.

  Next, a processing configuration for enabling management of the game history as described above will be described. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing a game management process executed by the main MPU 342. The game management process is executed in step S4811 in the process (FIG. 97) at the end of the game.

  First, processing for regulating the advantageous period is executed (step S5401). In the processing for regulating the advantageous period, the same processing as each processing of step S5101 to step S5117 of the game management processing (FIG. 100) in the seventeenth embodiment is executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not grant of gaming media has occurred in the current game (step S5402). When the provision of gaming media occurs (step S5402: YES), a value corresponding to the number of gaming media currently awarded is added to the total total payout counter 362a of the total accumulation buffer 362 (step S5403), A value corresponding to the number of game media currently provided is added to the first total payout counter 363a of the 1 accumulation buffer 363 (step S5404). In addition, the second total accumulation buffer 364 is operated under the condition that it is not the second total accumulation standby period which is a period before 3000 games have passed since the clear processing of the main side RAM 344 is executed (step S5405: NO). A value corresponding to the number of gaming media currently provided is added to the second total payout counter 364a (step S5406).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5405, or if the process of step S5406 is performed, it is determined whether or not the state is the ART state by determining whether the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 is 1 or more. Is determined (step S5407). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5407, a value corresponding to the number of gaming media currently applied is added to the total advantage counter 362b of the total accumulation buffer 362 (step S5408), and the first total accumulation buffer 363 A value corresponding to the number of gaming media currently assigned is added to the 1 in progress counter 363b (step S5409). In addition, the second total accumulation buffer 364 is processed under the condition that it is not the second total accumulation standby period which is a period before 3000 games have passed since the clear processing of the main side RAM 344 is executed (step S5410: NO). A value corresponding to the number of gaming media provided this time is added to the second advantageous middle counter 364b (step S5411).

  If a negative determination is made in step S5407, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the BB state (step S5412). When an affirmative determination is made in step S 5412, a value corresponding to the number of gaming media provided this time is added to the total bonus middle counter 362 c of the total accumulation buffer 362 (step S 5413) and the first total accumulation buffer 363 A value corresponding to the number of gaming media currently awarded is added to the one bonus bonus counter 363c (step S5414). In addition, the second total accumulation buffer 364 is processed under the condition that it is not the second total accumulation standby period which is a period before 3000 games have passed since the clear processing of the main side RAM 344 is executed (step S5415: NO). A value corresponding to the number of gaming media provided this time is added to the second bonus middle counter 364c (step S5416).

  When a negative determination is made in step S5402, a positive determination is made in step S5410, a processing in step S5411 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S5412, a positive determination is made in step S5415, or When the process of step S5416 is executed, calculation processing for total accumulation is executed (step S5417). In the calculation process, the ratio of the total payout number of gaming media in the ART state to the total payout number of gaming media is calculated using the total total payout counter 362a and the total advantage counter 362b provided in the total accumulation buffer 362 The calculation result is stored in the calculation area 365 for total accumulation. Further, in the calculation process, the ratio of the total payout number of gaming media in the BB state to the total payout number of gaming media using the total total payout counter 362a and the total bonus middle counter 362c provided in the total cumulative buffer 362 Is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 365 for total accumulation. If the display target in the informing display devices 346 to 348 is the total accumulation buffer 362 and the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the ART state is reached, the former calculation result is notified and the informing display devices 346- If the display target at 348 is the total accumulation buffer 362 and the ratio of the total number of payouts of game media in the BB state is reached, the latter calculation result is notified.

  Thereafter, in step S5418, an object switching process is performed. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing object switching processing. First, the value of the total game number counter 361 of the main RAM 344 is incremented by 1 (step S5501). The total game number counter 361 is used by the main MPU 342 to specify one management target period using the first total accumulation buffer 363 and one management target period using the second total accumulation buffer 364. It is used. Then, in step S5502, it is determined whether the value of the total game number counter 361 after 1 addition is 3000 × 2 n (n is an integer of 1 or more). When the value of the total game number counter 361 is 3000 × 2 n, it means that the one management target period using the first total accumulation buffer 363 has ended. For example, if 6000 games have passed since the main RAM 344 was cleared, 12000 games have passed, 18000 games have passed, etc., it becomes one management target using the first total accumulation buffer 363. The period has ended.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5502, calculation processing for the first total is executed (step S5503). In the calculation process, the first total payout counter 363a and the first advantageous middle counter 363b provided in the first cumulative buffer 363 are used to calculate the total payout number of gaming media in a continuous period of 6000 games. The ratio of the total payout number of gaming media in the ART state is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the first total calculation area 366. In addition, in the calculation process, the total payout of gaming media is continuously made during a period of 6000 games using the first total payout counter 363a and the first bonus middle counter 363c provided in the first cumulative buffer 363. The ratio of the total payout number of gaming media in the BB state to the number is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the first total calculation area 366. When the display target in the informing display devices 346 to 348 is the first total buffer 363 and the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the ART state is reached, the former calculation result is notified and the informing display device 346 If the display target at ~ 348 is the first cumulative buffer 363 and the ratio of the total payout number of gaming media in the BB state is reached, the latter calculation result is notified.

  After that, "1" is set in the first total display flag provided in the main RAM 344 (step S5504), and the second total display flag provided in the main RAM 344 is cleared "0" (step S5505). When the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the management result calculated using the first total buffer 363 or the second total buffer 364 for the first total display flag and the second total display flag The main MPU 342 is a flag for specifying which one of these is to be displayed. When the first total display flag is set to "1" and the second total display flag has a value "0", the management result calculated using the first total buffer 363 is displayed. When the value of the first cumulative display flag is "0" and the second cumulative display flag is "1", the management result calculated using the second cumulative buffer 364 is to be displayed. . Further, when the values of both the first total display flag and the second total display flag are “0”, the initial display content not corresponding to any of the first total buffer 363 and the second total buffer 364 is displayed. It becomes an object.

  Thereafter, the process of clearing the first total accumulation buffer 363 is executed (step S5506). As a result, the various counters 363a to 363c of the first accumulation buffer 363 are cleared to "0".

  If a negative determination is made in step S5502, it is determined whether the value of the total game number counter 361 after one addition is 3000 × (2n + 1) (n is an integer of 1 or more) (step S5507). If the value of the total game number counter 361 is 3000 × (2n + 1), it means that the one management target period using the second total accumulation buffer 364 has ended. For example, when 9000 games have passed since the main RAM 344 clear process was executed, 15000 games have passed, 21000 games have passed, etc., it becomes one management target using the second total accumulation buffer 364 The period has ended.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5507, calculation processing for the second total is executed (step S5508). In the calculation process, the second total payout counter 364a and the second advantageous middle counter 364b provided in the second total accumulation buffer 364 are used to calculate the total number of payouts of game media in a continuous period of 6000 games. The ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the ART state is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 367 for the second total. In addition, in the calculation process, a total payout of gaming media is continuously made during a period of 6000 games using the second total payout counter 364a and the second bonus middle counter 364c provided in the second total accumulation buffer 364 The ratio of the total payout number of gaming media in the BB state to the number is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 367 for the second total. If the display target in the informing display devices 346 to 348 is the second total buffer 364 and the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the ART state is reached, the former calculation result is notified and the informing display device 346 If the display target to 348 is the second cumulative buffer 364 and the ratio of the total payout number of gaming media in the BB state is reached, the latter calculation result is notified.

  After that, the first total display flag provided in the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S5509), and "1" is set in the second total display flag provided in the main RAM 344 (step S5510). Further, the second total accumulation buffer 364 is cleared (step S5511). As a result, the various counters 364a to 364c of the second accumulation buffer 364 are cleared to "0".

  Next, the management process executed by the main MPU 342 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is executed in step S4513 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

  First, it is determined whether it is the update timing of the display content in the notification display devices 346 to 348 (step S5601). The total accumulation buffer 362 as a display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the ratio of the total payout number of gaming media in the ART state, and the total accumulation buffer 362 is the total payout number of gaming media in the BB state Ratio, the ratio of the total payout number of gaming media in the ART state being the first cumulative buffer 363, the ratio of the total payout number of gaming media being the first total buffer 363 in the BB state, A total buffer number 364 is the ratio of the total payout number of gaming media in the ART state, a second total buffer 364 is the ratio of the total payout number of gaming media in the BB state, and the value of the total game number counter 344a There is a ratio of values of the advantageous game number counter 344b. In the notification display devices 346 to 348, after the display content of one display object is displayed over a predetermined notification period (specifically, 5 seconds), the display content is changed to the next display object and the change is made. The display content of the display target is displayed over the predetermined notification period. In the notification display devices 346 to 348, first, each ratio of the total accumulation buffer 362 is to be displayed, and then a timing at which a period to be managed among the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 ends. Is the display target, and then the ratio of the value of the advantageous game counter 344b to the value of the total game counter 344a is the display target. Then, the flow of switching these display targets is repeated. The contents set at the previous update timing continue to be displayed on the notification display devices 346 to 348 until the display content update timing.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S5601, the process of updating the display target counter is executed (step S5602). The display target counter is provided in the main RAM 344. If the value of the display target counter is "0", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total accumulation buffer 362 and the game medium in the ART state If the value of the display target counter is "1", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total cumulative buffer 362 and the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the BB state If the value of the display target counter is "2", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first total accumulation buffer 363 or the second total accumulation buffer 364 and the total number of payouts of gaming media in the ART state If the ratio becomes and the value of the display target counter is “3”, the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first totaling buffer 363 or the second total. If the value of the display target counter is “4”, the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 has an advantage over the value of the total game number counter 344a if the value of the display target counter is “4”. It becomes the ratio of the value of the game number counter 344b. If the value after adding 1 to the value of the display object counter is “5”, the value of the display object counter is cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the ratio for the total accumulation buffer 362 by determining whether the value of the display target counter is “0” or “1”. Is determined (step S5603). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5603, a setting process of the type display of total cumulative is executed (step S5604). In the setting process, if the value of the display object counter is “0”, “0” is displayed on the first notification display device 346, and if the value of the display object counter is “1”, the first notification "1" is displayed on the display device 346. That is, in the present embodiment, the information corresponding to the type of the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is displayed on the first notification display device 346. Thereafter, a setting process of displaying the result of the total accumulation is executed (step S5605). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is “0”, the total accumulation buffer 362 stored in the calculation area 365 for total accumulation corresponds to the ratio of the total payout number of gaming media in the ART state Information to be displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. If the value of the display target counter is “1”, the total accumulation buffer 362 stored in the calculation area 365 for total accumulation is information corresponding to the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the BB state The second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348 are displayed. In these cases, after displaying the ratio as a percentage, the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 347, and the ones place is displayed on the third notification display device 348. In addition, since it becomes impossible to distinguish 100% and less than 1% in the said structure, you may make it different display in the case of 100% and the case of less than 1%.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5603, the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first total buffer by determining whether the value of the display target counter is “2” or “3”. It is determined whether the ratio is about 363 or the second accumulation buffer 364 (step S5606). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5606, a process of setting the type display of a partial period is executed (step S5607). In the setting process, if the value of the display object counter is “2”, “2” is displayed on the first notification display device 346, and if the value of the display object counter is “3”, the first notification “3” is displayed on the display device 346.

  After that, if “1” is set in the first total sum display flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5608: YES), setting processing of the result display of the first total sum is executed (step S5609). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is “2”, it is the first totaling buffer 363 stored in the first totaling calculation area 366, and the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the ART state Is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. If the value of the display target counter is “3”, it is the first cumulative buffer 363 stored in the first cumulative calculation area 366 and corresponds to the ratio of the total payout number of gaming media in the BB state Information is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348.

  When the first total display flag of the main RAM 344 is not set to "1" and the second total display flag is set to "1" (step S5610: YES), the processing for setting the second total result display Is executed (step S5611). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is “2”, the second total accumulation buffer 364 stored in the second total calculation area 367 is the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the ART state Is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. If the value of the display target counter is “3”, the second total accumulation buffer 364 stored in the second total calculation area 367 corresponds to the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the BB state Information is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348.

  If “1” is not set in both the first total display flag and the second total display flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5610: NO), the setting process of the initial display is executed (step S5612). In the setting process, the display content of the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348 is set to be the initial display content regardless of the value of the display target counter. Specifically, characters “L” that are not to be displayed when displaying the ratio of other situations are displayed on both the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. However, even in this case, the content corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed on the first notification display device 346. Thus, when the initial display content is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348, the game hall manager grasps which display object it corresponds to. It is possible to

  If a negative determination is made in step S5606, it means that the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a. In this case, first, processing of setting the type display of the advantageous period ratio is executed (step S5613). In the setting process, “4” corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed on the first notification display device 346. Further, the setting process of the result display of the advantageous period ratio is executed (step S5614). In the setting process, the ratio of the value of the advantage game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a is calculated, and the information corresponding to the calculation result is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. To be displayed.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  A first accumulation buffer 363 and a second accumulation buffer 364 are provided, and management of consecutive periods is performed over 6000 games using the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 is used. Management of consecutive periods is performed over 6000 games, and a period (hereinafter, also referred to as a first period) managed using the first total accumulation buffer 363 and a second total accumulation buffer 364 are used. A part overlaps with a managed period (hereinafter, also referred to as a second period). Thus, various ratios corresponding to the management result in the first period can be derived in the middle of one second period, and various ratios corresponding to the management result in the second period in the middle of one first period It is possible to derive the ratio. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving various ratios while securing the first period and the second period as the period in which the management is performed. Furthermore, even if the storage capacities of the first total accumulation buffer 363 and the second total accumulation buffer 364 are not excessively increased, various types of management can be performed while securing the first period and the second period. It is possible to increase the frequency of deriving the ratio.

  Since the first period and the second period both end when 6000 games have passed, the end conditions of the period are the same conditions. As a result, even if the management is performed using each of the first total accumulation buffer 363 and the second total accumulation buffer 364, it is possible to derive various ratios corresponding to a certain period.

  A new first period is started following the first period when one first period ends, and a new second period is started following the second period when one second period ends Furthermore, the difference between the first period and the second period is constant. As a result, it is possible to derive various ratios corresponding to each of the first period and the second period, while securing a state in which a predetermined deviation occurs.

  When the first period of one is ended, the buffer 363 for total accumulation is cleared to "0", and when the second period of one period is ended, the buffer 364 for total accumulation is cleared to "0". As a result, the first totaling buffer 363 is sufficient to store the game history corresponding to the first period, and the second totaling buffer 364 stores the game history corresponding to the second period. The capacity that can be done is enough. Therefore, the excellent effects as described above can be achieved while suppressing the capacities of the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364.

  When the first period has elapsed, notification of various ratios corresponding to the first period is started, and when the second period elapses, notification of various ratios corresponding to the second period is started. As a result, various ratios are notified as each of the first period and the second period elapses, and it becomes possible to notify various ratios in a situation relatively close to the current state.

<Another form of the eighteenth embodiment>
The number of accumulation buffers 363 and 364 used to calculate various ratios in the period of 6000 games is not limited to two of the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 and is three. , 4 or 5 or more. If there are three, both the start and end of the period to be managed by each accumulation buffer will be shifted by 2000 games, and if there are four, the beginning and end of the period to be managed by each accumulation buffer In the case of five, both of the start and end of the period to be managed by each accumulation buffer will be shifted by 1000 games.

  The period to be one management target by the first total accumulation buffer 363 and the second total accumulation buffer 364 is not limited to 6000 games, but may be a number of games less than 6000 games such as 4000 games, or 8000 The number of games may be greater than 6000, such as games. Further, the number of games is not limited to the number of games divisible by the total number of buffers 363 and 364 like 6000 games, but may be a number of games not divisible by the number of total buffers 363 and 364 like 6001 games. In the case of an indivisible game number, the total number of games to be managed by the accumulation buffers 363 and 364 is A (specifically, 6001 games), and the number of accumulation buffers 363 and 364 is B (specifically If the number of A / B quotient games (specifically, 3000 games) is two, both the start and end of the period to be managed may be shifted. Both the start and end of the period to be managed may be shifted by the number of games added to 1 (specifically, 3001 games).

  A ring buffer such as a first history memory 371 and a second history memory 372 in the nineteenth embodiment described later may be used instead of the accumulation buffers 363 and 364. Then, the result of each game is stored as history information in each of the ring buffer corresponding to the first totaling buffer 363 and the ring buffer corresponding to the second totaling buffer 364, and the stored history information is used. Various ratios are calculated as in the eighteenth embodiment. Even with this configuration, it is possible to calculate various ratios while partially overlapping each of the first period and the second period, which are periods over 6000 games.

  The object to be managed by the first total accumulation buffer 363 and the second total accumulation buffer 364 is not limited to the above-described various ratios. For example, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games (in the eighteenth embodiment) The ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a) may be managed by the accumulation buffers 363 and 364.

The Nineteenth Embodiment
As in the eighteenth embodiment described above, the first total accumulation buffer 363 and the second total accumulation buffer 364 are used to partially overlap each management target period, and in a cycle shorter than the management target period. A configuration capable of notifying of the management result in each management target period may be applied to the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 111, in the management IC 66, as in the third embodiment, the management I / F 111, the management CPU 112, the management ROM 113, the management RAM 114, the RTC 115, the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the calculation result memory 131 is provided. These functions are similar to those of the third embodiment.

  In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is provided with a first history memory 371 and a second history memory 372. The first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 have the same configuration. The first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 have the same ring buffer as the history memory 117 in the third embodiment although the overall data capacity is different. FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372.

  In each of the history memories 371 and 372, history areas 371a and 372a for sequentially storing history information are provided. In the history areas 371a and 372a, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set as serial numbers, and history information storage areas 371b and 372b are set in a one-to-one correspondence with each pointer information. The history information storage areas 371 b and 372 b can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each of the history information storage areas 371b and 372b has a 2-byte data capacity, and a 1-byte data capacity is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and is for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area. When the correspondence information needs to be stored according to the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (in practice, the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10) First, in the area for storing RTC information of the history information storage areas 371 b and 372 b corresponding to the pointer information currently being written, the date information and time information measured in the current RTC 115 are stored Do. Thereafter, the correspondence relationship information corresponding to the buffer 122a to 122o that has become the information storage trigger this time is read out from the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffer 122a to 122o in the correspondence relationship memory 116, Are stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information of the history information storages 371b and 372b corresponding to the pointer information currently being written.

  The history information storage areas 371 b and 372 b are provided in a number that allows all the history information to be stored when 30000 game balls are fired. For example, if it is assumed that the history information is generated 40,000 times at the maximum in normal use until 30,000 game balls are fired, then 40,000 or more history information storage areas 371b and 372b are provided. This makes it possible to store history information in the history memories 371, 372 until at least 30,000 game balls are fired.

  In the history memories 371 and 372, pointer areas 371c and 372c are provided separately from the history areas 371a and 372a. In the pointer areas 371 c and 372 c, information for specifying, at the management side CPU 112, pointer information that is the current writing target in the history memories 371 and 372 is stored. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating pointer information of "0" as a write target is set in the pointer areas 371c and 372c. Then, each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage areas 371b and 372b, the information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. Ru. When pointer information of the last order is to be written and history information is stored in the history information storage areas 371 b and 372 b corresponding to the pointer information of the last order, pointer information of “0” is to be written. The information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated. As a result, when the history information storage trigger occurs exceeding the number of storable history information, new history information is sequentially overwritten from the history information storage areas 371 b and 372 b where old history information is stored. It will be.

  Also, when various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 using the memories for history 371, 372 and the calculation results are stored in the memory for calculation results 131, the history memory 371, which is referred to in the calculation, As for 372, the history information storage areas 371b and 372b are all cleared to "0", and the information of the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated so that the pointer information of "0" becomes a write target. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that has once been read from becoming read again.

  By providing the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372, it is possible to calculate various parameters using history information in a period until 30000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA. Is possible. In this case, the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 deviate from each other between the start and end of the management target period as in the total accumulation buffers 363 and 364 in the eighteenth embodiment. It is used as it is. Specifically, the number of game balls to be managed by each history memory 371, 372 is A (specifically, 30000), and the number of history memories 371, 372 is B (specifically, 2) In the above case, both the start and end of the period to be managed are deviated by the number of game balls discharged (specifically, 15,000) which become A / B. When one management target period in the first history memory 371 ends, the next management target period in the first history memory 371 occurs from the next game ball discharge, and the second history When one management target period in the memory 372 ends, the next management target period in the second history memory 372 is generated from the discharge of the next gaming ball. Therefore, the period to be managed by the first history memory 371 and the period to be managed by the second history memory 372 are repeatedly generated with both the start and end of the periods being shifted by a fixed number of discharges. It will be done.

  Next, a processing configuration for enabling management of a game history using the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. The history setting process is executed in step S607 in the management process (FIG. 18).

  First, the number of buffers to be checked in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S5701). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas storing information other than the information indicating blank is specified, and the specification The set number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, so "10" is set in the check target counter in step S5701 Do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the content of the buffer corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is the content of the write trigger of the history information (step S5702). Specifically, when the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "0" to "1" It determines that the write opportunity has occurred. Also, when the value of the current check target counter is “8” to “10”, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value is changed from “1” to “0” If it is determined that the write opportunity has occurred.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S5702, the RTC 115, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S5703). Then, write processing to the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5704). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 371a which is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371, and the pointer information which is the writing object is specified. The RTC information read in step S5703 is written in the history information storage area 371b of the corresponding history area 371a. Further, the correspondence relationship information is read out from the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current check target counter, and the correspondence relationship information is written in the history information storage area 371b corresponding to the pointer information which is the write target. If the correspondence information is any one of information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode, information indicating that it is in the high frequency support mode, and information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, Not only the correspondence information but also the start information or the end information is written in the history information storage area 371b corresponding to the pointer information to be written.

  Thereafter, the target pointer update process is executed (step S5705). In the updating process, numerical value information stored in the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371 is read and added one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the 1 addition has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 371a. If it does not exceed the maximum value, the pointer information after 1 addition is overwritten on the pointer area 371 c as new write target pointer information. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 371c is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA has become 15000 after the clearing process of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 is performed, and the second total sum It is determined whether it is a standby period (step S5706). In the present embodiment, when the clear processing of the main RAM 65 is executed, a clear signal is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, and the management IC 66 receives the clear signal from the main CPU 63. A clear process of the 1 history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 is executed. By executing the clear process, the history areas 371a and 372a of the history memories 371 and 372 are all cleared to "0", and the pointer areas 371c and 372c of the history memories 371 and 372 are "0." 'Cleared. After that, when the history information writing trigger occurs, only updating of the first history memory 371 is performed until the number of discharged pieces reaches 15000, and after the number of discharged pieces reaches 15000, the history information of Both the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 are updated each time a write trigger occurs.

  If the negative determination is made in step S5706, the writing process to the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5707). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 372a which is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372, and the pointer information which is the writing object is specified. The RTC information read in step S5703 is written in the history information storage area 372b of the corresponding history area 372a. Further, the correspondence relationship information is read out from the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current check target counter, and the correspondence relationship information is written in the history information storage area 372b corresponding to the pointer information which is the write target. If the correspondence information is any one of information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode, information indicating that it is in the high frequency support mode, and information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, Not only the correspondence information but also start information or end information is written in the history information storage area 372b corresponding to the pointer information to be written.

  Thereafter, the target pointer update process is executed (step S5708). In the updating process, numerical value information stored in the pointer area 372 c of the second history memory 372 is read out and added one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the 1 addition has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 372a. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after 1 addition is overwritten on the pointer area 372c as new write target pointer information. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 372c is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5702, a positive determination is made in step S5706, or the process of step S5708 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S5709). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the one subtraction is “0” (step S5710). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S5710: NO), the processing of step S5702 and subsequent steps is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter. If the value of the confirmation target counter is “0” (step S5710: YES), the target switching process is executed (step S5711).

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing object switching processing.

  First, it is determined whether or not discharge of the game ball from the game area PA has occurred (step S5801). If the game balls are being discharged (step S5801: YES), an addition process of the total discharge number counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S5802). In the addition process, the value of the number of gaming balls currently discharged from the gaming area PA is added to the total discharged number counter. Thereafter, in step S5803, it is determined whether the value of the total discharged number counter is 15000 × 2 n (n is an integer of 1 or more). If the value of the total discharged number counter is 15000 × 2 n, it means that the period to be managed of one using the first history memory 371 has ended. For example, when 30000 game balls are discharged after the first history memory 371 is cleared, 60000 game balls are discharged, and 90000 game balls are discharged, etc. This means that one management target period using the first history memory 371 has ended.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5803, calculation processing using the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5804). In the calculation process, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the first history memory 371. The contents of the calculation of the various parameters are the same as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment. Then, various parameters as a result of the calculation are written in the calculation result memory 131. In this case, when information of another operation result is already stored in the operation result memory 131, writing of the information of the operation result is performed so as not to overwrite the information of the operation result already stored. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result of the current writing. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the operation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  Thereafter, the process of clearing the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5805). As a result, all the history areas 371a of the first history memory 371 are cleared to "0" and the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371 is cleared to "0".

  If a negative determination is made in step S5803, it is determined whether the value of the total discharged number counter is 15000 × (2n + 1) (n is an integer of 1 or more) (step S5806). If the value of the total discharged number counter is 15000 × (2n + 1), it means that the period to be managed of one using the second history memory 372 has ended. For example, if 45000 game balls are discharged after the second history memory 372 is cleared, 75000 game balls are discharged, or 105000 game balls are discharged, etc. This means that one management target period using the second history memory 372 has ended.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5806, calculation processing using the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5807). In the calculation process, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the second history memory 372. The contents of the calculation of the various parameters are the same as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment. Then, various parameters as a result of the calculation are written in the calculation result memory 131. In this case, when information of another operation result is already stored in the operation result memory 131, writing of the information of the operation result is performed so as not to overwrite the information of the operation result already stored. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result of the current writing. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the operation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  Thereafter, the second history memory 372 is cleared (step S5808). As a result, all the history areas 372a of the second history memory 372 are cleared to "0" and the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372 is cleared to "0".

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  A first history memory 371 and a second history memory 372 are provided, and management of a period until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA is performed using the first history memory 371. 2) Management of a period until 30000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA using the memory for history 372 is performed, and further, a period for management using the memory for the first history 371 (hereinafter referred to as A part overlaps with one period (also referred to as one period) and a period managed by using the second history memory 372 (hereinafter, also referred to as a second period). Thus, various parameters corresponding to the management result in the first period can be derived in the middle of one second period, and various parameters corresponding to the management result in the second period in the middle of one first period. It becomes possible to derive parameters. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving various parameters while securing the first period and the second period as the period in which the management is performed. Furthermore, even if the storage capacities of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 are not excessively increased, various types of management can be performed while securing the first period and the second period. It is possible to increase the frequency of deriving the parameter.

  The first period and the second period are all terminated when 30,000 game balls are discharged from the gaming area PA, so the period termination conditions are the same. As a result, even if the management is performed using each of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372, various parameters corresponding to a certain period can be derived.

  A new first period is started following the first period when one first period ends, and a new second period is started following the second period when one second period ends Furthermore, the difference between the first period and the second period is constant. As a result, it is possible to derive various parameters corresponding to each of the first period and the second period, while securing a state in which a predetermined deviation occurs.

  The first history memory 371 is cleared to “0” when the first period of time ends, and the second history memory 372 is cleared to “0” when the second period of time ends. Thus, the first history memory 371 is sufficient for storing the game history corresponding to the first period, and the second history memory 372 stores the game history corresponding to the second period. The capacity that can be done is enough. Therefore, the excellent effects as described above can be achieved while suppressing the capacities of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372.

<Another form of the nineteenth embodiment>
The number of history memories 371 and 372 used to calculate various parameters in the period until 30000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA is the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 The number is not limited to two, and may be three, four or five or more. If there are three, both the beginning and end of the period to be managed by each history memory will be shifted by 10000 respectively, and if it is four, the beginning and end of the period to be managed by each history memory will be In the case of five, both of the start and end of the period to be managed by each history memory are shifted by 6000 each.

  The period to be managed by one of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 is not limited to the period until the 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA, and may be 20,000, etc. In other words, the number may be smaller than 30,000, or may be larger than 30,000, such as 40,000. Further, the number is not limited to the number that can be divided by the number of history memories 371 and 372 such as 30000, but may be a number that can not be divided by the number of history memories 371 and 372 such as 30001. If the number is an indivisible number, the number of discharge targets to be managed by each of the history memories 371, 372 is A (specifically, 30001), and the number of history memories 371, 372 is B (specifically, 2). In this case, both the start and end of the period to be managed may be shifted by the number of quotients (specifically, 15,000) quotients by A / B. Both the start and end of the period to be managed may be shifted by the number (specifically, 15001).

  The history memories 371 and 372 may be replaced by counters such as the first total accumulation buffer 363 and the second total accumulation buffer 364 in the eighteenth embodiment. Then, the number of ball entry into each ball entry is stored in the counter corresponding to the first history memory 371 and the counter corresponding to the second history memory 372, and the stored number of balls is used. Thus, various parameters are calculated as in the above-mentioned nineteenth embodiment. Even with this configuration, it is possible to calculate various parameters while partially overlapping each other between the first period and the second period, which are periods until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA. Become.

  The first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 are not limited to the configuration using a plurality of history memories. For example, history information for a long period as in the third embodiment. The history information corresponding to the first period is extracted from the history information stored in the history area using one history area capable of storing the It is good also as composition which extracts history information corresponding to the 2nd period which partially overlaps in the 1st period, and computes various parameters. In this case, each of the first period and the second period can be obtained by setting a history area of a capacity capable of sufficiently storing history information in a period until 45,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA. It is possible to extract history information corresponding to

  -When writing history information in history memories 371 and 372, after writing history information in the areas corresponding to the pointer information indicated in pointer areas 371c and 372c, the pointer information in pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated. The area to which new history information is to be written is always fixed, and the information stored in each area may be sequentially shifted when new history information is written. For example, when the first to fifth areas exist, the area to which new history information is to be written is always the first area, and the fourth area to the fifth is to be a trigger to write new history information. It is also possible to write new history information in the first area after shifting each information such as area, third area → fourth area, second area → third area, and first area → second area.

Other Embodiments
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  (1) In the first embodiment and the like, all of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 are targets for storing history information (or ball entry history). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power prize apparatus 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 is history information. The configuration may be a storage target of For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, and the second operation opening 34 may be configured to store history information, and only the general winning opening 31 may be configured to store history information. It is good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball in a predetermined period for the ball entry unit for which history information is to be stored.

  (2) In the first embodiment and the like, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a correspond to the ball entry results of the game ball. Although the signal paths 118a to 118c for transmitting information are set as the configuration, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the ball entry results for the same type of ball entry unit is the same type Even if there are a plurality of ball entry parts and a plurality of ball entry detection sensors according to it, it may be transmitted as one type of information. As a result, the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 can be reduced.

  (3) In the first embodiment, the main CPU 63 transmits correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122 a to 122 o to the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence relationship information may be stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, since it is not necessary to execute the process for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, the processing load of the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  (4) In the first embodiment, the main CPU 63 transmits from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o. However, the configuration is performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 can be bi-directionally communicated, and the management IC 66 responds The correspondence relationship information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when the signal requesting the transmission of the relation information is received. In this case, the correspondence relationship memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main CPU 63. Even when the supply of the operating power is stopped, the correspondence relationship memory 116 stores and holds the same. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of transmitting the correspondence information.

  (5) In the first embodiment, the main CPU 63 transmits to the management IC 66 correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o. However, although the configuration is performed using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information on detection results of the respective ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information is mainly used. A configuration may be provided in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is provided. As a result, the management IC 66 can grasp which type of information is received from the main CPU 63 by the types of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

  (6) In the first embodiment and the like, while the information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, the information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63, but is limited to this Instead, information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute the notification control of the notification means as in the eleventh embodiment so that notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. The main CPU 63 transmits a command corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters to the voice emission control device 81, so that the contents of the various parameters are displayed using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker 54 and the symbol display device 41. The corresponding notification may be executed.

  (7) When supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculation is performed. The contents of various parameters may be notified using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the symbol display device 41, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball entry mode of the game balls in the game area PA on the business day immediately before the start of the business of the game hall was normal.

  (8) If the various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 can not start the game until the prohibition release operation is performed. It may be For example, the configuration may be such that the game ball may not be launched, or may be configured such that each ball detection sensor 42a to 49a is disabled, and the first operation opening Even if a winning is generated in the 33 or the second operation port 34, the success or failure determination process may not be executed. In addition, as the prohibition release operation, the power of the pachinko machine 10 may be turned on again while the RAM erase switch is turned ON, and the operation can be performed when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11 It is good also as operation of the operation means which becomes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being performed as it is in a situation where the ball entry mode of the game balls of the game area PA is an abnormal mode.

  (9) Although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, the calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed in either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 May not be executed. In this case, the history information is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and the operator of the reading operation performs calculation of various parameters using the read history information. The configuration may be such that calculation of various parameters using the read history information is executed in the reading device. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced.

  (10) The main CPU 63 may have a configuration in which the management IC 66 is not provided and the function to execute storage processing of history information and the function to calculate various parameters in each of the above embodiments may be provided. The CPU 92 may have a configuration, or the sound emission control device 81 may have a configuration. When the payout side CPU 92 or the sound emission control device 81 has these functions, the information of the detection result of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control entity having the function. It will be.

  (11) The management IC 66 is provided with a power supply different from that of the main CPU 63, and even if the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters using history information. Or, it may be configured to be able to output information of history information or various parameters. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it is possible to read history information and various parameters by the reading device.

  (12) Although the reading terminal 102 used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters by the reading device, the present invention is limited thereto. Alternatively, a terminal used to read history information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, terminals used to read history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62 or may be provided in a position different from the MPU 62 in the main control board 61.

  (13) The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 in the above embodiments are provided as a non-volatile storage unit such as a flash memory. One of 116, 117, and 131 is provided as a volatile storage unit that requires supply of power to store and hold information, and backup power is supplied to the memory to operate power to the main CPU 63. The information may be stored and held even if the supply of the information is stopped. In this case, a backup power device dedicated to the memory may be provided, and the backup power may be supplied to the memory from the power / fire control device 78 supplying the backup power to the main RAM 65. It is also good.

  (14) The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which various parameters are calculated using history information, and the game ball does not store and hold the history information, and the game ball can be used in any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. The various parameters may be calculated and updated each time a new detection is performed. In this case, although the calculation frequency of various parameters increases, it becomes possible to extract various parameters at an arbitrary timing.

  (15) There is no limitation to the configuration in which the management IC 66 includes the management CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU and executes storage processing of history information and arithmetic processing of various parameters based on programs and data stored in the management ROM 113 Alternatively, a hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, in the case of the first embodiment, for example, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that the game ball has been detected by the detection sensor 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63, specifically, in the case of the first embodiment. The correspondence relationship information corresponding to the buffer having received the signal is stored from the correspondence relationship memory 116 in the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that point is stored in the history memory 117. Do. In the ninth embodiment, for example, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that the game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a, the hardware circuit receives the signal. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by one. Further, when the operation trigger in the first embodiment or the like occurs, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that time. In addition, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters that are calculation results and externally outputs history information.

  (16) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the information of the detection results of the ball entering detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as history information, the configuration that the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs is stored as history information The transition timing to the opening / closing execution mode and the end timing may be stored as history information, or the transition to the high frequency support mode may be stored as history information, or a predetermined abnormality may be stored. It may be configured to be stored as history information that an event has occurred. Further, the transition probability to the open / close execution mode may be calculated by using the history information as described above, or the transition probability to the high frequency support mode may be calculated. The frequency of occurrence may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by the reading device.

  (17) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate substrates, or may be provided as separate control devices.

  (18) In the first embodiment and the like, while the number of balls entered into the out slot 24a is measured, the number of balls entered is measured, while the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and The history information including the RTC information may be stored with regard to the payout of the game ball such as the second operation opening 34 and the entering of the bonus trigger into the winning portion as a trigger of the determination processing. Thereby, while making it possible to extract the ball game history of the game ball to the bonus opportunity ball entering unit, it is possible to calculate the ball entering frequency of the game ball to each bonus opportunity ball entering unit with respect to the total discharged number of game balls Become.

  (19) A configuration may be adopted in which objects other than those in the above embodiments are included as targets to be left as history information. For example, the tank 75 may be configured to store at least one of the fact that the lower tray 56a is full, the timing when the full condition was started, and the timing when the full condition was canceled, as history information. The payout device 76 may be in an abnormal state in which at least one of the non-ball state, the timing when the non-ball state is started, and the timing when the non-ball state is released may be stored as history information. Alternatively, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is canceled may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

  (20) In the first embodiment and the like described above, the configuration in which the sixteenth buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I / F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the sixteenth buffer 122 p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by the type identification command being transmitted from the main CPU 63 It is good also as composition. In this case, it is not necessary to set in advance in the management IC 66 the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p.

  (21) The number of ball entry to the predetermined ball entry portion generated in a state where the front door frame 14 is in the open state is stored as history information, and the number of ball entry determined using the history information May be externally output to the reader. This makes it possible to grasp the number of gaming balls that have entered a predetermined ball entry portion in a state in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and to grasp the presence or absence of fraud or the like. In addition, the number of ball entry into the predetermined ball entry portion generated in a state where the front door frame 14 is in the open state is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the calculated number of ball entry is an abnormal number In this case, an alarm may be issued. Thereby, it becomes possible to open the front door frame 14 illegitimately and to cope with the injustice which makes a predetermined ball entry part enter a game ball.

  (22) The management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

  (23) In the first embodiment and the like, the order of executing the confirmation process of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o in the management side CPU 112 may be reversed to that in the first embodiment and the like. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the process of changing the output state of each signal coincides with the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the process of checking the buffers 122a to 122o.

  (24) When the information stored in the main ROM 64 is externally output using the reading terminal 102, one of the program and data may be selectively output to the outside, and the predetermined program may be used. It may be possible to output only the signal. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reader. In addition, as a configuration for selectively outputting information to the outside, the main CPU 63 selects information to be externally output from selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and externally outputs the selected information. Is considered.

  (25) The separate information to be externally output through the reading terminal 102 for outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 to the outside is not limited to the history information and various parameters, for example, when an abnormality occurs. Alternatively, the history information of the abnormality occurrence may be stored, and the stored history information may be externally output through the reading terminal 102.

  (26) Detection sensors 42a to 48a are individually provided for each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a are provided. Although the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA is grasped by totaling the number of gaming balls detected, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, all of the discharging from the gaming area PA It is good also as composition provided with an ejection detection sensor which detects a game ball which passes through the passage field concerned while providing a passage field where each game ball passes. In this case, it is possible to grasp the total number of gaming balls discharged from the game area PA by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor. Moreover, in the said structure, it is a detection sensor for detecting the number of ball entry of each game ball of the general winning a prize opening 31, the special power prize winning device 32, the 1st operation opening 33, and the 2nd operation opening 34 similarly to said each embodiment. By providing 42a to 47a, it becomes possible to calculate the ratio of the number of gaming balls entered in each ball entry to the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA.

  (27) Instead of the configuration in which the display control unit 82 is controlled by the sound emission control unit 81 based on the command sent from the main control unit 60, display control based on the command sent from the main control unit 60 The device 82 may control the sound emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and one function of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated into the main control unit 60, and both functions of both control units may be integrated into the main control unit 60. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

  (28) Other types of pachinko machines and the like different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which a motorized role opens a predetermined number of times when gaming balls enter a specific area of a special device The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot when a right enters and becomes a jackpot, a pachinko machine equipped with other features, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a ball ball, and the like.

  A non-ball-ball type game machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of kinds of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by the passage of a predetermined time, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported in an openable and closable manner by the outer frame is provided with the storage section and the loading device, and the start lever is operated after the predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated by starting to rotate the reels.

  In the case of applying the present invention to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, for example, history information of a result of lottery processing of a combination executed when starting one game based on operation of a start lever. It is also possible to store as, and use the history information to calculate the actual winning probability of each combination, and when a transition to a special gaming state such as a bonus game occurs, store it as history information and store that history The information may be used to calculate the actual transition probability to the special game state, or the ratio of the number of stay games in the special game state to the total number of digested games may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be read by the reading device, or a notification corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters may be performed by the gaming machine itself.

  (29) The characteristic configurations of the first to nineteenth embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the sixteenth embodiment may be combined with the characteristic configuration of the seventeenth embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the eighteenth embodiment may be combined with the characteristic configuration of the nineteenth embodiment. Moreover, you may apply the structure of the said another form by arbitrary combinations with respect to the structure which applied the characteristic structure of the said 1-17 embodiment by the predetermined | prescribed combination.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Predetermined ball entry means (the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34) capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
When the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the specific storage executing means (main side CPU 63 executes the ball entry detection process so that the information corresponding thereto is stored in the specific memory means (main side RAM 65) Function),
A privilege for executing a process for enabling a player to be given a privilege based on the fact that information corresponding to the game ball having entered the predetermined ball entry means is stored in the specific storage means Giving means (a function of executing the processing of step S217 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of step S408 in the payout CPU 92);
In a gaming machine provided with
When the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage of the information corresponding thereto is the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the memory 117 for history, tenth embodiment) Then, the main RAM 65) is made to be executed, and the predetermined information (the first information that makes it possible to specify the number of balls or the frequency of ball entry to the predetermined ball entry means by the game machine or the device outside the game machine) -Predetermined storage execution means (first method for storing history information in the twelfth embodiment, numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means In the ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, step S2302, step S2305, and step S2308 in the main CPU 63. Step S2312, step S2316, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2320 and step S2323).

  According to the feature A1, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the specific memory means, and when the information is stored in the specific memory means, a privilege is given to the player Be done. As a result, the player plays a game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined entry means. In the configuration, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, storage of the corresponding information is executed to the predetermined storage means, and the number or frequency of ball entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means The predetermined storage means stores predetermined information that makes it possible to specify the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of balls or the frequency of ball entry into the predetermined ball entry means by the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, predetermined It becomes possible to appropriately manage the ball entry mode of the game ball to the ball entry means. Further, the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, so that it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined information does not become an execution trigger of a process for giving a privilege to a player.

  According to the feature A2, the predetermined information does not become an execution trigger of the process for giving the privilege to the player, thereby aiming to appropriately manage the ball entering mode of the game ball to the predetermined ball entering means. It becomes possible to store and hold predetermined information in the form of information.

Feature A3. It has a specific ball entry means (out port 24a, a general winning port 31, a special power winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34) capable of entering game balls flowing down the gaming area,
When the game ball enters the specified ball entry means, the predetermined memory execution means causes the storage of the corresponding information to be executed by the predetermined memory means, and the game ball is inserted into the specified ball entry means. Specific information which makes it possible to specify the number of balls by means of the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein numerical information being measured is stored in the predetermined storage means.

  According to the feature A3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means, but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to manage not only the management of the entering manner of the gaming balls to the predetermined entering means but also the management of the entering manner of the gaming balls to the specific entering means. In addition, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the frequency of entering the ball between the predetermined ball entering means and the specific ball entering means.

  Feature A4. All the ball entering means that discharges the entered game ball from the game area, including the predetermined ball entering means, becomes the storage target of the information corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball entered into the predetermined storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A3 characterized by being a ball entering means.

  According to the feature A4, all the ball entering means for discharging the game balls from the game area is the target of management using the information stored in the predetermined storage means, and the ball entering frequency for any ball entering means Can be managed using information stored in predetermined storage means. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls to be entered into the predetermined ball entry means with respect to the number of game balls discharged from the game area, using the information stored in the predetermined storage means.

  Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to a timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

  According to the feature A5, the predetermined information includes the information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the ball in the predetermined ball entry means, thereby utilizing the predetermined information, the game ball to the predetermined ball entry means It becomes possible to grasp ball entering history in detail.

  Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined information is counting information of the number of gaming balls having entered the predetermined ball entry means.

  According to the feature A6, the predetermined information is the count information of the number of gaming balls having entered the predetermined ball entry means, thereby suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information, and entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means Management of the

  Feature A7. The predetermined storage execution means is a means for storing in the predetermined storage means information enabling specification of whether or not the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means is in a predetermined situation. In the first to seventh embodiments, a function of executing the processing of step S804 and step S809 in the management CPU 112, in the eighth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, management The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A6, comprising: a function of executing the processing of step S2203 in the side CPU 112).

  According to the feature A7, it is possible to manage whether or not the game ball is entering the predetermined ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the predetermined situation is present.

  Feature A8. Any one of the features A1 to A7 characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

  According to the feature A8, it is possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage unit from the gaming machine and analyze the entering aspect of the gaming ball into the predetermined ball entry unit using the read information.

Feature A9. Program output means (function to execute the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102);
The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the external output unit outputs the information stored in the predetermined storage unit to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit.

  According to the feature A9, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  Feature A10. Means for specifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is any one of the information stored in the predetermined storage means and the control program, and outputting information corresponding to the specified result The gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that the CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of step S902.

  According to the feature A10, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage unit is externally output using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be the target of the external output is the control program and the predetermined The game machine side identifies which of the information stored in the storage means, and the identified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only necessary information even if the information output unit is also used.

Characteristics A11. First control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, comprising:

  According to the feature A11, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the specific storage execution means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load of the first control means is extremely increased. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while preventing the user from doing so.

  Feature A12. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

  According to the feature A12, by providing the first control means and the second control means on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means can be realized. It is possible to block.

Feature A13. It has a specific ball entry means (out port 24a, a general winning port 31, a special power winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34) capable of entering game balls flowing down the gaming area,
When the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the predetermined memory execution means causes the storage of the corresponding information to be executed by the predetermined memory means, whereby the game to the specific ball entry means is performed. Specific information (in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, history information, ninth to ninth, etc.) that enables identification of the number of balls or the frequency of ball entry by means of the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine In the eleventh embodiment, the numerical value information measured at the counter is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The first control means is
When the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the first transmission means (of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) transmits the first information to the second control means using the first signal path. Function to output either)
The second transmission means (of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) transmits the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the game ball enters the specified ball entering means Function to output either)
The gaming machine according to feature A11 or A12, comprising:

  According to the feature A13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entering means, but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entering means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to manage not only the management of the entering manner of the gaming balls to the predetermined entering means but also the management of the entering manner of the gaming balls to the specific entering means. In addition, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the frequency of entering the ball between the predetermined ball entering means and the specific ball entering means.

  Also, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and the game ball enters the specific ball entry means Second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the second control means can simplify the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information.

  Feature A14. Third transmission means for transmitting identification information for making it possible to specify by the second control means whether or not the first situation is a predetermined situation to the second control means using a third route (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, an open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, a signal The gaming machine according to feature A13, comprising: a function of outputting either a high frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.

  According to the feature A14, it is possible to manage whether the gaming ball is entering the predetermined ball entry means and the entering manner of the gaming ball into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the predetermined situation is present. In addition, since the identification information for specifying whether or not it is the predetermined situation is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the second control means causes the identification information to be the first information and the second information. It becomes possible to simplify the structure for distinguishing with other information, such as 2 information.

  Feature A15. The first control means corresponds to the second control means with identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entering means. A game machine according to feature A13 or A14, comprising identification information transmission means (function to execute recognition processing in the main CPU 63) to transmit.

  According to the feature A15, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means Therefore, there is no need to store the correspondence of these pieces of information in the second control means in advance. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the second control means.

  Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein the identification information transmission unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit when the supply of operation power to the first control unit is started.

  According to the feature A16, when the supply of the operation power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the predetermined ball entering means and the specific ball entering means In a situation where entering the game ball may occur, it is possible to make it possible to specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the entering means by the second control means. Become.

  Feature A17. The identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, according to feature A15 or A16. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A17, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration relating to communication as compared to FIG.

  Feature A18. When the second control means receives the identification information, it can be specified that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entering means A means for storing correspondence relationship information in the correspondence relationship storage means (the correspondence relationship memory 116) (a function for executing the correspondence relationship setting process in the management side CPU 112), any one of the features A15 to A17 The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature A18, the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entering means is stored in the second control means. Thereby, the information which makes it possible to specify the ball entering means corresponding to the information to be transmitted by the second control means is provided to the second control means every time when the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. There is no need to Thus, the amount of information of the first information and the second information can be suppressed.

Features A19. Third transmission means for transmitting, to the second control means, third information for making it possible to specify by the second control means whether or not the first control means is in a predetermined situation. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, an open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, a signal Function to output either a high frequency support mode signal or a door open signal)
The feature A15 is characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information can identify whether the third situation is the predetermined situation without receiving the identification information. To the gaming machine according to any one of A18.

  According to the feature A19, it is possible to manage whether the game ball is entering the predetermined ball entry means and the ball entering mode of the game ball into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the predetermined situation is present. In addition, it is possible to specify that the third information is information that can specify whether the predetermined situation or not, by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

  Feature A20. The second control means, as a receiving unit capable of receiving information from the first control means, is more than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. A gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A19, characterized in that a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

  According to the feature A20, the second control means is provided with a number of receiving units, the number of which is larger than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Accordingly, even when the number of types of the information increases or decreases, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration related to the reception unit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A21. A first external output means (management means for outputting information of a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information making it possible to recognize that the information corresponds to the predetermined ball entering means to a device outside the gaming machine Function for executing the process for external output in the side CPU 112),
A second external output unit (management unit for outputting information of a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage unit and information making it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the specific ball entry unit to a device outside the gaming machine (management Function for executing the process for external output in the side CPU 112),
A game machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, comprising:

  According to the feature A21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and using the read information, the ball entering mode of the game ball to the predetermined ball entering means and the game ball to the specific ball entering means It becomes possible to specify the ball landing mode. Moreover, when the said external output is performed, while the information of the combination of the information which makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to a predetermined information and a predetermined ball entering means is outputted outside, it respond | corresponds to a specific information and a specific ball entering means The information of the combination with the information that makes it possible to recognize is output to the outside. Thereby, it is possible to specify each ball entry aspect using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

  Feature A22. Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, ninth, etc.) for calculating mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball in the game area using the predetermined information In the tenth and twelfth embodiments, a function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, execute the processing of step S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management CPU 112 Function, function to execute the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU112 in the fourth embodiment, function to execute the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU112 in the fifth embodiment, and in the management side CPU112 in the seventh embodiment A function of executing the process of step S2005, an eleventh The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A21, characterized in that the facilities embodiment has a function) for executing the processing of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature A22, the gaming machine calculates mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the gaming ball using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the game machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball, or it is possible to externally output the mode information which is the result of calculation using predetermined information .

Feature A23. A means for causing the predetermined storage means to make it possible to specify whether or not the game ball's entering the predetermined ball entering means is in a predetermined situation, in the predetermined memory executing means is the predetermined memory means (first In the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S804 and step S809 in the management CPU 112, in the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management CPU 112, and in the management of the ninth embodiment Function to execute the processing of step S2203 in the CPU 112),
The information computing means is means for computing the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the ball entry to the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined situation (first, second, In the sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, step S1408 in the management side CPU 112, A function to execute the processing of step S1413 and step S1417, a function to execute the processing of step S1602 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function to execute the processing of step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment In the seventh embodiment, step S2005 in the management CPU 112 Ability to run the process, the gaming machine according to the features A22 in the eleventh embodiment which is characterized in that a function) for executing the processing of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature A23, it is possible to calculate the mode information corresponding to the ball entering mode of the gaming ball by discriminating whether or not it is a predetermined situation.

  Feature A24. A unit (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit when the aspect information is calculated by the information operation unit) In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112, and the function of executing the process of step S1605 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment are included in the feature A22 or A23. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A24, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, so that it is difficult to generate an event that the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means is exceeded by the predetermined information. It is possible to

  Feature A25. Even if the aspect information is computed by the information computing means, the condition that the predetermined information used when computing the aspect information is stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained. Or the gaming machine described in A23.

  According to the feature A25, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, thereby reading the aspect information and entering the game ball When analyzing an aspect, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to predetermined information on which the calculation of the aspect information is based.

  Feature A26. The information calculating means is configured to stop supplying the operating power to the control means having the specific storage executing means, or to start supplying the operating power to the control means having the specific storage executing means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A22 to A25, which calculates the aspect information.

  According to the feature A26, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operation power to the control means is stopped or the supply of the operation power to the control means is stopped, the mode information is calculated in each business day unit. It becomes possible to manage.

  Feature A27. The information processing means calculates the aspect information when an operation trigger that can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of A26.

  According to the feature A27, the mode information is calculated each time the operation trigger which is repeatedly generated in the situation where the operation power is supplied to the control means, so that the mode information is finely managed within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature A28. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information each time a period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period,
The period measurement means stops measurement of a period in a situation where a game is not executed, and restarts measurement of the period from a state before the suspension when a game is started in a situation where measurement of a period is stopped. A game machine according to any one of features A22 to A27, characterized in that

  According to the feature A28, since the mode information is calculated each time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the operation frequency of the mode information only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped in a situation where the game is not executed, and the measurement of the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop when the game is started. Thereby, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in the situation in which the game is executed.

  Feature A29. Features A22 to A28 characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A29, it is possible to easily grasp the entering mode of the gaming ball by outputting the mode information to the device outside the gaming machine.

  Characteristics A30. When the said external output means outputs the said aspect information to the apparatus of the said game machine outside, the said predetermined information is output to the apparatus of the said game machine, The game machine of the feature A29 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature A30, when not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, the mode information is read and the ball entering mode of the gaming ball is analyzed, not only the mode information but also the mode information It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the operation of the aspect information.

Characteristics A31. First control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
When the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, the external output means outputs the aspect information to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in A30.

  According to the feature A31, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the aspect based on the instruction from the first control means Information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature A32. The information calculating means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined operation trigger occurs,
Result storing and executing means (in the third embodiment, step S1410, step S1414 and step S1418 in the management side CPU 112) for sequentially storing the aspect information computed by the information computing means in the computation result storage means (memory for computation result 131) A gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A31, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of (4) and a function of executing the processing of step S1604 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature A32, it is possible to accumulate the mode information in the gaming machine. Thereby, when managing the ball entry mode of the game ball, it becomes possible to read out a plurality of mode information collectively.

Feature A33. The result storage execution means is
A unit (function of executing the process of step S1603 in the management CPU 112) for determining whether or not the mode information is storage target information
A unit (function to execute the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112) for storing the mode information in the operation result storage unit when the mode information is the storage target information;
The gaming machine according to feature A32, comprising:

  According to the feature A33, when the mode information of the operation result corresponds to the storage target information, the mode information is stored in the operation result storage unit. As a result, it becomes possible to limit the aspect information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

  Feature A34. The game according to the feature A32 or A33, wherein the result storage execution means stores information that enables specifying the time when the mode information is calculated, in the operation result storage means, with information associated with the mode information. Machine.

  According to the feature A34, information for specifying the time when the mode information is calculated is attached to the mode information. This makes it possible to analyze each piece of mode information while grasping the time when each piece of mode information is calculated.

Feature A35. First control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
The information processing unit according to any one of the features A22 to A34, wherein the information processing unit calculates the aspect information when the second control unit receives the operation trigger information transmitted from the first control unit. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature A35, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the aspect based on the instruction from the first control means Information can be calculated by the second control means.

  Feature A36. Informing control means (a function to execute the processing of step S2605, step S2607 and step S2608 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notifying means (light emitting unit for notifying 151) to notify the contents corresponding to the mode information A game machine according to any one of features A22 to A35, characterized in that:

  According to the feature A36, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thus, it becomes possible for the game hall manager or the like to grasp the management result of the entering mode of the game ball without reading the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature A37. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is accommodated in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature A36, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

  According to the feature A37, it is possible to make it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature A38. First control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A36 or A37, wherein the first control means comprises the information calculation means and the notification control means.

  According to the feature A38, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result It is possible to integrate the function for causing the notification corresponding to the above to be executed to the first control means.

  Features A39. The notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the aspect information is information in a first range, and when the aspect information is information in a second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features A36 to A38, characterized in that the notification means is controlled such that a second notification is performed.

  According to the feature A39, the mode information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the mode information is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

  Feature A40. A feature characterized in that the predetermined ball entering means has means for externally outputting the corresponding information corresponding to the game ball entering the ball (a function for executing the process of step S 218 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of A39.

  According to the feature A40, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means in the configuration in which the corresponding information corresponding to the game ball is externally output. In this way, by using the correspondence information, while simply grasping the number of ball entry into the predetermined ball entry means and the ball entry frequency, it is possible to use the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means to obtain the predetermined number of balls. It becomes possible to correctly grasp the number of ball entry of the game ball to the ball means and the pitch frequency.

  Feature A41. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A40, wherein the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature A41, in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as the dedicated circuit, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A41, the feature B1 to B20, the feature C1 to C19, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E4, the feature F1 to F10, the feature G1 to G7, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature A1 to A41 Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the information corresponding to that is the predetermined storage means (the memory for history 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the main side in the tenth embodiment) The predetermined information (the history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and the numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by the RAM 65). The predetermined storage execution means (the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the main side CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) to be stored in the storage means Step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323 are performed. To function),
Information operation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments) for calculating aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the predetermined information Then, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment The function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management CPU112, the function of executing the processing of step S1802 in the management CPU112 in the fifth embodiment, and the processing of step S2005 in the management CPU112 in the seventh embodiment Function, main side CP in the eleventh embodiment Processing in step S2603 and the ability to perform) in 63,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, when a predetermined event occurs, storage of corresponding information is executed to the predetermined storage unit, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, management of the occurrence mode of the predetermined event is appropriately performed. It is possible to do Further, the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, so that it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the gaming machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. Thus, for example, the game machine itself can perform processing corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output aspect information which is a result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

Feature B2. Means for causing the predetermined storage execution means to cause the predetermined storage means to be able to specify whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments) The function of executing the processing of step S804 and step S809 in the management CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and the processing of step S2203 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment Function to execute)
The information calculation means is a means for calculating the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation (first, second, sixth, eighth, eighth 9, functions of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth and twelfth embodiments, and processing of step S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment Function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, management in the seventh embodiment Execute the processing of step S2005 in the CPU 112 Function, the gaming machine according to the features B1 in the eleventh embodiment which is characterized in that a function) for executing the processing of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to calculate aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by distinguishing whether or not the predetermined situation is present.

  Feature B3. A unit (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit when the aspect information is calculated by the information operation unit) In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112, and the function of executing the process of step S1605 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment are included in the feature B1 or B2 Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B3, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult to generate an event that the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means is exceeded by the predetermined information. It is possible to

  Feature B4. Even if the aspect information is computed by the information computing means, the state where the predetermined information used when computing the aspect information is stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained. Or the game machine as described in B2.

  According to the feature B4, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, thereby reading the aspect information and playing the game for the predetermined period. When analyzing the result of, it becomes possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the mode information.

  Feature B5. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the supply of the operation power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or the supply of the operation power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of B4.

  According to the feature B5, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operation power to the control means is stopped or the supply of the operation power to the control means is started, the mode information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

  Feature B6. The information calculating means calculates the aspect information when an operation trigger which can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where the operation power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62), any one of the features B1 to B5 The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature B6, the mode information is calculated each time the operation trigger which is repeatedly generated in the situation where the operation power is supplied to the control means, so that the mode information is finely managed within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature B7. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information each time a period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period,
The period measurement means stops measurement of a period in a situation where a game is not executed, and restarts measurement of the period from a state before the suspension when a game is started in a situation where measurement of a period is stopped. A game machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that

  According to the feature B7, since the mode information is calculated each time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the mode information only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped in a situation where the game is not executed, and the measurement of the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop when the game is started. Thereby, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in the situation in which the game is executed.

  Feature B8. Features B1 to B7 characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature B8, it is possible to easily grasp the entering mode of the gaming ball by outputting the mode information to the device outside the gaming machine.

  Feature B9. When the said external output means outputs the said aspect information to the apparatus of the said game machine outside, the said predetermined | prescribed information is output to the apparatus of the said game machine, The game machine of the feature B8 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature B9, when not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, the mode information is read out and the ball entering mode of the gaming ball is analyzed, not only the mode information but also the mode information It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the operation of the aspect information.

Feature B10. First control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
When the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, the external output means outputs the aspect information to a device outside the gaming machine, or the feature B8 or The gaming machine described in B9.

  According to the feature B10, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the aspect based on the instruction from the first control means Information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature B11. The information calculating means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined operation trigger occurs,
Result storing and executing means (in the third embodiment, step S1410, step S1414 and step S1418 in the management side CPU 112) for sequentially storing the aspect information computed by the information computing means in the computation result storage means (memory for computation result 131) The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B10, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of (4) and a function of executing the processing of step S1604 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature B11, it is possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. Thereby, when managing the mode of the game result in a predetermined period, it becomes possible to read out a plurality of mode information collectively.

  Feature B12. The result storage execution means is provided with a means (function to execute the processing of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112) to store the mode information in the operation result storage means when the mode information is storage target information. The gaming machine according to feature B11, characterized in that

  According to the feature B12, when the mode information of the operation result corresponds to the storage target information, the mode information is stored in the operation result storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to limit the aspect information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

  Feature B13. The game according to the feature B11 or B12, wherein the result storage execution means stores information for specifying the time when the aspect information is calculated, in association with the aspect information, and storing the information in the operation result storage means. Machine.

  According to the feature B13, information for specifying the time when the mode information is calculated is attached to the mode information. This makes it possible to analyze each piece of mode information while grasping the time when each piece of mode information is calculated.

Feature B14. First control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
The information processing means according to any one of the features B1 to B13, wherein the information processing means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives the operation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature B14, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the aspect based on the instruction from the first control means Information can be calculated by the second control means.

  Feature B15. Informing control means (a function to execute the processing of step S2605, step S2607 and step S2608 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notifying means (light emitting unit for notifying 151) to notify the contents corresponding to the mode information A game machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, characterized in that:

  According to the feature B15, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thus, it becomes possible for the game hall manager or the like to grasp the game management result in a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature B16. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is accommodated in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature B15, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

  According to the feature B16, it is possible to make it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature B17. A first control unit (main CPU 63) having the information calculation unit and the notification control unit;
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature B15 or B16, comprising:

  According to the feature B17, the function of calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means. It is possible to integrate the function for causing the notification corresponding to the above to be executed to the first control means.

  Feature B18. The notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the aspect information is information in a first range, and when the aspect information is information in a second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features B15 to B17, characterized in that the notification means is controlled to execute a second notification.

  According to the feature B18, the mode information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the mode information is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature B19. Predetermined ball entry means (the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34) capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
When the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, storage of the information corresponding thereto is the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the history memory 117, the tenth embodiment) In this case, predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by being executed on the main side RAM 65). Means to be stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112, in the tenth embodiment The processing of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and step S2323 in the main CPU 63 is carried out. To function),
Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, ninth, etc.) for calculating mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball in the game area using the predetermined information In the tenth and twelfth embodiments, a function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, execute the processing of step S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management CPU 112 Function, function to execute the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU112 in the fourth embodiment, function to execute the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU112 in the fifth embodiment, and in the management side CPU112 in the seventh embodiment A function of executing the process of step S2005, an eleventh And functions) for executing the processing of step S2603 in the main side CPU63 in facilities form,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B19, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, storage processing of the corresponding information is executed to the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of balls or the frequency of ball entry into the predetermined ball entry means by the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, predetermined It becomes possible to appropriately manage the ball entry mode of the game ball to the ball entry means. Further, the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, so that it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, the game machine calculates mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the game machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball, or it is possible to externally output the mode information which is the result of calculation using predetermined information .

  Feature B20. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B19, wherein the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature B20, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A41, the feature B1 to B20, the feature C1 to C19, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E4, the feature F1 to F10, the feature G1 to G7, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature B1 to B20 Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the information corresponding to that is the predetermined storage means (the memory for history 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the main side in the tenth embodiment) The predetermined information (the history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and the numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by the RAM 65). The predetermined storage execution means (the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the main side CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) to be stored in the storage means Step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323 are performed. To function),
Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, and eighth means for calculating aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the predetermined information each time a predetermined operation trigger occurs. , 9th, 10th and 12th embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, step S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112 Function of executing the process of step S1602 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1602 in the fifth embodiment, and the seventh embodiment Executes the process of step S2005 in the management CPU 112 That function, and function) In the eleventh embodiment of executing the processing in step S2603 in the main side CPU 63,
Result storing and executing means (in the third embodiment, step S1410, step S1414 and step S1418 in the management side CPU 112) for sequentially storing the aspect information computed by the information computing means in the computation result storage means (memory for computation result 131) A function of executing the process of (4), and the function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, storage of the corresponding information is executed to the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means . This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of balls or the frequency of ball entry into the predetermined ball entry means by the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, predetermined It becomes possible to appropriately manage the ball entry mode of the game ball to the ball entry means. Further, the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, so that it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the gaming machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. Thus, for example, the game machine itself can perform processing corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output aspect information which is a result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

  In addition, it becomes possible to accumulate aspect information in the gaming machine. Thereby, when managing the mode of the game result in a predetermined period, it becomes possible to read out a plurality of mode information collectively.

  Feature C2. The result storage execution means is provided with a means (function to execute the processing of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112) to store the mode information in the operation result storage means when the mode information is storage target information. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that

  According to the feature C2, when the mode information of the operation result corresponds to the storage target information, the mode information is stored in the operation result storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to limit the aspect information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

  Feature C3. The game according to the feature C1 or C2 characterized in that the result storage execution means stores information for specifying the time when the mode information is calculated by adding the mode information to the mode information. Machine.

  According to the feature C3, information for specifying the time when the mode information is calculated is attached to the mode information. This makes it possible to analyze each piece of mode information while grasping the time when each piece of mode information is calculated.

Feature C4. Means for causing the predetermined storage execution means to cause the predetermined storage means to be able to specify whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments) The function of executing the processing of step S804 and step S809 in the management CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and the processing of step S2203 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment Function to execute)
The information calculation means is a means for calculating the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation (first, second, sixth, eighth, eighth 9, functions of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth and twelfth embodiments, and processing of step S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment Function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, management in the seventh embodiment Execute the processing of step S2005 in the CPU 112 Function, the gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3, wherein the in the eleventh embodiment which has a function) for executing the processing of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature C4, it is possible to calculate aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by distinguishing whether or not the predetermined situation is present.

  Feature C5. A unit (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit when the aspect information is calculated by the information operation unit) In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112, and the function of executing the processing of step S1605 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment) is provided. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature C5, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, so that it is difficult to generate an event that the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means is exceeded by the predetermined information. It is possible to

  Feature C6. A feature C1 is characterized in that even when the aspect information is computed by the information computing means, the predetermined information used when computing the aspect information is maintained in the predetermined storage means. To the gaming machine according to any one of C5.

  According to the feature C6, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, thereby reading the aspect information and playing the game for the predetermined period. When analyzing the result of, it becomes possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the mode information.

  Feature C7. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the supply of the operation power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of the operation power to the control means is started. To the game machine according to any one of C6.

  According to the feature C7, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operation power to the control means is stopped or the supply of the operation power to the control means is started, the mode information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

  Feature C8. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information when an operation trigger which can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where the operation power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62), any one of the features C1 to C7 The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature C8, the mode information is calculated each time the operation trigger is repeatedly generated in the situation where the operation power is supplied to the control means, so that the mode information is finely managed within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature C9. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information each time a period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period,
The period measurement means stops measurement of a period in a situation where a game is not executed, and restarts measurement of the period from a state before the suspension when a game is started in a situation where measurement of a period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C8 characterized in that:

  According to the feature C9, since the mode information is calculated each time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the operation frequency of the mode information only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped in a situation where the game is not executed, and the measurement of the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop when the game is started. Thereby, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in the situation in which the game is executed.

  Feature C10. Features C1 to C9 characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature C10, the appearance information of the gaming ball can be easily grasped by outputting the aspect information to the device outside the gaming machine.

  Feature C11. When the said external output means outputs the said aspect information to the apparatus of the said game machine outside, the said predetermined | prescribed information is output to the apparatus of the said game machine, The game machine of the feature C10 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature C11, when not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, the mode information is read out and the ball entering mode of the gaming ball is analyzed, not only the mode information but It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the operation of the aspect information.

Feature C12. First control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
The external output means outputs the aspect information to a device external to the gaming machine, when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means. The gaming machine described in C11.

  According to the feature C12, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the aspect based on the instruction from the first control means Information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature C13. First control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
The information processing means may calculate the aspect information when the second control means receives the operation trigger information transmitted from the first control means, in any one of the features C1 to C12. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature C13, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the aspect based on the instruction from the first control means Information can be calculated by the second control means.

  Feature C14. Informing control means (a function to execute the processing of step S2605, step S2607 and step S2608 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notifying means (light emitting unit for notifying 151) to notify the contents corresponding to the mode information A game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C13, characterized in that:

  According to the feature C14, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thus, it becomes possible for the game hall manager or the like to grasp the game management result in a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature C15. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is accommodated in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature C14, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

  According to the feature C15, it is possible to make it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature C16. First control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature C14 or C15, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

  According to the feature C16, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result It is possible to integrate the function for causing the notification corresponding to the above to be executed to the first control means.

  Feature C17. The notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the aspect information is information in a first range, and when the aspect information is information in a second range. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C14 to C16, characterized in that the notification means is controlled to execute a second notification.

  According to the feature C17, the mode information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the mode information is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature C18. Predetermined ball entry means (the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34) capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
When the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, storage of the information corresponding thereto is the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the history memory 117, the tenth embodiment) In this case, predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by being executed on the main side RAM 65). Means to be stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112, in the tenth embodiment The processing of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and step S2323 in the main CPU 63 is carried out. To function),
Information calculation means for calculating mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball in the game area in a predetermined period using the predetermined information each time a predetermined operation trigger occurs 2, 6th, 8th, 9th, 10th and 12th embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the step in the management side CPU 112 The function of executing the processing of step S1408, step S1413 and step S1417, the function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, and the processing of step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment Function, Step S in the management CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment Function executing the processing in 005, the eleventh feature in the embodiment of executing the processing in step S2603 in the main side CPU 63),
Result storing and executing means (in the third embodiment, step S1410, step S1414 and step S1418 in the management side CPU 112) for sequentially storing the aspect information computed by the information computing means in the computation result storage means (memory for computation result 131) A function of executing the process of (4), and the function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C18, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage process of the corresponding information is executed to the predetermined memory means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined memory means Become. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of balls or the frequency of ball entry into the predetermined ball entry means by the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, predetermined It becomes possible to appropriately manage the ball entry mode of the game ball to the ball entry means. Further, the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, so that it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, the game machine calculates mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the game machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball, or it is possible to externally output the mode information which is the result of calculation using predetermined information .

  In addition, it becomes possible to accumulate aspect information in the gaming machine. Thereby, when managing the mode of the game result in a predetermined period, it becomes possible to read out a plurality of mode information collectively.

  Feature C19. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C18, wherein the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature C19, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  Note that for the configuration of the features C1 to C19, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to H Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the information corresponding to that is the predetermined storage means (the memory for history 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the main side in the tenth embodiment) The predetermined information (the history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and the numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by the RAM 65). First storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (function to execute history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, main side in the tenth embodiment The processing of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in the CPU 63 is carried out. To function),
When the specific event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the information corresponding to it is executed in the predetermined storage means, whereby the specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, the Second storage executing means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments) for storing the numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments in the predetermined storage means A function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and step S2323 in the main CPU 63 ,
The first external output means (management side CPU 112) outputs the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so as to make it possible to recognize that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event. Function to execute processing for external output in
The second external output means (management side CPU 112) outputs the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so that it can be recognized that the specific information corresponds to the specific event. Function to execute processing for external output in
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, it is possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage unit from the gaming machine, and to identify the generation mode of the predetermined event and the generation mode of the specific event using the read information. In addition, when the external output is performed, the predetermined information is output to the outside so that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event, and the specific information corresponds to the specific event. The specific information is output to the outside in such a manner as to make it recognizable. Thus, even if the second control means does not process the information, it is possible to specify the occurrence mode of each event using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to the feature D1, further comprising means for externally outputting correspondence information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event (a function of executing the processing of step S218 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature D2, when the predetermined event occurs, in the configuration in which the corresponding information corresponding thereto is output to the outside, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage unit. As a result, by using the correspondence information, while simply grasping the occurrence frequency and occurrence frequency of the predetermined event, by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the occurrence frequency and occurrence frequency of the predetermined event can be accurately determined. It is possible to

  Feature D3. The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2, wherein the predetermined information is information on the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is information on the number of times the specific event has occurred.

  According to the feature D3, the predetermined information is counting information of the number of occurrences of the predetermined event and the specific information is counting information of the number of occurrences of the specific event, thereby suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information and the identification information. It becomes possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event.

Feature D4. Program output means (function to execute the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102);
The first external output unit and the second external output unit output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit. The gaming machine according to any one of D3.

  According to the feature D4, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  Feature D5. Selection means for specifying which one of the information stored in the predetermined storage means and the control program is the information to be output from the information output unit, and for outputting information corresponding to the identification result The gaming machine according to the feature D4, comprising a function of executing the processing of step S902 in the main CPU 63.

  According to the feature D5, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage unit is externally output using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be the target of the external output is the control program and the predetermined The game machine side identifies which of the information stored in the storage means, and the identified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only necessary information even if the information output unit is also used.

  Feature D6. The selection unit is configured such that, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit, the information to be output from the information output unit is stored in the predetermined storage unit and the control program. The game machine according to Feature D5, characterized in that which one of them is specified.

  According to the feature D6, based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit, it is specified which information the information to be output from the information output unit is. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the selection of the information to be output from becoming complicated.

  Feature D7. A chip (MPU 62) having program storage means (main ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output unit, the first external output means, and the second external output means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D6.

  According to the feature D7, signal paths for the information output unit can be integrated in the chip. This makes it possible to achieve excellent effects as described above while making it difficult to make unauthorized access to the signal path for the information output unit.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A41, the feature B1 to B20, the feature C1 to C19, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E4, the feature F1 to F10, the feature G1 to G7, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature D1 to D7. Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Program output means (function of executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102)
Information output means for outputting special information using the information output unit (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, it is possible to externally output the special information by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. This makes it possible to externally output the special information while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  Feature E2. Selection means for specifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is either the special information or the control program, and for outputting information corresponding to the specification result (step S902 in the main CPU 63) A game machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of

  According to the feature E2, in the configuration in which the special information is output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be the target of the external output is any of the control program and the special information The game machine side is identified, and the identified information is externally output. This makes it possible to read out only necessary information even if the information output unit is also used.

  Feature E3. The selection means determines which of the special information and the control program the information to be output from the information output unit is based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit. The gaming machine according to the feature E2, which is characterized by specifying.

  According to the feature E3, based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit, it is specified which information the information to be output from the information output unit is. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the selection of the information to be output from becoming complicated.

  Feature E4. A chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output unit and the information output means any one of the features E1 to E3 The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature E4, it is possible to integrate signal paths for the information output unit in the chip. This makes it possible to achieve excellent effects as described above while making it difficult to make unauthorized access to the signal path for the information output unit.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A41, the feature B1 to B20, the feature C1 to C19, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E4, the feature F1 to F10, the feature G1 to G7, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature E1 to E4 Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. A first control unit (main CPU 63) and a second control unit (management CPU 112);
The first control means is
Privilege giving means (a function of executing the processing of step S217 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of step S408 in the payout CPU 92) for giving a privilege to the player when a predetermined event occurs;
Information transmitting means (function for executing management output processing in the main CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event;
Equipped with
When the second control means receives the predetermined event information, the storage of the information corresponding to the predetermined event information is the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the history memory 117, the tenth) In the embodiment, by being executed in the main side RAM 65), predetermined information (first to eighth) which makes it possible to specify the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine. , And 12th embodiment: predetermined storage execution means (first to ninth) for storing history information and numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments in the predetermined storage means In the eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, step S2302, step S2305, and step S2 in the main CPU 63. 08, step S2312, step S2316, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2320 and step S2323).

  According to the feature F1, a bonus is given to the player when a predetermined event occurs. As a result, the player plays a game while expecting a predetermined event to occur. In the configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, storage of corresponding information is executed to the predetermined storage means, and the occurrence frequency or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine The predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, management of the occurrence mode of the predetermined event is appropriately performed. It is possible to do Further, the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, so that it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege giving means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load of the first control means does not extremely increase. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

  According to the feature F2, by providing the first control means and the second control means on the same chip, illegal access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means can be realized. It is possible to block.

Feature F3. When the specific event occurs, the predetermined storage execution means executes the storage process of the information corresponding to that to the predetermined storage means, so that the number or frequency of occurrence of the specific event is outside the gaming machine or the gaming machine. Specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) which can be specified by the apparatus is stored in the predetermined storage means To be
The first control means is
A first transmission unit (a function of outputting one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits the first information to the second control unit using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs )When,
A second transmission unit (a function of outputting one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits second information to the second control unit using the second signal path when the specific event occurs )When,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, comprising:

  According to the feature F3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the mode of occurrence of a predetermined event but also the mode of occurrence of a specific event. In addition, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of occurrence frequency between the predetermined event and the specific event.

  In addition, when the predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. It is sent to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the second control means can simplify the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information.

  Feature F4. Third transmission means for transmitting identification information for making it possible to specify by the second control means whether or not the first situation is a predetermined situation to the second control means using a third route (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, an open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, a signal The gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized in that it has a function of outputting either a high frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.

  According to the feature F4, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by discriminating whether or not it is the predetermined situation. In addition, since the identification information for specifying whether or not it is the predetermined situation is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the second control means causes the identification information to be the first information and the second information. It becomes possible to simplify the structure for distinguishing with other information, such as 2 information.

  Feature F5. Identification information for transmitting, to the second control means, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event. The gaming machine according to the feature F3 or F4, characterized in that it comprises transmission means (a function for executing the recognition process in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature F5, since the first information corresponds to the predetermined event, and the identification information indicating that the second information corresponds to the specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. There is no need to store in advance the correspondence of these pieces of information in the second control means. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the second control means.

  Feature F6. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the identification information transmission unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit when the supply of operation power to the first control unit is started.

  According to the feature F6, when the supply of the operation power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the predetermined event and the specific event may occur. In the situation, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entering means can be specified by the second control means.

  Feature F7. The identification information transmission unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, according to feature F5 or F6. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature F7, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration relating to communication as compared to FIG.

  Feature F8. When the second control means receives the identification information, it is possible to specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event. Are provided in the correspondence relationship storage means (the correspondence relationship memory 116) (means for executing correspondence relationship setting processing in the management side CPU 112) according to any one of the features F5 to F7 Gaming machine.

  According to the feature F8, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event is stored in the second control means. Thereby, the information that makes it possible to specify the type of the event corresponding to the information to be transmitted by the second control means is provided to the second control means every time when the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. There is no need to Thus, the amount of information of the first information and the second information can be suppressed.

Feature F9. Third transmission means for transmitting, to the second control means, third information for making it possible to specify by the second control means whether or not the first control means is in a predetermined situation. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, an open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, a signal Function to output either a high frequency support mode signal or a door open signal)
A feature F5 characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information can be specified whether it is the predetermined situation or not, without receiving the identification information. To the gaming machine according to any one of F8.

  According to the feature F9, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by discriminating whether or not it is the predetermined situation. In addition, it is possible to specify that the third information is information that can specify whether the predetermined situation or not, by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

  Feature F10. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature F10, in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above.

  Note that for the configurations of the features F1 to F10, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, the features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, the feature group D, the feature group E, and the feature group F, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, management of the gaming machine needs to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. First control means (main CPU 63);
Second control means (management side CPU 112) for receiving the information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means is
A first transmission unit (a function of outputting one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits the first information to the second control unit using the first signal path when the first event occurs )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the second event occurs (function for outputting any of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Identification information transmitting means for transmitting identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means (main side A function of executing recognition processing in the CPU 63),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G1, when the first event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the second event occurs, the second signal path is used The second information is then sent to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the second control means can simplify the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information.

  Further, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. There is no need to store in advance the correspondence relationship in the second control means. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the second control means.

  Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the identification information transmission unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit when the supply of operation power to the first control unit is started.

  According to the feature G2, when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the predetermined ball entering means and the specific ball entering means In a situation where entering the game ball may occur, it is possible to make it possible to specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the entering means by the second control means. Become.

  Feature G3. The identification information transmission unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, as described in the feature G1 or G2. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature G3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration relating to communication as compared to FIG.

  Feature G4. When the second control means receives the identification information, it can be specified that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. A device according to any one of the features G1 to G3 characterized in that the relationship information is stored in the correspondence relationship storage means (the correspondence relationship memory 116) (function to execute the correspondence relationship setting processing in the management side CPU 112). The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature G4, the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entering means is stored in the second control means. Thus, it is necessary to provide the second control means with the information for making it possible to specify the event corresponding to the information to be transmitted by the second control means, from the first control means to the first information or the second information. There is no Thus, the amount of information of the first information and the second information can be suppressed.

Feature G5. Third transmission means for transmitting, to the second control means, third information for making it possible to specify by the second control means whether or not the first control means is in a predetermined situation. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, an open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, a signal Function to output either a high frequency support mode signal or a door open signal)
A feature G1 characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information can be specified whether it is the predetermined situation or not, without receiving the identification information. To the gaming machine according to any one of G4.

  According to the feature G5, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the first event and the occurrence mode of the second event by distinguishing whether or not the predetermined situation is present. In addition, it is possible to specify that the third information is information that can specify whether the predetermined situation or not, by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

  Feature G6. As a signal path capable of transmitting information from the first control means to the second control means, the number of the signal paths which is larger than the number of types of information which needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means A game machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that a signal path is provided.

  According to the feature G6, since the number of signal paths greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is provided, Even when the number of types increases or decreases, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration regarding the signal path. Therefore, it is possible to improve the versatility of the second control means.

  Feature G7. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature G7, in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A41, the feature B1 to B20, the feature C1 to C19, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E4, the feature F1 to F10, the feature G1 to G7, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature G1 to G7. Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature G group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., it is necessary to make the configuration regarding communication suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the information corresponding to that occurs in the predetermined storage means (the counter area 171 for normal use, the counter area 172 for open / close execution mode and the counter area 173 for high frequency support mode Is executed so that predetermined information (numerical information measured in each of the counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, 173a to 173e in the thirteenth embodiment) is stored in the predetermined storage unit. (A function of executing the processing of steps S3204 to S3205 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment)
Information deriving means (function to execute the process of step S3504 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) for deriving aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the predetermined information;
In the situation where the above-mentioned form information is derived by the information deriving means, the limiting means (the processing of steps S3404 to S3407 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment is executed so that the progress of the game is restricted). Function, function of executing processing of step S3809 of the main CPU 63 in the fourteenth embodiment),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H1, when a predetermined event occurs, storage of the corresponding information is executed to the predetermined storage unit, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, management of the occurrence mode of the predetermined event is appropriately performed. It is possible to do Further, the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, so that it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the gaming machine derives aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. Thereby, for example, it is possible to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by the gaming machine itself.

  Further, in the situation where the aspect information is derived, the progress of the game is limited. This makes it possible to derive aspect information in a situation different from the situation in which a normal game is played. Therefore, it is not necessary to parallel the progress of the normal game and the derivation of the aspect information, and the processing load can be reduced.

  Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the restriction means restricts execution of at least a part of the processing for advancing a game.

  According to the feature H2, in the situation where the mode information is derived, the process per unit time is processed in the situation where the mode information is derived by restricting the execution of at least a part of the processes for advancing the game in the situation where the mode information is derived It is possible to prevent the number from extremely increasing.

  Feature H3. The gaming machine according to the feature H1 or H2, wherein the information deriving means derives the mode information after the progress of the game is restricted by the limiting means.

  According to the feature H3, by deriving the aspect information after the progress of the game is restricted, the aspect information can be derived in a situation where the occurrence of a predetermined event accompanying the progress of the game does not newly occur.

Feature H4. Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 27) for launching game balls toward the game area;
Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning hole 31, special power winning device 32, first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Equipped with
The predetermined storage execution means causes the predetermined storage means to store information corresponding to the occurrence of game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means as the predetermined event. Information is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The gaming machine according to the feature H3, wherein the restriction means restricts the firing of the game ball by the launching means.

  According to the feature H4, since the mode information is derived after the launch of the game ball is limited, the mode information in a situation where the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means is a trigger for changing the mode information. It is possible to derive

Feature H5. The information deriving means derives the aspect information after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the emission of the game ball by the emission means is restricted by the restriction means.
The predetermined period is set to a period longer than the longest period assumed to be required for the game ball fired from the launching means to enter the predetermined entering means. Feature H4 The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature H5, when the aspect information is derived, it is assumed as a period of time taken for the game ball fired from the launch means to enter the predetermined ball entry means after the launch of the game ball is limited. Aspect information is derived after a period longer than the maximum has elapsed. Thus, it becomes possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the game ball does not reliably enter the predetermined ball entering means which is a trigger for changing the mode information.

  Feature H6. The restriction means restricts the progress of the game based on the occurrence of the derivation of the aspect information, and the derivation of the aspect information occurs in the situation where the specific operation is performed in the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H5, which does not restrict the progress of the game.

  According to the feature H6, in the situation where the specific operation is being performed in the gaming machine, the progression of the game is not restricted even if the trigger for deriving the mode information occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the specific operation from being impeded by the occurrence of a trigger for deriving aspect information.

  Feature H7. The restriction means is characterized in that, when a trigger for deriving the aspect information occurs in a situation where the specific operation is being performed in the gaming machine, the restriction means restricts the progress of the game after the specific operation is completed. The gaming machine according to feature H6.

  According to the feature H7, when the derivation trigger of the mode information occurs in the situation where the specific operation is being performed in the gaming machine, the progress of the game is restricted after the specific operation is ended, so the execution of the specific operation is inhibited. It is possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted with respect to the generation trigger of the mode information while preventing the occurrence of the mode information.

Feature H8. Lottery process execution means (function of executing the process of step S3003 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes the lottery process when the lottery condition is satisfied;
A game time control means (the thirteenth embodiment) for performing a game play operation over a predetermined continuation period and controlling the game play execution means (special view display unit 37a) to be in a state corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery process. A function of executing the processing of steps S2808 to S2810 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature H6 or H7, wherein the situation in which the specific action is being performed includes the situation in which the game turning action is being performed by the game number execution means.

  According to the feature H8, in the situation where the game play operation is being performed, the progress of the game is not restricted even if the derivation information of the aspect information occurs. This makes it possible to derive aspect information under a situation in which the progress of the game is restricted, while not interrupting the game play operation.

Feature H9. It is equipped with a variable ball entry means (electric power prize device 32) which can be in an open state where the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the ball,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H6 to H8, wherein the situation in which the specific operation is being performed includes the situation in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state.

  According to the feature H9, in the situation where the variable ball entry means is in the open state, the progress of the game is not restricted even if the trigger for deriving the mode information occurs. This makes it possible to derive aspect information under a situation in which the progress of the game is restricted while preventing the open state of the variable ball entry means from being interrupted.

Feature H10. Information storage means (main RAM 65) to which information necessary for controlling the progress of the game is written in the control means (main CPU 63);
Initialization execution means (function to execute the process of step S3709 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) which executes initialization of the information storage means when an initialization opportunity occurs;
A means for preventing the initialization of the information storage means by the initialization execution means when the information setting is made to limit the progress of the game by the restriction means (main in the thirteenth embodiment A function of executing the process of step S3704 of the CPU 63 on the side),
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9, comprising:

  According to the feature H10, when the information setting for restricting the progress of the game is performed by the restriction means, the initialization of the information storage means with respect to the occurrence of the initialization opportunity is prevented. In this way, when progress of the game is restricted in a situation where the mode information is derived, even if an operation to generate an initialization trigger is mistakenly performed in an attempt to cancel the restricted situation, the information is sent to it. It is possible to prevent the initialization of the storage means from being performed.

Feature H11. Another execution unit that executes initialization of the information storage unit when another trigger different from the initialization trigger occurs (function to execute the processing of step S3706 to step S3708 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) Equipped with
Even in the case where the information setting is performed to limit the progress of the game by the restriction means, the initialization of the information storage means by the separate execution means is performed. The gaming machine according to the feature H10.

  According to the feature H11, the information storage unit is initialized when another trigger occurs even when the information setting for limiting the progress of the game is performed by the restriction unit. . This makes it possible to leave room for the initialization of the information storage means to be executed even when the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where the aspect information is derived.

  Feature H12. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H11, wherein the state in which the progress of the game is restricted by the restriction means is canceled when a restriction period has elapsed.

  According to the feature H12, since the state in which the progress of the game is restricted is canceled when the restriction period elapses in the situation where the mode information is derived, the progress of the game is left as it is restricted. It is possible to prevent an event from occurring.

Feature H13. It has effect control means (sound light side CPU 163, display control device 82) which controls the effect execution means (symbol display device 41) so that the effect is executed,
The game machine according to any one of the features H1 to H12, wherein the effect control means causes execution of the effect to be continued even when the restriction means restricts the progress of the game. .

  According to the feature H13, the execution of the effect in the effect executing means is continued even if the progress of the game is restricted in the condition of deriving the aspect information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the termination of the effect immediately even if the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of an opportunity to derive the aspect information while the player is playing the game, It is possible to prevent the player from being confused when a restriction on the progress of the game occurs.

Feature H14. The effect control means controls the effect executing means so that a series of effects (effects for game circulation) are executed over a predetermined effect period when a predetermined start timing occurs. A function to execute the processing of step S2905 to step S2907 of the sound light side CPU 163 in the second embodiment, a display control device 82),
The series effect control means is a control for ending the series effect even when the predetermined effect period has elapsed, when the restriction on the progress of the game is restricted by the restriction means in the situation where the series effect is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature H13, wherein the gaming machine is not performed.

  According to the feature H14, when a trigger for deriving the mode information occurs in a situation where a series of effects is being executed by the effect execution means and the progress of the game is restricted, the predetermined event that is originally a trigger for ending the series of effects The control for ending the series of effects is not executed even if the effect period has elapsed. Thereby, in the situation where the progression of the game is restricted, it is possible to make the series effect be continued, and even when the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where the mode information is derived, the execution of the effect is It is possible to make the player think that it is continuing.

Feature H15. First control means (main CPU 63) having the restriction means;
Second control means (sound light side CPU 163, display control device 82) having the effect control means;
Equipped with
The effect control means controls the effect execution means so that a new effect is started when the second control means receives start trigger information from the first control means.
The series effect control means ends the series effect even if the predetermined effect period has elapsed due to the restriction on the progress of the game being performed by the restriction means in the situation where the series effect is being executed. The gaming machine according to the feature H14, wherein the second control means cancels the situation in which the control to execute control is not performed when the second control means receives the start trigger information from the first control means.

  According to the feature H15, the first control means starts the second control means to start a new effect in a state where the series effect is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to derive the aspect information. It is canceled when the trigger information is sent. As a result, there is no need to transmit dedicated information for canceling such a state in which a series effect is continued from the first control means to the second control means.

Feature H16. The configuration is such that the pattern is variably displayed by the effect executing means as the series of effects, and when the series effect is ended, the pattern is put on standby in the standby area and the image is stopped after the standby display is performed. It is the configuration to be displayed,
The series effect control means is characterized in that the standby display is continued even when the predetermined effect period has elapsed, when the restriction on the progress of the game is performed by the restriction means in the situation where the series effect is being executed. The gaming machine according to the feature H14 or H15.

  According to the feature H16, when the series effect is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to derive the mode information, the standby display before the pattern is stopped and displayed is continued when the series effect is ended. Be done. As a result, it is possible to continue a series of effects in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while making it possible for the player to recognize the stop result of the pattern. Further, when the restriction of the progress of the game is released and the series effect is ended, it is sufficient to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction of the progress of the game is released. Therefore, it is possible to end the series effect smoothly and quickly with respect to the release of the restriction on the progress of the game.

  Feature H17. While the effect control means causes the execution of the effect to be continued in a situation where the restriction means performs the restriction on the progress of the game, the notification corresponding to the restriction being performed is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features H13 to H16.

  According to the feature H17, when the series effect is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to derive the mode information, the corresponding information is also executed together, whereby the series effect is longer than expected. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused about what is continuing.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A41, the feature B1 to B20, the feature C1 to C19, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E4, the feature F1 to F10, the feature G1 to G7, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature H1 to H17. Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Effect control means (sound light side CPU 163, display control device 82) for controlling the effect execution means (symbol display device 41) so that the effect is executed;
Restriction means (a function of executing the processing of step S3404 to step S3407 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) that brings about a state in which the progress of the game is restricted based on the occurrence of the restriction opportunity
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the effect control means causes execution of the effect to be continued even when the restriction means restricts the progress of the game.

  According to the feature I1, the game machine can be suitably managed by being in a state in which the progress of the game is restricted based on the occurrence of the restriction opportunity. In this case, even if the progress of the game is restricted, the execution of the effect in the effect execution means is continued. As a result, even if a restriction trigger occurs while the player is playing a game and the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to prevent the effect from immediately ending, and the restriction of the progress of the game It is possible to prevent the player from being confused in the case where the event occurs.

Feature I2. The effect control means controls the effect executing means so that a series of effects (effects for game circulation) are executed over a predetermined effect period when a predetermined start timing occurs. A function to execute the processing of step S2905 to step S2907 of the sound light side CPU 163 in the second embodiment, a display control device 82),
The series effect control means is a control for ending the series effect even when the predetermined effect period has elapsed, when the restriction on the progress of the game is restricted by the restriction means in the situation where the series effect is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the gaming machine is not performed.

  According to the feature I2, when a restriction trigger occurs and the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where a series of effects are being executed by the effect execution means, a predetermined effect period which is originally an opportunity to end the series of effects has elapsed Even if it does, control for ending the said series production is not executed. Thereby, in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to make the series effect be continued, and it is assumed that the execution of the effect is continued even if the progress of the game is restricted. It is possible to make

Feature I3. First control means (main CPU 63) having the restriction means;
Second control means (sound light side CPU 163, display control device 82) having the effect control means;
Equipped with
The effect control means controls the effect execution means so that a new effect is started when the second control means receives start trigger information from the first control means.
The series effect control means ends the series effect even if the predetermined effect period has elapsed due to the restriction on the progress of the game being performed by the restriction means in the situation where the series effect is being executed. The game machine according to Feature I2, characterized in that the second control means cancels the situation in which the control for the second control means is not executed when the start control information is received from the first control means.

  According to the feature I3, in the state in which the series effect is continued in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted, the start trigger information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means in order to start a new effect To be released. As a result, there is no need to transmit dedicated information for canceling such a state in which a series effect is continued from the first control means to the second control means.

Feature I4. The configuration is such that the pattern is variably displayed by the effect executing means as the series of effects, and when the series effect is ended, the pattern is put on standby in the standby area and the image is stopped after the standby display is performed. It is the configuration to be displayed,
The series effect control means is characterized in that the standby display is continued even when the predetermined effect period has elapsed, when the restriction on the progress of the game is performed by the restriction means in the situation where the series effect is being executed. The gaming machine according to the feature I2 or I3.

  According to the feature I4, when the series effect is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, the standby display of the previous stage in which the symbol is stopped and displayed is continued when the series effect is ended. As a result, it is possible to continue a series of effects in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while making it possible for the player to recognize the stop result of the pattern. Further, when the restriction of the progress of the game is released and the series effect is ended, it is sufficient to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction of the progress of the game is released. Therefore, it is possible to end the series effect smoothly and quickly with respect to the release of the restriction on the progress of the game.

  Feature I5. While the effect control means causes the execution of the effect to be continued in a situation where the restriction means performs the restriction on the progress of the game, the notification corresponding to the restriction being performed is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4.

  According to the feature I5, when a series of effects is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, the corresponding information is also executed together, whereby the series of effects is continued longer than expected. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A41, the feature B1 to B20, the feature C1 to C19, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E4, the feature F1 to F10, the feature G1 to G7, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature I1 to I5 Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage unit by storing the corresponding information in the predetermined storage unit (preferential game number counter 344b). Predetermined storage execution means (function of the main MPU 342 in the sixteenth embodiment to execute the process of step S5001);
Information deriving means (function to execute the process of step S5103 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) for deriving aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the predetermined information;
Constraint means which imposes restrictions on the progress of the game based on the fact that the information derived by the information derivation means is information corresponding to regulation (((Step Function to execute processing),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J1, when a predetermined event occurs, storage of the corresponding information is executed to the predetermined storage unit, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage unit. Then, by using the predetermined information, mode information corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period is derived, and when the derived mode information is information for restriction, the progress of the game is restricted. . This makes it possible to restrict the progress of the game according to the generation mode of the predetermined event, and copes with the case where the generation mode of the predetermined event does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine. It is possible to From the above, it becomes possible to preferably manage the gaming machine.

  Feature J2. The restriction means gives a restriction that enables the aspect information not to be the information corresponding to the restriction based on the fact that the aspect information is the information corresponding to the restriction. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature J2, even if the aspect information becomes the information corresponding to the regulation, the restriction is provided to prevent the aspect information from becoming the information corresponding to the regulation. As a result, even if the aspect information becomes regulation compliant information, it becomes possible to make the aspect information become information of a range assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine.

Feature J3. State transition means for shifting the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state (function of executing the processing of step S4906 to step S4911 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
Predetermined termination means (a function of executing the processing of step S5009 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) for terminating the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined termination trigger occurs;
Equipped with
The restriction means described in the feature J1 or J2 is characterized in that the predetermined gaming state is ended even if the predetermined end trigger is not generated based on the fact that the aspect information is the information corresponding to the regulation. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature J3, in the case where the mode information is information on restriction, the predetermined gaming state is ended even if the predetermined end trigger is not generated. Thereby, it becomes possible to forcibly end the predetermined gaming state according to the generation mode of the predetermined event, and the generation mode of the predetermined event does not coincide with the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine. It is possible to restrict the execution mode of the gaming state.

  Feature J4. The gaming machine according to Feature J3, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to a player.

  According to the feature J4, when the generation mode of the predetermined event does not coincide with the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, it is possible to restrict the degree of advantage.

  Feature J5. The gaming machine according to the feature J3 or J4, wherein the predetermined event is an event occurring in the predetermined gaming state.

  According to the feature J5, when the generation mode of the predetermined event generated in the predetermined gaming state does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, the predetermined gaming state is forcibly ended. This makes it possible to prevent the execution mode of the predetermined gaming state from being separated from the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine.

Feature J6. The predetermined period of time is a configuration that elapses when the number of games becomes equal to or more than a predetermined reference number,
The gaming machine according to Feature J5, wherein the predetermined reference number of times is a number of times greater than the number of times of continuous games of the predetermined gaming state that can be set when the predetermined gaming state is newly started.

  According to the feature J6, it is possible to prevent the situation where the predetermined gaming state is forcibly ended due to the relation with the generation mode of the predetermined event, from occurring in the predetermined gaming state of each time.

  Feature J7. The gaming machine according to any one of the features J3 to J6, wherein a condition for generating the predetermined termination trigger is not notified in the predetermined gaming state.

  According to the feature J7, since the condition for generating the predetermined end trigger in the predetermined gaming state is not notified, even if the predetermined gaming state is forcibly ended in relation to the generation mode of the predetermined event, the player feels uncomfortable It is possible not to give

Feature J8. State transition means for shifting the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state (function of executing the processing of step S4906 to step S4911 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
Predetermined termination means (a function of executing the processing of step S5009 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) for terminating the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined termination trigger occurs;
Equipped with
Any one of the features J1 to J7 characterized in that the restricting means restricts the occurrence of the transition to the predetermined gaming state after that, based on the fact that the aspect information is the information corresponding to the restriction. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature J8, in the case where the mode information is information on restriction, it is restricted that the transition to the predetermined gaming state occurs. This makes it possible to forcibly prevent the transition to the predetermined gaming state according to the generation mode of the predetermined event, and the generation mode of the predetermined event does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine. In this case, it is possible to restrict the execution mode of the gaming state.

  Feature J9. The gaming machine according to Feature J8, wherein the constraining means varies a period during which the transition to the predetermined gaming state is thereafter restricted in accordance with the mode information.

  According to the feature J9, since the period in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted is varied according to the aspect information, the restriction on the transition to the predetermined gaming state is excessively small irrespective of the aspect information Or, it becomes possible to prevent it from being set excessively.

Feature J10. The state transition means executes transition determination processing for determining whether or not to shift to the predetermined gaming state based on the occurrence of the predetermined opportunity (a transition determination means (of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) Function to execute the processing of steps S 4903 to S 4905),
This gaming machine is an alternative that, in the case where the predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted by the restriction means, substitutes an alternative bonus instead of the execution of the transition determination processing. A game machine according to feature J8 or J9, comprising privilege awarding means (a function of executing the processing of step S4912 to step S4914 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment).

  According to the feature J10, when a predetermined trigger occurs in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly inhibited in relation to the mode information, to determine whether to shift to the predetermined gaming state Although the transition decision process of is not executed, alternative benefits are provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that it was useless when the predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly inhibited.

  Feature J11. The substitute bonus imparting means is advantageous in that the content of the substitute bonus is more advantageous as the number of times the predetermined trigger occurs is greater in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted by the restriction means. The gaming machine according to Feature J10, wherein the content of the alternative benefit is likely to be advantageous.

  According to the feature J11, even in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly inhibited, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the occurrence of the predetermined trigger.

  Feature J12. A game machine according to feature J10 or J11, comprising means for notifying that the alternative benefit is given.

  According to the feature J12, it is informed that the substitute privilege is given, so that the player loses the willingness to continue the game even in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly inhibited. It is possible to prevent them from

  Feature J13. When the substitution privilege is granted, the transition to the predetermined gaming state is likely to occur after the situation in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted by the restriction means is released. The game machine according to any one of the features J10 to J12.

  According to the feature J13, it is possible to associate that the alternative benefit is provided with the transition to the predetermined gaming state. As a result, even when the predetermined trigger occurs in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly inhibited, it is possible to make the player expect the transition to the predetermined gaming state. .

  Feature J14. The gaming machine according to any one of the features J8 to J13, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to a player.

  According to the feature J14, when the generation mode of the predetermined event does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, it is possible to restrict the degree of advantage.

  Feature J15. The gaming machine according to any one of the features J8 to J14, wherein the predetermined event is an event that occurs in the predetermined gaming state.

  According to the feature J15, when the generation mode of the predetermined event generated in the predetermined gaming state does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly inhibited. Ru. This makes it possible to prevent the execution mode of the predetermined gaming state from being separated from the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A41, the feature B1 to B20, the feature C1 to C19, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E4, the feature F1 to F10, the feature G1 to G7, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature J1 to J15 Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. An opening / closing body (front door 312) provided so as to be openable / closable,
A predetermined device (main controller 340) provided in a predetermined area exposed when the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing body is performed;
Illumination means (illumination devices 349a and 349b) capable of illuminating at least a part of the predetermined device by being in an illumination state;
Illumination control means (function for performing illumination processing in the main MPU 342) that adjusts the control state of the illumination means according to the position of the opening / closing body;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature K1, in the configuration in which the opening operation of the opening and closing body is performed when confirming the presence or absence of abnormality of the predetermined device, the illumination unit for illuminating at least a part of the predetermined device is provided. This makes it easier to check. In this case, the control state of the illumination means is adjusted according to the position of the opening / closing body. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform illumination by the illumination means in a preferable mode according to the position of the opening / closing body. Thus, management of the gaming machine can be suitably performed.

  Feature K2. The illumination control means is in a non-illumination state when the opening / closing body is closed, and controls the illumination means to be in an illumination state based on the opening operation of the opening / closing body. The gaming machine according to feature K1 characterized by the feature.

  According to the feature K2, when the opening / closing body is closed, the illumination means is in the non-illumination state. This makes it possible to prevent the illumination means from becoming meaningless to the illumination state in a situation where confirmation of the predetermined device is not performed. In addition, when the opening operation of the opening and closing body is performed, the lighting means is naturally turned on. As a result, there is no need to separately perform an operation for putting the illumination means into the illumination state, so it becomes easy to perform the confirmation operation of the predetermined device.

  Feature K3. The gaming machine according to the feature K1 or K2, wherein the lighting unit is provided in the predetermined area.

  According to the feature K3, by providing the illumination means in the predetermined area, it becomes easy to illuminate the predetermined device by the illumination means according to the opening operation of the opening / closing body.

Feature K4. The opening and closing body is displaceable within a predetermined displacement range from the closed position to the maximum open position,
The illumination control means controls the illumination means to be in the illumination state when the open / close member is present in a part of the predetermined displacement range corresponding to the illumination, and the open / close member is opened. The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K3 characterized in that the lighting means is controlled to be in a non-lighting state when it is not present in the lighting corresponding range.

  According to the feature K4, even when the open / close member is disposed at any open position, the illumination means is not in the illumination state, but the illumination means is selectively in the illumination state at a part of the open positions. . This makes it possible to set the illumination means in the illumination state only in a preferable situation when confirming the predetermined device, and to set the illumination means in the non-illumination state in a situation where it becomes difficult to confirm the predetermined device by turning on the illumination means. Become.

Feature K5. The lighting corresponding range does not include the maximum open position,
The game machine according to feature K4, wherein the illumination control means controls the illumination means to be in the non-illumination state when the open / close member is in the maximum open position.

  According to the feature K5, the illumination means is in the non-illumination state when the open / close member is at the maximum open position. As a result, in a situation where the predetermined device is illuminated sufficiently by the illumination of the game hall, the illumination means is in the non-illuminated state, so that the inconvenience of confirming the predetermined device by illumination by the illumination means does not occur. It will be possible to

  Feature K6. In any one of the features K1 to K5, the predetermined device is a control device having a control substrate (main control substrate 341) and a transparent box (substrate box 345) accommodating the control substrate. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature K6, since the control device is illuminated by the illumination means in response to the opening operation of the opening and closing body, the control board of the control device and the substrate box can be easily checked.

Feature K7. A box (casing 311) opened toward the front of the gaming machine;
If the closure is closed, the front opening of the box is closed,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K6, wherein the predetermined area is present in an internal space of the box body.

  According to the feature K7, the predetermined device provided inside the box can be illuminated in response to the opening operation of the opening and closing body.

  Note that for the configurations of the features K1 to K7, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, the features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the information corresponding to that occurs in the predetermined storage means (in the eighteenth embodiment, the first total accumulation buffer 363 and the second total accumulation buffer 364, in the nineteenth embodiment the first The predetermined storage execution means (in the eighteenth embodiment, the main MPU 342 in the eighteenth embodiment) causes predetermined information to be stored in the predetermined storage means by being executed in the history memory 371 and the second history memory 372). A function of executing game management processing, and in the nineteenth embodiment, a function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112);
Information calculating means for calculating aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the predetermined information (in the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S5503 and step S5508 in the main MPU 342, In the nineteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5804 and step S5807 in the management side CPU 112),
Equipped with
As the predetermined storage means, the first storage means (the first total accumulation buffer 363 in the eighteenth embodiment, the first history memory 371 in the nineteenth embodiment), and the second storage means (the eighteenth embodiment) At least a second accumulation buffer 364 (in the nineteenth embodiment, a second history memory 372),
The predetermined storage execution means is
When the predetermined event occurs in the first period as the predetermined period, storing of the corresponding information is performed in the first storage unit, whereby the predetermined information is stored in the first storage unit. First predetermined storage execution means (in the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S5404, step S5409 and step S5414 in the main MPU 342, and in the nineteenth embodiment, the processing of step S5704 in the management CPU 112) And the ability to perform
When the predetermined event occurs in the second period as the predetermined period, the storage of the corresponding information is executed in the second storage unit, whereby the predetermined information is stored in the second storage unit. Second predetermined storage execution means (in the eighteenth embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step S5406, step S5411 and step S5416 in the main MPU 342, and in the nineteenth embodiment, the processing of step S5707 in the management CPU 112) And the ability to perform
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that a part of the first period of one and the second period of one overlap.

  According to the feature L1, when a predetermined event occurs, storage of corresponding information is executed to the predetermined storage unit, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, management of the occurrence mode of the predetermined event is appropriately performed. It is possible to do Further, the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, so that it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the gaming machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. Thus, for example, the game machine itself can perform processing corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output aspect information which is a result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

  In addition, a first storage unit and a second storage unit are provided as the predetermined storage unit, and management in the first period is performed as the predetermined period using the first storage unit and the predetermined storage unit is used using the second storage unit. Management in the second period is performed as a period, and one first period and one second period partially overlap. This makes it possible to derive aspect information corresponding to the management result in the first period in the middle of one second period, and an aspect corresponding to the management result in the second period in the middle of one first period. It is possible to derive information. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving the mode information while securing the first period and the second period as the period in which the management is performed. Furthermore, the aspect information is derived while securing the first period and the second period as the period in which the management is performed, without excessively increasing the storage capacity of each of the first storage means and the second storage means. It is possible to increase the frequency.

  Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein an end condition of a period is the same as the first period and the second period.

  According to the feature L2, even if the management is performed using each of the first storage unit and the second storage unit, it is possible to derive aspect information corresponding to a certain period.

Feature L3. The first predetermined storage execution unit is configured to start a new first period following the first period when one of the first periods ends.
The second predetermined storage execution unit is configured to start a new second period following the second period when one second period ends.
The game machine according to feature L1 or L2, wherein a difference between the first period and the second period is constant.

  According to the feature L3, it is possible to derive the mode information corresponding to each of the first period and the second period, while securing the state in which a predetermined deviation occurs.

Feature L4. The first predetermined storage execution means is configured to start a new first period following the first period when the first period is ended, and the first period is ended. The first storage means is initialized when the aspect information in the first period is calculated by the information calculation means, or the order of storage areas to be stored in the first storage means is set to the first order And
The second predetermined storage execution means starts a new second period following the second period when the second period ends, and the second period ends. The second storage means is initialized when the aspect information in the second period is calculated by the information calculation means, or the order of storage areas to be stored in the second storage means is set to the first order The gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L3 characterized in that:

  According to the feature L4, the first storage means has sufficient capacity to store the predetermined information corresponding to the first period, and the second storage means stores the predetermined information corresponding to the second period. Possible capacity is sufficient. As a result, the excellent effects as described above can be achieved while suppressing the capacities of the first storage unit and the second storage unit.

  Feature L5. The content corresponding to the aspect information in the first period calculated by the information calculation unit is notified when the first period has elapsed, and the information calculation unit is calculated when the second period has elapsed. The information processing apparatus further comprises means (in the eighteenth embodiment, a function for executing the management processing in the main MPU 342 in the eighteenth embodiment) for notifying the content corresponding to the aspect information in the second period which is calculated. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4.

  According to the feature L5, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified as each of the first period and the second period elapses, thereby notifying the content corresponding to the aspect information in a situation relatively close to the current state It is possible to

  Note that for the configuration of the features L1 to L5, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, the features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature H group, the feature I group, the feature J group, the feature K group, and the feature L group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, management of the gaming machine needs to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features is described below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine comprising: each gaming component arranged in an area, and providing a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the cause is due to the operation of the stop operation means And / or a variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped when a predetermined time elapses, and a game machine which provides a bonus to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

  10: Pachinko machine, 24a: out port, 31: general winning port, 32: special power prize device, 33: first operation port, 34: second operation port, 41: symbol display device, 61: main control board, 62: MPU, 63: Main side CPU, 65: Main side RAM, 82: Display control device, 92: Payout side CPU, 102: Reading terminal, 112: Management side CPU, 116: Correspondence memory, 131: For calculation results Memory, 151: notification light emitting part, 163: sound light side CPU, 171: normal counter area, 171a to 171e, ..., counter, 172: open / close execution mode counter area, 172a to 172e, ..., high frequency support mode For counter area, 173a to 173e, ..., counter, 311, housing, 312, front door, 340, main controller, 341, main control board, 342, main MPU, 344b ... advantageous game number counter, 345 ... substrate box, 349a, 349b ... illumination device.

Claims (1)

State transition means for transitioning the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player;
Predetermined storage execution means for storing a predetermined number of games, which is a total of the number of games executed in the advantageous gaming state, in a predetermined storage means;
Deriving means for deriving the ratio of the predetermined number of games to the total number of games which is the sum of the number of games executed in each gaming state including the advantageous gaming state and gaming states other than the advantageous gaming state ;
Restricting means for restricting the occurrence of transition to the advantageous gaming state after that, based on the fact that the rate derived by the deriving means is a rate of regulatory response ;
Equipped with
The state transition means includes transition determination means for executing transition determination processing for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous gaming state based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger,
This gaming machine is an alternative that, in the case where the predetermined trigger occurs in a situation where the transition to the advantageous game state is restricted by the restriction means, substitutes alternative benefits instead of executing the transition decision processing. It is equipped with the privilege giving means,
If the substitution benefit is granted, the transition to the advantageous gaming state is likely to occur after the situation in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state is restricted by the regulating means is released. A game machine that features it.

Images